FOR-A FA-9520, FA-95 RU, FA-95 PS, FA-95 DACBL, FA-95 D-D, FA-95 DE-E, FA-95 AIO, FA-95 ALA, FA-95 CO Operation Manual
Below you will find brief information for Frame Synchronizer FA-9520 FA-9520, Remote Control Unit FA-95 FA-95RU, Redundant power supply unit FA-95 FA-95PS. The FA-9520 is a high-performance frame synchronizer designed for professional broadcast applications. It features two independent frame synchronizers, providing flexibility and redundancy for your workflow. The FA-95RU is a remote control unit that can be used to control the FA-9520, while the FA-95PS is a redundant power supply unit that ensures uninterrupted operation in case of power failure.
advertisement
OPERATION
MANUAL
FA-9520
(FA-9520 Mode)
Frame Synchronizer
FA-95PS
FA-95DACBL
FA-95AIO
FA-95CO
FA-95D-D/DE-E
FA-95ALA
FA-95RU
*
3
rd
Edition
SOFT Ver. 2.00 – higher
Edition Revision History
1
2
Edit. Rev. Date
2013/03/15 First edition (V0100)
Description
2013/05/15 Added FA-95ALA, FA-95AIO, FA-95D-D/DE-E,
FA-95CO options and Auto Video Optimizer feature.
3 2013/05/31 Added FA-95RU option
Software Versions and Supported Options
Version
*1
Supported
Feature/Option
Note
Where
6-10-6, etc.
FPGA1: 1.00 or higher
FPGA2: 1.00 or higher
FPGA3: 1.00 or higher
SOFT: 1.00 or higher
FPGA1:1.10 or higher
FPGA2:1.10 or higher
FPGA3:1.00 or higher
SOFT:1.10 or higher
FA-95PS
FA-95DACBL
FA-95ALA
FA-95AIO
(FA-95AVO)
FA-95D-D
FA-95DE-E
FA-95CO
First edition
Supports FA-95ALA, FA-95AIO, FA-95DE/DE-E,
FA-95CO options and Auto Video Optimizer feature.
FA-95D-D and FA-95DE-E communication methods with the main unit modified to support FA-95ALA.
Supported FA-95D-D/FA-95DE-E versions:
FPGA1: 1.00
FPGA2: 2.00 (1.10 or lower is inoperative in this unit.)
FPGA1:1.10 or higher
FPGA2:1.10 or higher
FPGA3:1.00 or higher
SOFT:2.00 or higher
FA-95RU Modified FA-95RU to add FA-9520 support
FA-95RU Ver. 6.00 or higher-compatible
Added BY-PASS function to FA-95AIO GPI
Added option slot change warning feature
Enhanced FA-95ALA measurement accuracy
FPGA1: 1.00
FPGA2: 1.10
*1 Version information can be seen as described in section 7-8 “UNIT Ver.”.
2
Precautions
Important Safety Warnings
[Power]
Caution
Stop
Operate unit only on the specified supply voltage.
Disconnect power cord by connector only. Do not pull on cable portion.
Do not place or drop heavy or sharp-edged objects on power cord. A damaged cord can cause fire or electrical shock hazards. Regularly check power cord for excessive wear or damage to avoid possible fire / electrical hazards.
[Grounding]
Caution
Hazard
Caution
Ensure unit is properly grounded at all times to prevent electrical shock hazard.
Do not ground the unit to gas lines, units, or fixtures of an explosive or dangerous nature.
Ensure power cord is firmly plugged into AC outlet.
[Operation]
Hazard
Hazard
Do not operate unit in hazardous or potentially explosive atmospheres. Doing so could result in fire, explosion, or other dangerous results.
Do not allow liquids, metal pieces, or other foreign materials to enter the unit. Doing so could result in fire, other hazards, or unit malfunction.
If foreign material does enter the unit, turn power off and disconnect power cord
immediately. Remove material and contact authorized service representative if damage has occurred.
[Transportation]
Caution
Handle with care to avoid shocks in transit. Shocks may cause malfunction. When you need to transport the unit, use the original packing materials or alternate adequate packing.
3
[Circuitry Access]
Stop
Hazard
Do not remove covers, panels, casing, or access circuitry with power applied to the unit! Turn power off and disconnect power cord prior to removal. Internal servicing / adjustment of unit should only be performed by qualified personnel.
Do not touch any parts / circuitry with a high heat factor.
Capacitors can retain enough electric charge to cause mild to serious shock, even after power is disconnected. Capacitors associated with the power supply are especially hazardous. Avoid contact with any capacitors.
Unit should not be operated or stored with cover, panels, and / or casing removed.
Operating unit with circuitry exposed could result in electric shock / fire hazards or unit malfunction.
[Potential Hazards]
Caution
If abnormal smells or noises are noticed coming from the unit, turn power off immediately and disconnect power cord to avoid potentially hazardous conditions. If problems similar to above occur, contact authorized service representative before attempting to again operate unit.
[Rack Mount Brackets, Ground Terminal, and Rubber Feet]
Caution
To rack mount or ground the unit, or to install rubber feet, do not use screws or materials other than those supplied. Otherwise, it may cause damage to the internal circuits or components of the unit. If you remove the rubber feet attached on the unit,
do not reinsert the screws securing the rubber feet.
[Consumables]
Caution
The consumables used in unit must be replaced periodically. For further details on which parts are consumables and when they should be replaced, refer to the specifications at the end of the Operation Manual. Since the service life of the consumables varies greatly depending on the environment in which they are used, they should be replaced at an early date. For details on replacing the consumables, contact your dealer.
4
Upon Receipt
Unpacking
FA-9520 units and their accessories are fully inspected and adjusted prior to shipment.
Operation can be performed immediately upon completing all required connections and operational settings.
Check your received items against the packing lists below.
FA-9520
ITEM QTY REMARKS
FA-9520
AC Cord
Rack Mount Brackets
1
1 set (Incl. ladder strap/retaining clip assembly)
Operation Manual
1 set EIA standard type (Including 4 screws.)
2
FA-9520 Mode (this manual)
FA-9500 Mode (Separate volume)
Option
FA-95RU
ITEM QTY
1
REMARKS
Remote Control Unit
FA-95PS
FA-95DACBL *
FA-95D-D *
1 set
1
1-2
Redundant power supply unit (with AC cord and
AC cord retaining clip)
Digital audio expansion cable (to expand digital audio I/O up to 8 inputs and 8 outputs.)
Normally installed in slot B.
Dolby E/Digital decoder
FA-95DE-E*
FA-95AIO *
1-2
1-2
Dolby E encoder
FA-95D-D option required for FA-95DE-E installation.
Analog component I/O expansion card
(with dedicated connection cable: PC-3307-1)
FA-95ALA * 1-2 Automatic Loudness Adjustment card
* In FA-9520 mode, FA-95D-D, FA-95DE-E, FA-95AIO and FA-95ALA option cards can be installed into either or both option slots A and B. In FA-9500 mode, only the card in slot A is effective, if 2 of the same option cards are installed into both slots. Also, only the card in slot
A is effective, when FA-95D-D and FA-95DE-E are installed into both slots.
The FA-95DACBL option can be installed into either option slot A or B, however, not into both slots.
Software Option
ITEM QTY REMARKS
FA-95CO * 1 Changeover
* FA-95CO is effective only in FA-9500 mode.
Software installation can be verified in the “SOFT OPTION1” and “SOFT OPTION2” menus.
IMPORTANT
The FA-9520 has 2 operational modes; FA-9500 mode, in which the unit operates/functions almost the same as the former FA-9500, and FA-9520 mode with 2 independently operational frame synchronizers. After purchase, select an FA-9520 operational mode for the first time. Refer to section 7-1 “MU OPERATION” for details on the mode selection procedure. This operation manual describes the operation in
FA-9520 mode. When operating in FA-9500 mode, refer to the separate FA-9520 operation manual (FA-9500 mode).
5
Check
Check to ensure no damage has occurred during shipment. If damage has occurred, or items are missing, inform your supplier immediately.
Trademark
Microsoft and Windows are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Microsoft
Corporation in the United States and/or other countries.
Pentium and Intel Core are trademarks of Intel Corporation in the U.S. and/or other countries.
Firefox is a registered trademark of the Mozilla Foundation.
Dolby is a trademark of Dolby Laboratories.
All other trademarks are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners.
Rack Mounting
FA-9520/RPS can be mounted to EIA standard rack units. When rack mounting a unit, remove the rubber feet and use the accessory rack mount brackets (rack ears).
Installing the AC Cord Retaining Clip
Secure the AC cord with the supplied ladder strap/retaining clip assembly to prevent accidental removal from the FA-9520.
Installing the clip
1) Wrap the retaining clip around the AC cord. (with the anchor of the ladder strap toward the unit.)
2) Insert the anchor into the hole next to the AC IN socket.
3) Lightly fasten the clip around the AC cord.
4) Plug in the power cord.
5) Slide the clip on the ladder strap toward the plug.
6) Fasten the clip tightly.
7) Gently pull on the AC cord to ensure it is secured.
2)
4)
5)
3)
6)
Unpluging the AC cord
1) Push the tab on the retaining up to unfasten the clip.
2) Push the tab on the ladder strap up and slide the clip back.
3) Unplug the AC cord.
1) 2)
6
Table of Contents
7
5-4-2-1. About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings ..................................... 49
8
9
10
6-10-2-4. LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT ........................................................ 135
9-2-2-1. About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings ................................... 158
11
12
13
14
1. Prior to Starting
1-1. Welcome
Congratulations! By purchasing FA-9520 Frame Synchronizer you have entered the world of
FOR-A and its many innovative products. Thank you for your patronage and we hope you will turn to FOR-A products again and again to satisfy your video and audio needs.
FOR-A provides a wide range of products, from basic support units to complex system controllers, which have been increasingly joined by products for computer video based systems.
Whatever your needs, talk to your FOR-A representative. We will do our best to be of continuing service to you.
1-2. Features
The FA-9520 is a multipurpose signal processor loaded with all the functions you need for video production.
3G-SDI, HD/SD-SDI, and analog composite I/O is supported in addition to its functionality as a frame synchronizer. The unit provides dual up/down/cross/aspect converters, color corrector, and automatic video optimizer (AVO) as standard features, allowing for the conversion of many types of video and audio signals. Numerous additional optional features include analog component I/O, logo generator, Dolby E encoder and Dolby E decoder. By combining these varied options, a single unit can provide optimal functionality for all your video production scene requirements, including transmission, live production, news reporting, video production, editing and distribution. As long as you have the FA-9520, you will never need another piece of peripheral video equipment!
Standard Features
3G-SDI/HD-SDI/SD-SDI/Analog Composite I/O
Digital/Analog Audio I/O
Main Converter (Up/Down/Cross/Aspect conversion)
Second Converter (Up/Down/Cross/Aspect conversion)
Color Corrector
Auto Video Optimizer (AVO)
Powerful Frame Synchronizer Performance
Logo Generator
Other Features
Video delay
2D/3D comb filter for Y/C separator (composite)
Web browser-based monitoring and control possible
SNMP monitoring and partial control function
Additional Features
Redundant power supply unit
Digital audio expansion cable
Changeover function (in FA-9500 mode only)
Dolby E/Digital decoder and Dolby E encoder
Analog component I/O
Automatic Loudness Adjustment Function
Remote control unit via Ethernet
1-3. FA-95LG GUI Download
The FA-9520 Logo generator function is designed to be used with logo management software,
FA-95LG GUI, enabling logo data import to FA-9520 via Ethernet. The FA-95LG GUI can be downloaded from FOR-A ’s website: http://www.for-a.com/products/fa9500/fa95lg_gui.zip
. The operation manual for the FA-95LG GUI will download automatically along with the software.
15
2. Panel Descriptions
2-1. Front Panel
ON
OFF
No
POWER
LOCK
BY-PASS
EVENT
VIDEO IN FAN ALARM
AUDIO IN DC POWER
GENLOCK
REMOTE
F1
F2
F3
F4
DISPLAY AREA
H D / S D F R A M E S Y S N C H R O N I Z E R
F A - 9 5 0 0
F1
UNITY
F2
UNITY
F3
UNITY
F4
UNITY
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
A V O
MAPPING
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
C C
AES AUDIO
CLIP
DELAY
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
CONV1
ANALOG
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
STATUS
OTHER
CONV2
MASTER
OUT SEL
MODE
VIDEO
AUDIO
Name
1 POWER switch
2
LOCK button
(FA-9500 mode)
FS1/LOCK
(FA-9520 mode)
Description Ref.
Used to turn the unit ON / OFF. Pressing the "｜" side turns on the power.
In FA-9500 mode:
Lit when pressed, and the buttons and controls on the front panel except this LOCK button are disabled.
To enable the disabled buttons and controls, press and hold this button down for several seconds.
In FA-9520 mode:
Used to select FS1 or FS2. There are linked menus that can be changed simultaneously by pressing the FS1/LOCK and FS2/LOCK buttons simultaneously. See 4-2-8 “2-channel frame synchronizer switching ” for details.
Disables operation only for FS1 when pressed and held down.
Press and hold this button down again to unlock operation.
* Both FS1 and FS2 LOCKs can be set simultaneously to disable all other buttons except themselves.
3
FS2/LOCK
(FA-9520 mode)
In FA-9500 mode: Ineffective
In FA-9520 mode:
Used to select FS1 or FS2. There are linked menus that can be changed simultaneously by pressing FS1/LOCK and FS2/LOCK
buttons simultaneously. See 4-2-8 “Switching Between 2-Channel
Frame Synchronizers ” for details.
Disables operation only for FS2 when pressed and held down.
Press and hold this button down again to unlock operation.
* Both FS1 and FS2 LOCKs can be set simultaneously to disable all other buttons except themselves.
4 EVENT button Used to save and load events.
VIDEO IN
Lit green Input signal is present in FS1 or FS2.
Unlit No input signal is present in FS1 or FS2.
5 Status indicator
6 Menu display
AUDIO IN
GENLOCK
REMOTE
Lit green
Unlit
One or more assigned audio output signals
(FS1, FS2 embedded, AES and/or analog audio) are present.
No assigned audio signal (FS1, FS2 embedded, AES and/or analog audio) is present.
Lit green Genlock signal input is present.
Unlit No genlock signal input is present.
Lit green CONTROL SETTING is set to REMOTE.
Unlit CONTROL SETTING is set to LOCAL.
DC POWER
*1
FAN ALARM
Lit red
Unlit
Lit red
A power failure has occurred. Turn the power
of the unit OFF, and contact your supplier.
Power supply is normal.
One or more fans have failed. Turn the power
of the unit OFF, and replace the failed fans if 5-10-1
needed.
Unlit All fans are operating normally.
Used to display menus and make operational settings
16
7
Controls (F1-F4)
UNITY buttons
Used to change operational settings. Turn and select values.
The Unity buttons return the settings to the default values.
Single-arrow buttons
Used to move between parameters.
(Indicators light up to indicate the accessible direction.)
8 Arrow buttons
9 Menu buttons
Double-arrow buttons
Used to move between menus (same as the
menu buttons). (Indicators light up to indicate the 4-2
accessible direction.)
Used to select menus.
*1 The DC POWER indicator functions when the optional FA-95PS is installed.
17
2-2. Rear Panel
FA-9520
FAN1
A B
ANALOG AUDIO
IN1 OUT1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 OUT4 IN OUT1 OUT2
SDI COMPOSITE G ENLOCK IN
1 / 2 3 / 4 5 / 6 7 / 8
DIGITAL AUDIO IN / OUT
REMOTE
LAN1 LAN2
FAN2
FA-9520 with the FA-95PS option installed
FAN1
A B
ANALOG AUDIO
IN1 OUT1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 OUT4 IN OUT1 OUT2
SDI COMPOSITE
GENLOCK IN
1 / 2 3 / 4 5 / 6 7 / 8
DIGITAL AUDIO IN / OUT
LAN1
REMOTE
LAN2
FAN2
No
1
2
Name
SDI IN 1
SDI OUT 1-2
Description
Used for HD/SD-SDI video input 1.
Used for HD/SD-SDI video output 1.
The input signal in SDI IN 1 is output from SDI OUT1 when BY-PASS is enabled or the unit is turned off.
Used for HD/SD-SDI video input 2. 3 SDI IN 2
4 SDI OUT 3-4
Used for HD/SD-SDI video output 2.
The input signal in SDI IN 2 is output from SDI OUT3 when BY-PASS is enabled or the unit is turned off.
5 COMPOSITE IN Used for analog composite video input.
6
7
COMPOSITE
OUT 1-2
GENLOCK IN
Used for analog composite video output.
The input signal in COMPOSITE IN is output from
COMPOSITE OUT1 when BY-PASS is enabled or the unit is turned off.
Used for reference signal input (black burst or tri-level sync) to synchronize the system. The bottom connector is for a loop through. It must be terminated at 75 ohm when not in use.
8
DIGITAL AUDIO
IO
1/2 - 7/8
Used for digital audio inputs and outputs. Select whether
to use for input or output as in section 6-2-4
9
10
11
LAN1
LAN2
Ground Terminal
A 1000/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T Ethernet LAN port.
Used to connect an external remote control unit or to transfer data to an external device. RJ-45
A 1000/100BASE-TX/10BASE-T Ethernet LAN port.
Used to connect an external remote control unit or to transfer data to an external device. RJ-45 (For future use)
Used to ground the unit to protect operators against static electricity and electrical shock.
Ref.
18
No
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
AC IN 2
FAN1
FAN2
Name
SLOT A
SLOT B
ANALOG AUDIO
REMOTE
AC IN1
Description
Used to connect the unit to an AC power source.
(AC100V-240V 50/60Hz)
Enabled only when the optional redundant power unit
FA-95PS is installed.
The operation status can be viewed from the DC POWER
2 menu as described in section 5-10-1 “UNIT ALARM”.
(The menu is displayed if the optional FA-95PS is installed.)
Used to air-cool the unit to prevent overheating. Do not block the ventilation with other equipment or objects. The operation status can be viewed from the FAN1 menu as
described in section 5-10-1 “UNIT ALARM”.
OPTION SLOT A for an optional expansion card.
OPTION SLOT B for an optional expansion card.
Used for four-channel analog audio input and output.
“Analog Audio Connection” for details.
Used for remote control.
Assign functions to each pin.
See section 7-6 “GPI SETTING” for details on assigning
functions.
See section 14 “REMOTE” for connections.
Used to air-cool the unit to prevent overheating. Do not block the ventilation with other equipment or objects. The operation status can be viewed from the FAN2 menu as
described in section 5-10-1 “UNIT ALARM”.
Used to connect the unit to an AC power source.
(AC100V-240V 50/60Hz)
The operation status can be viewed from the DC POWER
1 menu as described in section 5-10-1 “UNIT ALARM”.
(The menu is displayed if the optional FA-95PS is installed.)
Ref.
No
FA-9520 with the FA-95DACBL option installed
FAN1
IN1
Name
1/2
A
3/4 5/6
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
OUT1 OUT2 IN2
7/8
OUT3 OUT4
B
IN OUT1 OUT2
GENLOCK IN
1/2
ANALOG AUDIO
3/4 5/6
DIGITAL AUDIO IN/OUT
20
21
DIGITAL AUDIO IO
1/2 - 7/8
DIGITAL AUDIO OUT
1/2 - 7/8
7/8
LAN1
REMOTE
FAN2
Description
Digital audio input and output connectors.
Used only for inputs when the FA-95DACBL option is installed.
Digital audio output connectors. (FA-95DACBL option)
(The above figure of rear panel depicts an FA-95DACBL option installed in slot A. The option can also be installed in slot B.)
Ref.
19
FA-9520 with the FA-95D-D/DE-E options installed
No
FAN1
IN
IN1
OUT
A
Dolby E
OUT1 OUT2
REF IN
SDI
IN2 OUT3 OUT4
B
IN OUT1
COMPOSITE
OUT2
GE NLOCK IN
1 / 2
ANALOG AUDIO
3 / 4 5 / 6
DIGITAL AUDIO IN / OUT
7 / 8
LAN1
REMOTE
LAN2
FAN2
22
23
24
Name
Dolby E IN
(AUX IN)
Dolby E OUT
(AUX OUT)
REF IN
No
FA-9520 with the FA-95AIO option installed
FAN1
Name
IN1
A
ANALOG COMPONENT I/O
OUT1 OUT2
SDI
IN2 OUT3 OUT4
B
IN OU T1
COMP OSIT E
OUT2
GE NLOC K IN
1 / 2
25
ANALOG
COMPONENT I/O
ANALOG AUDIO
3 / 4 5 / 6
DIGIT A L AUDIO IN / OUT
7 / 8
LAN1
REMOTE
LAN2
Description
Analog component input/output connector on FA-95AIO option.
Connect the supplied I/O cable.
FAN2
Description
Digital audio input connector on the FA-95D-D/DE-E option.
Used to input Dolby E and/or digital signals to the Dolby decoder.
Digital audio output connector on the FA-95D-D/DE-E option.
Used to output signals output from the Dolby decoder and/or Dolby encoder.
Reference signal input connector on the FA-95D-D/DE-E option.
Used to input reference signal (B.B. or tri-level sync) for the Dolby decoder. 75 ohm terminated inside.
Ref.
Ref.
20
2-3. Internal Settings
IMPORTANT
Note that internal switch settings should not be changed from factory defaults. If you have accidentally changed the settings, return them to the factory default settings as shown in this section.
Be sure to have qualified technical personnel perform the settings and adjustments in the interior, or contact your dealer.
CAUTION
Do not access any internal cards while the unit is powered ON. Always power OFF all connected units / disconnect power cords prior to accessing the interior. To protect boards from electrostatic damage, do not touch the components on the boards.
2-3-1. Dipswitch Settings
The following settings can be made at the dipswitches on MAIN CARD inside the unit.
Dipswitch S1 Settings
Pin No. Default setting
1
2
OFF
OFF
3
4
5
OFF
OFF
OFF
6
7
8
OFF
OFF
OFF
Do not change.
Do not change.
Do not change.
Do not change.
Do not change.
Do not change.
Do not change.
Do not change.
Setting
Dipswitch S2 Settings
Pin No. Default setting
1
2
3
4
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
5
6
7
8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Do not change.
Do not change.
Do not change.
Do not change.
Setting
If the FA-95DACBL is installed in SLOT A: OFF
If the FA-95DACBL is installed in SLOT B: ON
If the FA-95DACBL is not installed: OFF
Do not change.
Standard FA-9520: OFF (without FA-95PS)
If the FA-95PS is installed: ON
Do not change.
21
3. Connections
This section describes the connections and settings for specific usages. The descriptions on the settings are based on the factory default. If you are not sure of your current settings, you can reset the unit to the default setting by selecting DEFAULT in the EVENT LOAD menu described in the
3-1. For 2-Channel Frame Synchronizer Use
Input an HD/SD-
SDI signal to SDI
IN1.
Input an HD/SD-
SDI signal to SDI
IN2.
Reference signal
(BB or Tri-level sync signal synchronized with the input signal.)
FAN1
IN1 OUT1
A
OUT2 IN2 OUT3 OUT4
B
IN OUT1 OUT2 1 / 2
ANALOG AUDIO
3 / 4 5 / 6 7 / 8
LAN1
REMOTE
LAN2
FAN2
SDI COMPOSITE
GENLOCK IN
DIGITAL AUDIO IN / OUT
Outputs the SDI IN1 input signal synchronized with the SDI OUT1 and 2 reference signal.
Terminate at 75 ohm if not used.
Outputs the SDI IN2 input signal synchronized with the reference signal from SDI OUT3 and 4.
Settings that need to be checked:
Set FS1 INSEL to SDI1 in the FS INPUT SELECT menu (see section 5-6-1).
Set FS2 INSEL to SDI2 in theFS INPUT SELECT menu (see section 5-6-1).
Set SDI1/2 to FS1 in the OUTPUT ASSIGN menu (see section 5-7-1).
Set SDI3/4 to FS2 in the OUTPUT ASSIGN menu (see section 5-7-1).
Adjust phase and position to match the reference signal in HD PHASE SET to VIDEO
POSITION menus if necessary (see sections 5-9-2 to 5-9-4).
22
3-2. For HD/SD-SDI Simul Output
It is possible to always output HD-SDI signal from SDI OUT1/2, and SD-SDI signal from SDI
OUT3/4 regardless of whether the input signal is HD or SD-SDI.
Input an HD/
SD-SDI signal to SDI IN1.
Reference signal
(BB or Tri-level sync signal synchronized with the input signal.)
FAN1
IN1 OUT1
A
OUT2
SDI
IN2 OUT3 OUT4
B
IN OUT1
COMPOSITE
OUT2
GENLOCK IN
1 / 2
ANALOG AUDIO
3 / 4 5 / 6
DIGITAL AUDIO IN / OUT
7 / 8
LAN1
REMOTE
LAN2
FAN2
Outputs an
HD-SDI signal synchronized with the reference signal from SDI
OUT1 and 2.
Outputs an
SD-SDI signal synchronized with the reference signal from SDI
OUT3 and 4.
Terminate at 75 ohm if not used.
Settings that need to be checked:
Set FS1 IN SEL to SDI1 in the FS INPUT SELECT menu (see section 5-6-1).
Set FS2 IN SEL to SDI2 in theFS INPUT SELECT menu (see section 5-6-1).
Set SDI1/2 to FS1 in the OUTPUT ASSIGN menu (see section 5-7-1).
Set SDI3/4 to FS2 in theOUTPUT ASSIGN menu (see section 5-7-1).
Set FS1 conversion mode (CONV) to 1080i or an HD format such as 720p in the CONV
MODE menu (see section 5-3-1).
Set FS1 ASPECT to 16:9 P 4:3 in the CONV MODE menu (see section 5-3-1).
Set FS1 SD ASPECT to 4:3 in the VIDEO INPUT SET menu (see section 5-6-2).
Set FS2 conversion mode (CONV) to SD in the CONV MODE menu (see section 5-3-1.)
Set FS2 ASPECT to 4:3 F 4:3 in the CONV MODE menu (see section 5-3-1).
* Change ASPECT and/or SD ASPECT settings if necessary.
23
3-3. To Embed AES Input Signals on SDI Signals
The following describes how to embed 4 channel AES signals on SDI signals in SDI OUT 1 and
2 output signals
Input an HD/
SD-SDI signal to SDI IN1.
A B
ANALOG AUDIO
LAN1
REMOTE
LAN2
FAN2 FAN1
IN1 OUT1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 OUT4 IN OUT1 OUT2 1 / 2 3 / 4 5 / 6 7 / 8
SDI COMPOSITE GENLOCK IN DIGITAL AUDIO IN / OUT
The AES signals are embedded to
AUDIO CH 1 through 4 of output signals from SDI OUT1 and 2.
Input AES signals to DIGITAL AUDIO IO
１/2, and IO3/4.
Settings that need to be checked:
Set FS1 IN SEL to SDI1 in the FS INPUT SELECT menu (see section 5-6-1).
Set SDI 1/2 to FS1 in the OUTPUT ASSIGN menu (see section 5-7-1).
NOTE
Change, if necessary, audio settings in the AES AUDIO Settings (AES AUDIO)
(section 6-2) and/or AUDIO DELAY Settings (section 6-6), and/ or the SRC mode
setting in the EMB1 SRC MODE menu (section 6-9-1).
24
3-4. To Embed Analog Audio Signals on SDI Signals
The following describes how to embed a 4- channel analog audio signal on SDI OUT1 and 2 output signals.
Input an HD/SD-SDI signal to SDI IN1.
Input audio signals to ANALOG
AUDIO IN1 - 4 channels.
FAN1
IN1 OUT1 OUT2
SDI
IN2 OUT3 OUT4 IN OUT1
COMPOSITE
OUT2
GENLOCK IN
IO1/2
ANALOG AUDIO
IO3/4
DIGITAL AUDIO
IO5/6 IO7/8
LAN1
REMOTE
LAN2
FAN2
The Analog audio signals are embedded to AUDIO CH 1 through 4 of output signals from SDI OUT1 and 2.
Settings that need to be checked:
Set FS1 IN SEL to SDI1 in the FS INPUT SELECT menu (see section 5-6-1).
Set SDI 1/2 to FS1 in the OUTPUT ASSIGN menu (see section 5-7-1).
NOTE
See section 12 "Analog Audio Connection ” for the ANALOG AUDIO connector
connection.
Change audio settings, if necessary, in the ANALOG AUDIO Settings (ANALOG) menu (section 6-3).
25
3-5. Connecting a Computer
The FA-9520 can be controlled from a computer through a Web browser.
Connect a computer to the FA-9520 as shown below.
Connection using a crossover LAN cable.
A B
FAN1
IN1 OUT1 OUT2
SDI
IN2 OUT3 OUT4 IN OUT1
COMPOSITE
OUT2
PC
GENLOCK IN
1 / 2
ANALOG AUDIO
3 / 4 5 / 6
DIGITAL AUDIO IN / OUT
7 / 8
LAN1
REMOTE
Crossover
LAN cable
LAN2
LAN1
FAN2
Connection using a hub
FAN1
IN1 OUT1
A
OUT2
SDI
IN2 OUT3 OUT4
B
IN OUT1
COMPOSITE
OUT2
GENLOCK IN
1 / 2
ANALOG AUDIO
3 / 4 5 / 6
DIGITAL AUDIO IN / OUT
7 / 8
LAN1
REMOTE
LAN2
LAN1
Straight-through
LAN cable
PC
The FA-9520 network settings must be adjusted for your network after purchase.
The FA-9520 ’s LAN1 IP address is set to 192.168.0.10 at the factory.
Set the IPaddress and subnet mask of the computer.
FAN2
IP address: 192.168.0.1 to 192.168.0.254 (except 192.168.0.10)
Subnet mask: 255.255.255.0
In Windows, open the Local Area Connection Properties dialog box, and open the Internet
Protocol (TCP/IP) Properties window. The settings must be made in the window. See the user ’s manual of your computer for details.
Start a web browser on your computer, and enter the address as http://192.168.0.10
.
Enter the default user name (fa9520), and the default password (foranetwork).
The FA-9520 control window appears on the web browser window.
See section 9-8 “Network Settings” for details on changing the FA-9520’s IP address.
See section 9 “Control via WEB Browser” for details on the FA-9520 web browser control
window.
NOTE
The FA-9520
’s IP address can be checked on the front panel display. See section 7-7
26
3-6. Connecting to the REMOTE (GPI) Connector
Easy control over the FA-9520 from an external device is also possible by connecting the device to the REMOTE connector.
Seven ports are provided on the connector. Assign functions to the respective ports to control the
FA-9520.
A B
Connect a device to the REMOTE connector.
ANALOG AUDIO REMOTE
LAN1 LAN2
FAN1 FAN2
IN1 OUT1 OUT2 IN2 OUT3 OUT4 IN OUT1 OUT2 1 / 2 3 / 4 5 / 6 7 / 8
SDI COMPOSITE
GENLOCK IN
DIGITAL AUDIO IN / OUT
See section 14 “REMOTE” for details on pin assignments and triggers.
See section 7-6 “GPI SETTING” for details on function assignments for the ports.
27
4. Front Panel Operation
4-1. Powering ON
Turn the power ON after all system connections are complete. The indicators on the front panel light up during startup. When startup is complete, the indicators will go off and the VIDEO IN
STATUS menu showing the current input video and reference signal formats will be displayed.
V I D E O I N S T A T U S
S D I 1 : 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 i
S D I 2 : 5 2 5 / 6 0
C O M P O S I T E : 5 2 5 / 6 0
R E F E R E N C E : 5 2 5 / 6 0
5 0 2
If Logo data is stored:
A loading progress message is displayed in the menu display as shown below.
Logo data may take up to 2.5 minutes to load.
L O A D I N G L O G O D A T A . . .
0 0 % C O M P L E T E
4-2. Basic Operation
This section explains how to select menus and parameters.
Most of the menus can be controlled by these basic operations. However, some menus work differently. See the descriptions given for each menu for details.
The FA-9520 has two modes for the menu operation: NORMAL mode, in which setting changes immediately take effect, and LIVE SAFE mode, in which some settings request confirmation
before changes take effect. NORMAL and LIVE SAFE modes can be selected in the FRONT
OPERATION menu (sec. 7-4). Factory default is NORMAL mode. Menus that request a setting
confirmation are shown in the menu list in section 4-2-2. “Menu Buttons” with a black circle (●).
IMPORTANT
Make sure that the FS1/LOCK and FS2/LOCK button LEDs are lit green or unlit before starting an operation. If FS1/LOCK and/or FS2/LOCK button LED(s) are lit orange, all operations on the front panel for FS1 and/or FS2 except the LOCK button(s) are disabled. Press and hold the FS1/LOCK and/or FS2/LOCK button(s) that are lit orange to unlock the operations.
FS1/LOCK button
ON
OFF
POWER PS1/LOCK
PS2/LOCK
EVENT
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
GENLOCL
REMOTE
FAN ALARM
DC POWER
FS2/LOCK button
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
DISPLAY
H D / S D F R A M E S Y N C H R O N I Z E R
F A - 9 5 2 0
F 1
UN ITY
F 2
UN ITY
F 3
UN ITY
F 4
UN ITY
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
C C
AE S AUDIO
A V O
MAPPING
CLIP
DELAY
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
VIDEO S YS
AUDIO S YS
CONV1
ANALOG
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
ST AT US
OT HER
CONV2
MAST ER
OUT SEL
M O D E
VIDEO
AUDIO
28
4-2-1. Accessing Menus
ON
POWER
OFF
PS1/LOCK
PS2/LOCK
EVENT
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
GENLOCL
REMOTE
FAN ALARM
DC POWER
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
DISPLAY
H D / S D F R A M E S Y N C H R O N I Z E R
F A - 9 5 2 0
F 1
UN ITY
F 2
UN ITY
F 3
UN ITY
F 4
UN ITY
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
C C
AE S AUDIO
CONV1
ANALOG
A V O
MAPPING
CLIP
DELAY
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
VIDEO S YS
AUDIO S YS
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
ST AT US
OT HER
CONV2
MAST ER
OUT SEL
M O D E
VIDEO
AUDIO
Menu buttons
VIDEO/AUDIO button
Every press of the VIDEO/AUDIO button alternates the menu button assignments between video menus and audio menus. The button indicators light up green when the buttons are accessible to video menus that are indicated on the top row of each menu button. They light up orange when they are accessible to audio menus that are indicated on the bottom row of each menu button.
Pressing a menu button displays the corresponding menu on the menu display. Menus are divided into categories. The single-arrow buttons allow you to move between menus if the selected menu button has multiple menu pages in the category. The single-arrow button lights up when there are more menus to be accessed in the direction. If the single-arrow button is unlit, the direction is not accessible.
The double-arrow buttons allow you to go to the first menu of the menu button.
The FS1/LOCK or FS2/LOCK button lights green as well as the selected VIDEO button for menus in which settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 separately. If the FS1/LOCK button is pressed and lit green, settings for FS1 are enabled. Settings for FS2 are enabled in the same
manner. These menus are described in the menu list in section 4-2-2 “Menu Buttons”.
Menu Buttons
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
A V O
MAPPING
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
C C
AES AUDIO
CLIP
DELAY
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
CONV1
ANALOG
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
STATUS
OTHER
CONV2
MASTER
OUT SEL
MODE
VIDEO
AUDIO
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
Menu Title
Page number
V I D E O P R O C A M P 1
V I D E O L E V E L : 1 0 0 . 0 %
C H R O M A L E V E L : 1 0 0 . 0 %
S E T U P / B L A C K : 0 . 0 %
H U E : 0 . 0 °
H D / S D F R A M E S Y N C H R O N I Z E R
F A - 9 5 2 0
Parameter Value
In the example above, the PROCESS/SDI AUDIO button has been pressed, so that the
VIDEO PROC AMP menu is displayed.
29
4-2-2. Menu Buttons
The VIDEO/AUDIO button at the bottom right switches between the video and audio-related menus. Pressing the button alternates the button to work as video menu buttons (lit green) and audio menu buttons (lit orange). The menus at the top of each button label are video menus (lit green), and the menus at the bottom are audio menus (lit orange). Menus that request a setting confirmation in LIVE SAFE mode are shown with a black circle ( ●) in the following list.
Menu Button VIDEO menus (lit green)
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
CC
AES AUDIO
CONV1
ANALOG
CONV2
MASTER
AVO
MAPPING
CLIP
DELAY
⃟⊚VIDEO PROC AMP
⃟⊚WHITE LEVEL
⊚BLACK LEVEL
⊚GAMMA LEVEL
⃝COLOR CORRECT
⃟⃝● CONV MODE
⃝CONV SIZE/POS
⃝CONV CROPPING
⃝CONV IMPROVE
⃝CONV SIDE RGB
Not functioning
⃟⃝●AVO SETTING
⃝USER1-5 LEVEL SET
⃝USER1-2 AREA SET
⃝AVO SETUP *1
⃟⃝YPbPr/RGB CLIP
⃝COMPOSITE CLIP
AUDIO menus (lit orange)
⃟EMB1 IN GAIN
EMB1 OUT MONO
● EMB1 IN SET
● EMB1 OUT CLOCK
⃟EMB2 IN GAIN
EMB2 OUT MONO
● EMB2 IN SET
● EMB2 OUT CLOCK
⃟AES IN GAIN
AES HYSTERESIS
AES OUT MONO
● AES I/O SETUP *3
⃟ANALOG IN LEVEL
ANALOG IN GAIN
ANALOG OUT LEVEL
ANALOG OUT MONO
● ANALOG IN SYSTEM
⃟MASTER OUT GAIN
EMB1 OUT GAIN
EMB2 OUT GAIN
AES OUT GAIN
ANALOG OUT GAIN
⃟● EMB1 OUT REMAP
● EMB2 OUT REMAP
● AES OUT REMAP
● ANALOG OUT REMAP
⃟EMB1 OUT DELAY
EMB2 OUT DELAY
AES OUT DELAY
ANALOG OUT DELAY
IN SEL
DOWN MIX
⃟⃝● FS INPUT SELECT
⃝ANC DETECT LINE
⃝ANC DETECT SEL
● AIO A IN MODE *1
● AIO B IN MODE *2
⃟● DOWN MIX1 SET
● DOWN MIX1 ASSIGN
⃟● DOWN MIX2 SET
● DOWN MIX2 ASSIGN
OUT SEL
MODE
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
⃟● OUTPUT ASSIGN
● AIO A ASSIGN *1
● AIO B ASSIGN *2
ANC DATA EMBED
ANC EMBED LINE
⃟⃝LOGO SELECT
⃝KEYER SET
⃟● EMB1 SRC MODE
● EMB2 SRC MODE
● AES SRC MODE
⃟● EMB1 POLARITY
● EMB2 POLARITY
● AES POLARITY
● ANALOG POLARITY
⃟● Dolby AUX OUT A *6*8
● Dolby DEC IN A *6*8
● Dolby DEC REF A
Dolby DEC GAIN A
*6*8
● Dolby DOWNMIX A *6*8
*6*8
⃟● Dolby ENC INPUT A *8
● Dolby ENC SET A *8
● METADATA INPUT *8
◇LOUD MEASURE 1A *4
LOUD CTRL ENA1A
LOUD CTRL SET1A
*4
*4
LOUD CH ASGN1A
*4
◇LOUD MEASURE 2A *4
LOUD CTRL ENA2A
LOUD CTRL SET2A
*4
*4
LOUD CH ASGN2A
*4 ◇
⃟● Dolby AUX OUT B *7*9
● Dolby DEC IN B *7*9
● Dolby DEC REF B *7*9
● Dolby DOWNMIX B *7*9
30
Menu Button
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
VIDEO menus (lit green)
⃟⃝LOGO SELECT
⃝KEYER SET
AUDIO menus (lit orange)
Dolby DEC GAIN B
*7*9
⃟● Dolby ENC INPUT B *9
● Dolby ENC SET B *9
● METADATA INPUT B *9
*5 ⃟LOUD MEASURE 1B
*5
LOUD CTRL ENA1B
LOUD CTRL SET1B
*5
LOUD CH ASGN1B
*5
◇LOUD MEASURE 2B
*5
LOUD CTRL ENA2B
*5
LOUD CTRL SET2B
LOUD CH ASGN2B
⃟LOUD STANDARD
*5
*4 *5
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
STATUS
OTHER
*5
⃟⃝● FS MODE SET
⃝HD PHASE SET
⃝SD PHASE SET
⃝VIDEO POSITION
⃟⃝FREEZE SET
⃟⃝● ANC SET
⃝ANC LOSS SET
⃝WSS AFD ERROR
⃝AUDIO GRP
⃟⃝TEST SIGNAL
⃟● BY-PASS SETTING
⃟⃝SD LINE MASK
⃟COMPOSITE SET1
● COMPOSITE SET2
⃟UNIT ALARM
⃟VIDEO IN STATUS
VIDEO OP INPUT
*1*2
⃟VIDEO OUT STATUS
VIDEO OP OUTPUT
*1*2
⃟AUDIO IN DETECT1
AUDIO IN DETECT2
⃟AUDIO OUTPUT1
AUDIO OUTPUT2
⃟EMB1 IN AUDIO CH1~16
⃟EMB2 IN AUDIO CH1~16
⃟AES IN AUDIO CH1~8
⃟ ANALOG IN AUDIO CH1~4
⃟SDI1/2 OUT AUDIO CH1~16
⃟SDI3/4 OUT AUDIO CH1~16
⃟AES OUT AUDIO CH1~8
⃟ ANALOG OUT AUDIO CH1~4
⃟Dolby OP A AUX *6*8
⃟Dolby OP B AUX *7*9
⃟⃝AFD IN STATUS
⃝ANC IN STATUS
⃝ANC IN STATUS1~2
⃟⃝ANC OUT
⃝S2016 OUT
⃝VI OUT
⃝WSS OUT
⃝ANC OUT1
⃟● FADE IN/OUT
● DIGITAL AUDIO
● AUDIO ERR SENSE
● DIGITAL SILENCE
⃟FS1/FS2 COPY
MU OPERATION
⃟● CONTROL SETTING
⃟FRONT OPERATION
FRONT PANEL SET
⃟GPI SETTING
⃟NETWORK INFO
UNIT Ver.
OPTION A Ver.
OPTION B Ver.
OTHER OPTION
SOFT OPTION1
SOFT OPTION2
VIDEO
AUDIO
VIDEO menus AUDIO menus
*1 Shown if the optional FA-95AIO is installed in option slot A.
*2 Shown if the optional FA-95AIO is installed in option slot B.
*3 Hidden if the optional FA-95DACBL is installed.
*4 Shown if the optional FA-95ALA is installed in option slot A.
*5 Shown if the optional FA-95ALA is installed in option slot B.
*6 Shown if the optional FA-95D-D is installed in option slot A.
*7 Shown if the optional FA-95D-D is installed in option slot B.
*8 Shown if the optional FA-95DE-E is installed in option slot A.
*9 Shown if the optional FA-95DE-E is installed in option slot B.
⃟ Can be navigated to using double (up and down) arrow buttons. “⃟ “ is not shown in the menu display.
⃝⊚ Settings for FS1 and FS2 can be selected or verified separately using the FS1 or FS2 button. ⊚
Can change settings for FS1 and FS2 simultaneously in LINK mode. “⃝ “ and “⊚” are not shown in the menu display.
● When changed in LIVE SAFE mode, single (up and down) arrow buttons and the LED around the control knob of which setting is changed blink confirming the setting change. To set the FA-9520 to
LIVE SAFE mode, change the mode setting referring to section 7-4. “FRONT OPERATION”. “● “ is
not shown in the menu display.
31
4-2-3. Arrow Buttons
Double-arrow buttons (up and down)
<NORMAL mode>
The double-arrow buttons allow you to go to the first menu of the video or audio menus that are assigned to the respective menu buttons or first menus of major setting menus
(designated by “⃟” in the above menu list).
<LIVE SAFE mode>
Button functions are the same as NORMAL mode, however, double-arrow buttons are inoperative while single-arrow buttons are blinking (indicating the FA-9520 is in the setting change confirming state, because a parameter in one of the menus requiring a setting change confirmation has been changed).
Single-arrow buttons (up and down)
< NORMAL mode>
The single-arrow buttons allow you to move between menus within the menus that are assigned to respective menu buttons.
When it reaches the last menu, the light goes off.
< LIVE SAFE mode>
Single-arrow buttons blink when a parameter in one of the menus requiring a setting change confirmation is changed. To confirm the change, press the single down arrow button. Pressing the single up arrow button cancels the change, and the parameter before change will be displayed.
While single-arrow buttons are blinking, all buttons except single-arrow buttons are disabled until either single-arrow button is pressed.
Menus that request a setting confirmation are shown with a black circle ( ●) in the menu list in
section 4-2-2. “Menu Buttons”.
IMPORTANT
NORMAL and LIVE SAFE modes can be switched in the FRONT OPERATION menu
(see section 7-4).
4-2-4. Consecutive Viewing of Settings
<NORMAL mode>
While a menu button is turned on, the menu display will be in consecutive display mode when both single (up and down) arrow buttons are pressed simultaneously. Both single arrow buttons blink when they are in consecutive display mode. To exit the mode, simultaneously press both arrow buttons again. Then arrow buttons will stop blinking.
The single down and up arrow buttons, while in consecutive display mode, can consecutively display all menus in which menu list settings can be changed, from the first to last or last to first menu item. Meanwhile, holding down the single down or up arrow button also allows you to consecutively view menus.
<LIVE SAFE mode>
Button functions are the same as NORMAL mode, however, consecutive display mode is inoperative while single-arrow buttons are blinking (indicating the FA-9520 is in the setting change confirming state, because a parameter in one of the menus requiring a setting change confirmation has been changed). Consecutive display mode will be canceled when a setting is changed.
Order of Consecutive Menu Display
VIDEO Menus (Lit green)
The single down-arrow button consecutively displays menu pages from VIDEO PROC AMP
of PROCESS to ANC OUT1 of STATUS in the menu list in section 4-2-2. On the other hand,
the single up-arrow button consecutively displays menu pages from ANC OUT1 of STATUS to
VIDEO PROC AMP of PROCESS in the menu list.
32
AUDIO Menus (Lit orange)
The single down-arrow button consecutively displays menu pages from EMB1 IN GAIN of SDI
AUDIO to SOFT OPTION2 of OTHER in the menu list in section 4-2-2. On the other hand, the
single up-arrow button consecutively displays menu pages from SOFT OPTION2 of OTHER to EMB1 IN GAIN of SDI AUDIO in the menu list.
* The EVENT button-assigned menus cannot be consecutively viewed. The consecutive display mode is not suppported for EVENT menus.
* While the menu display is in consecutive display mode, pressing the EVENT button cancels the mode.
4-2-5. Page Jump Feature
Some menu buttons allow you to directly go to specific menus when they are held down for at least 1 second. This feature helps you quickly check the state of specific settings.
VIDEO
AUDIO
Button mode
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
VIDEO
AUDIO
AUDIO
Button
CONV1
CONV2
IN SEL
OUT SEL
SDI AUDIO
AES AUDIO
Destination
ANC SET(66)
AFD IN STATUS(601)
VIDEO IN STATUS (502)
VIDEO OUT STATUS (511)
EMB1 IN AUDIO (551)
AES IN AUDIO(559)
Reference
AUDIO
AUDIO
ANALOG
AUDIO OP
*1
ANALOG IN AUDIO(561)
Dolby OP A AUX (591)
*1 or
Dolby OP B AUX (596)
*1
*1 The Dolby OP A AUX (591) or B AUX (596) menu is available only if an FA-95D-D or
FA-95DE-E option is installed in option slot A or B. The page jump feature is inoperative while the FA-9520 is in the setting change confirming state. It becomes operable once
the change is confirmed. Refer to section 4-2-6. “Changing Setting Values” for details.
33
4-2-6. Changing Setting Values
Once the desired menu is displayed, use the control knobs (F1-F4) to change the setting values.
ON
OFF
POWER PS1/LOCK
PS2/LOCK
EVENT
VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
GENLOCL
REMOTE
FAN ALARM
DC POWER
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
DISPLAY
H D / S D F R A M E S Y N C H R O N I Z E R
F A - 9 5 2 0
Menu title
F 1
UN ITY
F 2
UN ITY
F 3
UN ITY
F 4
UN ITY
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
A V O
MAPPING
C C
AE S AUDIO
CLIP
DELAY
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
VIDEO S YS
AUDIO S YS
CONV1
ANALOG
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
ST AT US
OT HER
CONV2
MAST ER
OUT SEL
M O D E
VIDEO
AUDIO
Control
F1-F4
Menu page number
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
V I D E O P R O C A M P 1
V I D E O L E V E L : 1 0 0 . 0 %
C H R O M A L E V E L : 1 0 0 . 0 %
S E T U P / B L A C K : 0 . 0 %
H U E : 0 . 0 °
H D / S D F R A M E S Y N C H R O N I Z E R
F A - 9 5 2 0
<NORMAL mode>
Parameter Setting value
In the above example, the PROCESS/SDI AUDIO button has been pressed while the menu buttons are turned to video menus (lit green) by pressing the VIDEO/AUDIO, so that the
VIDEO PROC AMP menu is displayed.
(If the LEDs around control F1 through 4 knobs are lit, the setting value corresponding to the lit control knob can be changed.)
If you want to change the VIDEO LEVEL setting value, turn F1. To change the CHROMA
LEVEL setting value, turn F2. For SETUP/BLACK, turn F3, and for HUE turn F4. To go to other menus assigned to the menu button, press the single-arrow down button. To return to the previous menu, press the single-arrow up button.
Menu title Menu page number
F 1
F 2
F 3
F 4
F S I N P U T S E L E C T
F S 1 I N S E L : S D I 1
F S 2 I N S E L : S D I 1
4 7
H D / S D F R A M E S Y N C H R O N I Z E R
F A - 9 5 2 0
Parameter Setting value
<LIVE SAFE mode>
Menus that do not request a setting change confirmation (such as VIDEO PROC AMP) are used the same as in NORMAL mode.
Menus that request a setting change confirmation (such as VIDEO INPUT SET) will be in the setting change confirming state when the parameter is changed.
Example:
Pressing the IN SEL/DOWNMIX button while the button is in VIDEO menu selection mode (lit green) will display the VIDEO INPUT SET menu (above figure).
To change the FS1 input video signal, turn F1. Turn F2 to change the FS2 input video signal.
If any setting is changed, single-arrow buttons and the control knob for the setting that has changed will blink in the setting change confirming state. Pressing the single down arrow button confirms the change and LEDs stop blinking, then light. Pressing the single up arrow button cancels the change, the setting returns to before the change, and LEDs stop blinking, then light.
While the FA-9520 is in a setting change confirming state, all buttons except single-arrow buttons, control knobs F1 to F4 and their Unity buttons are disabled. To go to other menus, press either single-arrow button to complete the confirmation.
34
4-2-7. Resetting to Default
<NORMAL mode>
The UNITY indicator light goes off when the setting value is changed from the default value.
Pressing the UNITY button while the light is off returns the corresponding setting value to the default value. Then the light goes off. Pressing the button again returns the value to the previous value before resetting to the default value.
F2
UNITY
F3 F4
Press the UNITY button to reset the value. The indicator lights up orange.
F1
UNITY UNITY UNITY
<LIVE SAFE mode>
The UNITY indicator light goes off when the setting value is changed from default. Pressing the UNITY button while the light is off returns the corresponding setting value to default.
When a setting value is changed, the single-down-arrow button and the LED around the control knob corresponding to the changed setting blinks in the setting change confirming state. Pressing the single-down-arrow button while blinking confirms the change, and the blinking arrow button and control knob lights turn on. Pressing the single-up-arrow button cancels the change, the setting returns to the value before it was changed, and the blinking arrow button and control knob lights turn on.
4-2-8. Switching Between 2-Channel Frame Synchronizers
Independent 2-channel frame synchronizers FS1 and FS2 can be switched to one from another using the FS1/LOCK or FS2/LOCK button.
Menus that allow FS1 and FS2 setting selections are shown with
⃝ or ⊚ in the menu list in
section 4-2-2. “Menu Buttons”.
Either the FS1/LOCK or FS2/LOCK button lights green in a menu that can be set for FS1 and
FS2 separately. The setting for the frame synchronizer corresponding to the lit button can be changed.
Pressing both the FS1/LOCK and FS2/LOCK buttons
simultaneously, for LINK setting menus shown with
⊚ in the menu list in section 4-2-2. “Menu Buttons”, makes one button turn on and
light green, and the other blink. Changing settings for one frame synchronizer will also change settings for the other.
Example 1: Setting VIDEO PROCESS AMP for FS1
V I D E O P R O C A M P 1
V I D E O L E V E L : 1 0 0 . 0 %
C H R O M A L E V E L : 1 0 0 . 0 %
S E T U P / B L A C K : 0 . 0 %
H U E : 0 . 0 °
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Lit green
FS1/LOCK
Unlit
FS2/LOCK
1. Press the PROCESS/SDI AUDIO button to open the VIDEO PROCESS AMP menu. Press the FS1/LOCK button for it to light green.
2. Turn F1 to F4 control knobs to change FS1 settings.
Example 2: Setting VIDEO PROCESS AMP for FS2
V I D E O P R O C A M P 1
V I D E O L E V E L : 1 0 0 . 0 %
C H R O M A L E V E L : 1 0 0 . 0 %
S E T U P / B L A C K : 0 . 0 %
H U E : 0 . 0 °
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Unlit
FS1/LOCK
Lit green
FS2/LOCK
1. Press the PROCESS/SDI AUDIO button to open the VIDEO PROCESS AMP menu. Press the FS2/LOCK button for it to light green.
2. Turn control knobs F1 to F4 to change FS2 settings.
35
Example 3: Setting VIDEO PROCESS AMP for FS1 and FS2 simultaneously
V I D E O P R O C A M P F S 1
V I D E O L E V E L : 1 0 0 . 0 %
C H R O M A L E V E L : 1 0 0 . 0 %
S E T U P / B L A C K : 0 . 0 %
H U E : 0 . 0 °
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Lit green
FS1/LOCK
Blinking green
FS2/LOCK
1. Press the PROCESS/SDI AUDIO button to open the VIDEO PROCESS AMP menu. Press the FS2/LOCK button for it to light green.
2. Press the FS1/LOCK and FS2/LOCK buttons simultaneously. One button will blink and another will light green. Press the FS1/LOCK button for it to light green. In the VIDEO
PROCESS AMP menu, FS1 setting values are displayed. ( “FS1” or “FS2” will be displayed in the space a page number is usually displayed.) Pressing the FS2/LOCK button will light the button green, and display FS2 setting values in the menu.
3. Turn control knobs F1 to F4 to change setting values. The same amount of setting values are changed for FS1 and FS2 simultaneously.
4. To exit simultaneous setting mode, simultaneously press FS1/LOCK and FS2/LOCK buttons again. One button will go off and the other will light green allowing setting changes only for the corresponding FS.
IMPORTANT
FS1 and FS2 cannot be changed simultaneously by pressing FS1/LOCK and
FS2/LOCK buttons at the same time in the following cases:
1. When the Color correction mode for either FS1 or FS2 is set to SEPIA. See section
5-2-4. “COLOR CORRECT (C.C.)” for details on Color correction mode.
2. When FS1 AVO mode is set to AUTO or HOLD. See section 5-4-1 “AVO SETTING”
for details on AVO modes.
NOTE
In FS1/FS2 simultaneous setting mode, each control knob applies identical adjustment values to both FS1 and FS2.
Menus supported for simultaneous setting mode are shown with “⊚” in the menu list in
section 4-2-2. “Menu Buttons”.
Example 4: Disabling FS1/FS2 settings or front panel buttons
To prevent unexpected operation, settings for FS1 or FS2, or front panel buttons can be disabled.
Button light color
Inhibition of Setting procedure Cancelling procedure
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Orange
Green
Green
Orange
FS1 settings
FS2 settings
Hold down the
FS1/LOCK button > 3 sec.
Hold down the
FS2/LOCK button >t
3 sec.
Hold down the
FS1/LOCK button > 3 sec.
Hold down the
FS2/LOCK button > 3 sec.
Orange Orange
Front panel buttons
Hold down both
FS1/LOCK and
FS2/LOCK buttons >
3 sec for them to light orange.
Hold down either the
FS1/LOCK or
FS2/LOCK button > 3 sec for either one to lock.
* When either FS setting is disabled, the menus will display settings of another non-disabled
FS.
* When front panel buttons are disabled, the last displayed menu will remain displayed. All operations except unlocking FS1 or FS2 are disabled.
36
5. VIDEO Menus
Make the menu buttons light up green using the VIDEO/AUDIO button.
(Pressing the button while the buttons are lit orange turns the lights green.)
Then the menus displayed on the upper row on each menu button can be selected.
5-1. VIDEO PROC AMP (PROCESS)
Menu button
VIDEO
AUDIO
V I D E O P R O C A M P 1
V I D E O L E V E L : 1 0 0 . 0 %
C H R O M A L E V E L : 1 0 0 . 0 %
S E T U P / B L A C K : 0 . 0 %
H U E : 0 . 0 °
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
VIDEO LEVEL
CHROMA LEVEL
SETUP/BLACK
Default
100.0%
100.0%
0.0%
Setting range
(Steps)
0.0 - 200.0%
(0.1％)
0.0 - 200.0%
(0.1％)
-20.0 - 100.0%
(0.1％)
HUE 0.0°
-179.8 - 180.0°
(0.2°)
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 separately.
5-2. COLOR CORRECTOR (C.C.)
Allows you to adjust the Color corrector settings.
5-2-1. WHITE LEVEL
Description
Adjusts the video level.
Adjusts the chrominance level.
Adjusts the black level.
Adjusts the color phase.
W H I T E L E V E L
R E D : 1 0 0 . 0 %
G R E E N : 1 0 0 . 0 %
B L U E : 1 0 0 . 0 %
G R O U P A D J U S T
2 Menu button
CC
AES AUDIO
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
RED, GREEN, BLUE
(RGB White Level)
GROUP ADJUST
(Group Adjustment)
Default
100.0%
100.0%
Setting range
(Steps)
0.0 - 200.0%
(0.5%)
0.0 - 200.0%
(0.5%)
Description
Adjusts the white level of R, G, and B components separately.
Adjusts the white level of R, G, and B components all together while retaining the proportion of the separately adjusted levels.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 separately.
If MODE is set to SEPIA in the COLOR CORRECT (C.C.) menu (5-2-4), the menu as shown
below will be displayed.
W H I T E L E V E L
R E D : N O T A D J U S T
G R E E N : N O T A D J U S T
B L U E : N O T A D J U S T
2
C . C M O D E I S S E P I A * 1
*1 If AVO is enabled, the message “AVO IS USING IT” will be displayed.
37
5-2-2. BLACK LEVEL
B L A C K L E V E L
R E D : 1 0 0 . 0 %
G R E E N : 1 0 0 . 0 %
B L U E : 1 0 0 . 0 %
G R O U P A D J U S T
3
Menu button
CC
AES AUDIO
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
RED, GREEN, BLUE
(RGB Black Level)
GROUP ADJUST
(Group Adjustment)
Default
100.0%
100.0%
Setting range
(Steps)
0.0 - 200.0%
(0.5%)
0.0 - 200.0%
(0.5%)
Description
Adjusts the black level of R, G, and B components separately.
Adjusts the black level of R, G, and B components all together while retaining the proportion of the separately adjusted levels.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, separately.
If MODE is set to SEPIA in the COLOR CORRECT (C.C.) menu (5-2-4), the menu as shown
below will be displayed.
B L A C K L E V E L 3
R E D : N O T A D J U S T
G R E E N : N O T A D J U S T
B L U E : N O T A D J U S T
C . C M O D E I S S E P I A * 1
*1 If AVO is enabled, the message “AVO IS USING IT” will be displayed.
5-2-3. GAMMA LEVEL
G A M M A L E V E L
R E D : 1 0 0 . 0 %
G R E E N : 1 0 0 . 0 %
B L U E : 1 0 0 . 0 %
G R O U P A D J U S T
4 Menu button
CC
AES AUDIO
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
RED, GREEN, BLUE
(RGB Gamma level)
GROUP ADJUST
(Group Adjustment)
Default
100.0%
100.0%
Setting range
(Steps)
0 - 200%
(0.5%)
0 - 200%
(0.5%)
Description
Adjusts the gamma level of R, G, and B components separately.
Adjusts the gamma level of R, G, and B components all together while retaining the proportion of the separately adjusted levels.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, separately.
If MODE is set to SEPIA in the COLOR CORRECT (C.C.) menu (5-2-4), the menu as shown
below will be displayed.
Only the value of GREEN can be changed.
4 G A M M A L E V E L
S E P I A : 1 0 0 . 0 %
The menu appears as shown below if AVO is enabled.
G A M M A L E V E L 4
R E D : N O T A D J U S T
G R E E N : N O T A D J U S T
B L U E : N O T A D J U S T
A V O I S U S I N G I T
38
5-2-4. COLOR CORRECT (C.C.)
C O L O R C O R R E C T
M O D E : B A L A N C E
C U R V E : C E N T E R
5
Menu button
CC
AES AUDIO
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
MODE
(Correcti on Mode)
BALANCE
BALANCE
DIFFERENTIAL
SEPIA
*1
Selects a correction mode from
BALANCE (RGB), DIFFERENTIAL
(YPbPr), or SEPIA.
BALANCE: RGB signal correction mode
Allows you to adjust the white balance. Gray scale can be changed by adjusting R, G and B levels.
DIFFERENTIAL: Color difference signal mode
Allows you to adjust contrast without changing white balance.
R, G and B levels can be changed without affecting gray scale. This adjustment is effective for images with different color saturation levels.
SEPIA: Sepia mode
Useful for creating black and white images.
CURVE
(Gamma Curve)
CENTER
CENTER
BLACK
WHITE
Selects a gamma curve type.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, separately.
*1 SEPIA is unselectable when LINK setting mode is enabled in the FA-9520 or a connected
FA-95RU. To select SEPIA, disable LINK setting mode. See section 4-2-8. “Switching
Between 2-Channel Frame Synchronizers ” for details on LINK settings.
If MODE is set to SEPIA, the menu as shown below will be displayed.
C O L O R C O R R E C T 5
M O D E : S E P I A
C U R V E : C E N T E R
S E P I A L E V E L : 2 5 . 0 %
S E P I A C O L O R : - 1 6 0 . 0 °
Parameter
SEPIA LEVEL
Default
25.0%
SEPIA COLOR -160.0°
Setting range
(Steps)
0％ - 100％
(0.1％)
-179.8° - 180.0°
(0.2°)
Description
Adjusts the color level in the SEPIA mode.
Adjusts the color in the SEPIA mode.
If AVO is enabled, the menu as shown below will be displayed.
C O L O R C O R R E C T 5
M O D E : N O T A D J U S T
C U R V E : N O T A D J U S T
A V O I S U S I N G I T
39
5-2-5. Color Corrector and AVO Modes
Auto Video Optimizer and Color Corrector use the same circuit. The color corrector settings
are not fully changeable when AVO mode is set to Auto. (See section 5-4-1 “AVO SETTING”.)
Changeable Color Corrector menus according to AVO modes
AVO Modes
Color Corrector Menus
AUTO HOLD OFF
-
✓ ✓
-
-
-
✓
✓
-
✓: Enabled setting
✓
✓
✓
-: Disabled setting
WHITE LEVEL
BLACK LEVEL
GAMMA LEVEL
CORRECTION MODE /CURVE
IMPORTANT
DIFFERENTIAL and SEPIA mode settings under COLOR CORRECT will automatically change to BALANCE mode whenever AVO is enabled.
While AVO is being used, the color corrector performs correction as if MODE is set to
BALANCE and CURVE is set to BLACK in the COLOR CORRECT menu.
Color correction enabled by setting AVO Control to HOLD is also performed in the above state.
40
5-3. CONV (UP/DOWN/CROSS CONVERTER)
Both FS1 and FS2 are supported in up/down/cross conversions, as well as aspect ratio conversion according to S2016, VI, or WSS AFD (Active Format Description) data.
Input signals that are assigned to FS1 and FS2 under IN SEL in the FS INPUT SELECT menu
(section 5-6-1) will be synchronized and input to an FS1 or FS2 UP/DOWN/CROSS
CONVERTER, respectively. The signals will then be processed in the respective converters, and
output to output connectors according to the output assignments set in the VIDEO OUT SELECT
41
5-3-1. CONV MODE
Converts video signals according to the AFD (Active Format Description) data.
6 C O N V M O D E
C O N V : B Y - P A S S
A S P E C T : A F D ( 4 : 3 )
1 0 8 0 / 5 9 i > > 5 2 5 / 6 0
Menu button
CONV1
ANALOG
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
CONV
Default
BY-PASS
Setting range
BY-PASS
SD
1080i
720p
1080PsF
1080p(3G)
Description
Selects a mode for UP/DOWN CONVERTER to convert the input signal in FS1 and FS2.
BY-PASS: Outputs the signal without converting.
SD: Converts signals to a standard definition format.
1080i: Converts signals to a 1080i format.
720p: Converts signals to a 720p format.
1080PsF: Converts signals to a 1080PsF format.
1080P(3G): Converts signals to a 3G-SDI 1080p format.
ASPECT
AFD(4:3)
AFD
AFD(4:3)
AFD-ALT(4:3)
AFD(16:9)
AFD-ALT(16:9)
4:3 L 16:9 T
4:3 L 14:9 T
4:3 L>16:9
4:3 F 4:3
4:3 L16:9PRTD
4:3 L 14:9
4:3 F ALT14:9
4:3 L ALT14:9
*1
4:3 L ALT 4:3
*1
16:9L >16:9
16:9 F 16:9
*1
16:9 P 4:3
16:9 F PRTD
*1
16:9 P 14:9
*1
16:9P ALT 14:9
*1
16:9F ALT14:9
*1
16:9F ALT4:3
*1
AFD
AFD-ALT
16:9 L>16:9
16:9 F 16:9
16:9 P 4:3
16:9 F PRTD
16:9 P 14:9
16:9P ALT14:9
16:9F ALT14:9
16:9F ALT4:3
Selectable aspect ratio settings when CONV is set to SD.
AFD(4:3), AFD-ALT(4:3), AFD(16:9),
AFD-ALT(16:9) automatically select an aspect ratio according to the AFD data in the input signal.
If no AFD data is found in the input signal, the aspect ratio will be determined according to the setting made under ANC LOSS SET (Sec.
To output video signals in 4:3, select either ratio with (4:3). To output in 16:9, select either ratio with (16:9). Other options will output video signals
in the specified aspect ratio. See section 20
“About AFD (Active Format Description)” for
details.
Options (4:3 L 16:9 T to 16:9 F ALT 4:3) other than the above four require the input signal
aspect ratio to be specified in VIDEO INPUT SET
(Sec. 5-6-2) if the input signal is an SD signal.
Selectable aspect ratios when CONV is set to
1080i, 720p, 1080PsF, or 1080(3G).
AFD and AFD-ALT automatically select an aspect ratio according to the AFD data in the input signal.
If no AFD data is found in the input signal, the aspect ratio will be determined according to the
setting made under ANC LOSS SET (Sec. 5-9-7).
Options other than the above two are output in
the specific aspect ratio. See section 20 “About
AFD (Active Format Description) ” for details on
conversions according to AFD data.
- - -
The format of the input signal to CONV and the format the signal will be converted to in CONV of th
FS1 and FS2 are displayed on the 4 row.
*1 BT1119 WSS will be embedded according to the WSS AFD ERROR settings (Sec. 5-9-8) for the
non-WSS aspect ratio conversions.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2 respectively.
42
5-3-2. CONV Conversion Table
NTSC formats
PAL formats
Possible Conversions in CONV for Input Signal Formats and Mode Selections
(Common for FS1 and FS2)
CONVERTER mode selection
Input signal
525/60
1080/59i
720/59p
1080/59p
625/50
1080/50i
720/50p
1080/50p
SD
525/60
525/60
525/60
525/60
625/50
625/50
625/50
625/50
1080i
1080/59i
1080/59i
1080/59i
1080/59i
1080/50i
1080/50i
1080/50i
1080/50i
720p
720/59p
720/59p
720/59p
720/59p
720/50p
720/50p
720/50p
720/50p
1080PsF
1080/23PsF
1080/59i
(BY-PASS)
720/59p
(BY-PASS)
1080/59p
(BY-PASS)
1080/24PsF
1080/50i
(BY-PASS)
720/50p
(BY-PASS)
1080/50p
(BY-PASS)
1080p(3G)
1080/59p
1080/59p
1080/59p
1080/59p
1080/50p
1080/50p
1080/50p
1080/50p
Other formats
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
525/60
625/50
1080/23PsF
(BY-PASS)
1080/24PsF
(BY-PASS)
1080/23PsF
(BY-PASS)
1080/24PsF
(BY-PASS)
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
1080/23PsF
(BY-PASS)
1080/24PsF
(BY-PASS)
In the conversions to the formats indicated as (BY-PASS), the CONV SIZE/POS, CONV CROPPING,
CONV IMPROVE, and CONV SIDE RGB settings cannot be changed.
5-3-3. CONV SIZE/POS
C O N V S I Z E / P O S
H S I Z E : 1 0 0 . 0 %
V S I Z E : 1 0 0 . 0 %
H P O S : 0 P I X E L
V P O S : 0 L I N E
7
Menu button
CONV1
ANALOG
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
H SIZE
(Horizontal Size)
Default
100.0％
Setting range
(Steps)
50.0 - 150.0%
(0.1%)
Description
Adjusts the width of the video displayed on the monitor.
*1
V SIZE
(Vertical Size)
H POS
(Horizontal Position)
V POS
(Vertical Position)
100.0％
0 Pixel
0 Line
50.0 - 150.0%
(0.1%)
Variable
*2
(2 Pixel)
Variable
*2
(1 Line)
Adjusts the height of the video displayed on the monitor.
*1
Adjusts the horizontal position of the video displayed on the monitor.
Adjusts the vertical position of the video displayed on the monitor.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
*1 If the size is made smaller than the original size, set the background color under CONV
*2 The following parameters interact with each other. When you change one of their setting values, setting ranges of other parameters will also change.
SYNC FRMT Parameter in FS MODE SET (see section 5-9-1).
CONV parameter in CONV MODE (see section 5-3-1).
If the CONV mode is set to BY-PASS, the CONV SIZE/POS setting cannot be changed. Also, it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as (BY-PASS) in the
CONV Conversion Table (see section 5-3-2). In both cases, the menu as shown below will be
displayed.
7 C O N V S I Z E / P O S
H S I Z E : N O T A D J U S T
V S I Z E : N O T A D J U S T
H P O S : N O T A D J U S T
V P O S : N O T A D J U S T
43
5-3-4. CONV CROPPING
C O N V C R O P P I N G
L E F T : 0 P I X E L
R I G H T : 0 P I X E L
T O P : 0 L I N E
B O T T O M : 0 L I N E
8 Menu button
CONV1
ANALOG
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
LEFT
RIGHT
TOP
BOTTOM
Default
0 Pixel
0 Pixel
0 Line
0 Line
Setting range
(Steps)
Variable *1
(2 Pixel)
Variable *1
(2 Pixel)
Variable *1
(1 Line)
Variable *1
(1 Line)
Description
Crops the left side of the video.
Crops the right side of the video.
Crops the top of the video.
Crops the bottom of the video.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
These setting ranges vary depending on the input signal format. The LEFT and RIGHT settings, and the TOP and BOTTOM settings interact with each other. If the size cannot be adjusted as desired, try changing the setting of another parameter.
*1 The following parameters interact with each other. When you change one of their setting values, setting ranges of other parameters will also change.
Video format
SYNC FRMT Parameter in FS MODE SET (see section 5-9-1).
If the CONV mode is set to BY-PASS, the CONV CROPPING setting cannot be changed. Also, it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as (BY-PASS) in the
CONV Conversion Table (see section 5-3-2). In both cases, the menu as shown below will be
displayed.
C O N V C R O P P I N G
L E F T : N O T A D J U S T
R I G H T : N O T A D J U S T
T O P : N O T A D J U S T
B O T T O M : N O T A D J U S T
8
IMPORTANT
The cropping setting range resets itself if the video input changes. If the set value exceeds the setting range due to an input change, the set value will automatically reset itself to the default value. If the set value exceeds the horizontal range, the LEFT and RIGHT settings will reset to their default values. If the value exceeds the vertical range, the TOP and BOTTOM settings will also reset accordingly.
44
5-3-5. CONV IMPROVE
C O N V I M P R O V E
M O T I O N : A D A P T I V E
A N T I A L I A S H : N O R M A L
A N T I A L I A S V : N O R M A L
E N H A N C E : L E V E L 0
9
Menu button
CONV1
ANALOG
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
MOTION
ANTIALIAS H
ANTIALIAS V
*1
*1
ADAPTIVE
NORMAL
NORMAL
FIELD
ADAPTIVE
FRM(ODD 1st)
FRM(EVEN 1st)
WEAK 8-1
NORMAL
STRONG1-8
WEAK 8-1
NORMAL
STRONG1-8
FIELD: Generates a progressive scan image from one field of an interlaced scan image.
The created image has no motion artifacts, but vertical resolution will be reduced.
ADAPTIVE:
Detects whether there is motion or no motion in the scene, and generate an optimal progressive scan image.
FRM(ODD 1st):
Generates a progressive scan image from two fields (odd/even) of and interlaced scan image.
Suitable for the progressive segment frame input of progressive scan signals.
FRM(EVEN 1st):
Generates a progressive scan image from two fields (even/odd) of interlaced scan image.
Performs horizontal anti-aliasing for the output video image.
WEAK 8 to STRONG 8 (low to high)
This setting cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated
as (BYPASS) in the CONV Conversion
Performs vertrical anti-aliasing for the output video image.
WEAK 8 to STRONG 8 (low to high)
This setting cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated
as (BYPASS) in the CONV Conversion
ENHANCE
*1
LEVEL 0 LEVEL 0-8
Sharpens the output video image.
LEVEL 0 to 8 (low to high)
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
*1 ANTIALIAS and ENHANCE settings cannot be changed if CONV MODE is set to BY-PASS,
or the conversion is set to the formats indicated as (BY-PASS) in the CONV Conversion
In both cases, the menu as shown below will be displayed.
C O N V I M P R O V E
M O T I O N : F I E L D
A N T I A L I A S H : N O T A D J
A N T I A L I A S V : N O T A D J
E N H A N C E : N O T A D J U S T
9
IMPORTANT
Setting MOTION to FRM (ODD 1st) or FRM (EVEN 1st) for input signals other than progressive segment frame inputs causes motion artifacts to appear. In such case, change the MOTION setting to FIELD or ADAPTIVE.
45
5-3-6. CONV SIDE RGB
C O N V S I D E R G B
R E D : 0
G R E E N : 0
B L U E : 0
G R O U P A D J U S T
1 0
Menu button
CONV1
ANALOG
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter Default Setting range Description
RED, GREEN, BLUE
(Background color)
0 0 - 255
Sets background color that will be visible if the converted image is set smaller than
original in CONV SIZE/POS (5-3-3).
R, G, and B components can be adjusted separately.
F4 control knob allows you to adjust R, G, and B at the same time.
Group Adjust
(Group Adjustment)
0 0 - 255
Adjusts the R, G, and B components separately, then turns this Group Adjust on. Changing any R, G, or B value will change the values of the three components accordingly while retaining the proportion.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
If the CONV mode is set to BY-PASS, the CONV SIDE RGB setting cannot be changed. Also, it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as (BY-PASS) in the
CONV Conversion Table (see section 5-3-2). In both cases, the menu as shown below will be
displayed.
C O N V I M P R O V E
R E D : N O T A D J U S T
G R E E N : N O T A D J U S T
B L U E : N O T A D J U S T
1 0
46
5-4. Auto Video Optimizer (AVO)
AVO settings are effective for FS1 video signals.
5-4-1. AVO SETTING
A V O S E T T I N G
M O D E : O F F
L E V E L : S T A N D A R D
A R E A : F U L L S C R E E N
A R E A D I S P L A Y : O F F
1 6
Menu button
AVO
MAPPING
Parameter
MODE
(Auto level adjustment)
Default
OFF
Setting range
OFF
AUTO
*1
HOLD
*1
Description
AUTO: Enables automatic level adjustment.
HOLD: Stops auto level adjustment. When
MODE selection is changed from AUTO to
HOLD, the signal levels stop and remain as they are.
OFF: Disables automatic level adjustment.
When MODE selection is changed from AUTO to OFF, the signal levels return to their state before auto level adjustment is applied. When set to OFF, the signal levels can be manually
adjusted. See section 5-4-4-1 “Manual Level
LEVEL
(Adjustment level)
STANDARD
DARKER
DARK
STANDARD
BRIGHT
BRIGHTER
USER1,
USER2,
USER3,
USER4,
USER5
Selects a type of signal level adjustment.
10 options are available: Five fixed options and five custom options.
Darker < Dark < Standard < Bright < Brighter
User1 - User5: Customizable
Selecting one user settings from User1 through
5 opens the USER1 - 5 LEVE SET page. See
section 5-4-3 “USER1 - 5 LEVEL SET” for
details.
AREA
(Sample area)
AREA
DISPLAY
(Marker display)
FULL
SCREEN
OFF
FULL
SCREEN,
-
BOTTOM
RIGHT,
USER
AREA1,
USER
AREA2
OFF,
ON
Sets the sample area to calculate the adjustment.
10 options are available: Eight fixed areas and two custom areas.
Fixed areas
FULL SCREEN, LETTER BOX, PILLAR BOX,
CENTER, TOP-LEFT, TOP-RIGHT,
BOTTOM LEFT, BOTTOM RIGHT
(See "Sample Area" in the next page.)
Custom areas
Selecting USER AREA1, or 2 opens the USER
AREA SET page.
details.
Sets sample area display ON/OFF. If set to ON, the sample area appears as a semi-transparent white rectangle on all output videos.
It is set to OFF at startup. Also, if MODE is set to
OFF, AREA DISPLAY is automatically set to
OFF.
*1 MODE cannot be set to AUTO or HOLD when LINK setting mode is enabled in the FA-9520 or a connected FA-95RU. To set to AUTO or HOLD, disable LINK setting mode. See sec.
4-2-8. “Switching Between 2-Channel Frame Synchronizers” for details on LINK settings.
IMPORTANT
The Auto Level Adjustment will provide optimal results in many cases, but it does not always yield optimal results. Sample Area determines the area where the data are sampled and the level adjustments are applied to whole images.
47
Sample Area (Fixed area)
Eight available sample areas are as shown below. Data are continuously sampled within each
“USER1, 2 AREA SET” for USERAREA 1, and 2.)
Sample area Sample area Sample area
Sample area
FULL SCREEN
Sample area
LETTER BOX
Sample area
PILLAR BOX
Sample area
CENTER
Sample area
TOP LEFT TOP RIGHT BOTTOM LEFT BOTTOM RIGHT
5-4-2. AVO SETUP
1 9 A V O S E T U P
R E S P O N S E : L E V E L 3
S C E N E C U T : O F F
G A M M A M O D E : O N
Menu button
AVO
MAPPING
Parameter
RESPONSE
(Filtering strength)
SCENE CUT
(Scene cut detection)
*1
Default
LEVEL 3
OFF
Setting range
LEVEL
1 - 5
OFF,
ON
Description
Sets the filtering strength for calculating the mean distances that are applied to histograms created using the sample data.
The larger the value, the more gradually filtering is performed, with a more stable image but slower response.
The smaller the value, the less stable the image, but with a faster response.
When set to ON, the cut transitions are detected and images are properly adjusted even if there are sharp luminance changes.
GAMMA MODE
(Gamma correction)
ON
OFF,
ON
When set to ON, signal levels are adjusted using the GAMMA LEVEL
settings. (See section 5-2-3 “GAMMA
*1 The follwoing delay will be produced when performing scene cut detection depending on the input signal format.
Interlaced formats:
Progressive and PsF formats:
2 fields (1 frame) + some lines
2 frames + some lines
Scene cut detection images will be properly adjusted and output when enough frame delay is set. If the amount of frame delay is insufficient, Scene cut detection will not be properly processed.
To perform AVO scene cut detection properly, set enough delay using the FRAME DELAY function. The output delay varies depending on the SYNCRO MODE, input signal format,
FRAME DELAY setting, and video signal H/V phase difference. FRAME DELAY settings are described on the next page.
48
5-4-2-1. About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings
To properly perform AVO scene cut detection and adjustment, the FRAME DELAY must
be set in the setting range according to the menu settings (5-9-1 “FS MODE SET” menu)
as shown in the table below.
FRAME DELAY Setting Range Chart
*2
Setting Rrange per Input Video Format
*1
SYNCHRO
FRAME
LINE/AVDL
525/60i
625/50i
1080/59i
1080/50i
1 to 8 FRAME
Cannot be set
720/59p/50p
1080/59p,50p
1080/23PsF, 24PsF
2 to 8 FRAME
Cannot be set
INPUT 2 to 8 FRAME 3 to 8 FRAME
*1 FS mode settings under SYNCRO in section 5-9-1
*2 The current input video format can be verified in the VIDEO IN STATUS menu (Sec.
5-10-2) for each input selected in the FS INPUT SELECT menu (Sec. 5-6-1).
IMPORTANT
Adjust the audio delay as required in the AUDIO DELAY Settings menu (Sec. 6-6) to
account for any additional video signal delay produced by changing FRAME DELAY.
49
5-4-3. USER1 - 5 LEVEL SET
Setting LEVEL of the AVO SETTING menu to one user settings from USER1 through 5 opens the USER1 - 5 LEVEL SET menu. This menu allows you to store five sets of level settings as
USER1 – 5.
U S E R 1 L E V E L S E T 1 7
I N W H I T E : 9 9 . 0 %
I N B L A C K : 1 . 0 %
T A R G E T W H I T E : 8 0 . 0 %
T A R G E T B L A C K : 3 . 0 %
Menu button
AVO
MAPPING
Each USER1 – 5 is composed of four level settings such as IN WHITE, IN BLACK, TARGET
WHITE, and TARGET BLACK. The default settings of USERs 1 through 5 are the same as those for DARKER, DARK, STANDARD, BRIGHT, and BRIGHTER, respectively. The desirable level settings are easily obtained by adjusting values from the default values.
USER1 – 5 Default Settings
Parameter SELECT LEVEL (Adjustment level)
(Custom levels) USER1
Default
USER2
Default
USER3
Default
USER4
Default
(Fixed levels)
IN WHITE
Darker
99.0%
IN BLACK 1.0%
TARGET WHITE 80.0%
TARGET BLACK 3.0%
Dark
98.0%
2.0%
88.0%
5.0%
Standard
97.0%
3.0%
93.0%
7.0%
Bright
95.0%
5.0%
95.0%
12.0%
IMPORTANT
USER 5
Default
Brighter
93.0%
7.0%
97.0%
17.0%
While the USER setting menu is open and the LEVEL is changed via web browser or
the connected FA-95RU to other than USERs 1 through 5 in the AVO SETTING menu
(5-4-1), the menu will change to display the AVO SETTING menu (5-4-1).
IN WHITE and IN BLACK
These two parameters determine the highest and lowest levels of luminance in the input signal.
Parameter
Setting range
(step)
Description
IN WHITE
80.0% -
99.0%
(0.5%)
The maximum value of luminance in the sample data is defined as 100%. Based on this reference value, this determines the highest level of luminance for level control.
If the value is too large, some noise may be picked up and cause the results to become unstable. If the value is too small, it increases contrast, but it may cause the images to be overexposed.
IN BLACK
1.0% -
20.0%
(0.5%)
The minimum value of luminance in the sample data is defined as 0%. Based on this reference value, this determines the lowest level of luminance for level control.
If the value is too small, some noise may be picked up and cause the results to become unstable. If the value is too large, it increases contrast, but it may cause the images to be underexposed.
50
The figures below are luminance histograms of input.
(X-axis: Luminance level, Y-axis: Number of pixels)
Minimum value of inputs
0％
Maximum value of inputs 100％
IN BLACK
IN BLACK
IN WHITE
Wide correction range setting
IN WHITE
IN BLACK IN WHITE
Narrow correction range setting
TARGET WHITE and TARGET BLACK
These two parameters determine the highest and lowest levels of luminance for target images
(outputs). (See figures below and in the next page.)
Parameter
Setting range
(step)
Description
TARGET WHITE
TARGET BLACK
60.0 -
100.0%
(0.5%)
0 -
40.0%
(0.5%)
Determines the maximum value of luminance for outputs.
The maximum luminance value of the image after correction should approximate this value.
The larger the value, the brighter the image, which may however cause the image to be overexposed. The smaller the value, tones of the bright part are kept. However, the overall obtained image may be dark.
Determines the minimum value of luminance for outputs.
The minimum luminance value of the image after correction should approximate this value.
The larger the value, the dark area in pictures will appear brighter, which may however lower the contrast and the noise will become apparent. The smaller the value, the higher the contrast, which may however cause the image to be underexposed.
The figure below is a luminance histogram of output.
(X-axis: Luminance level, Y-axis: Number of pixels)
Reference values
0%
TARGET BLACK
100%
TARGET WHITE
51
The figures below compare the reference values (dotted line) for output and the actual values after correction (full line).
0%
TARGET BLACK
Large TARGET BLACK setting
100% 0%
TARGET BLACK
Small TARGET BLACK setting
100%
0% 100% 0% 100%
Large TARGET WHITE setting
TARGET WHITE TARGET WHITE
Small TARGET WHITE setting
Relationship between IN BLACK, IN WHITE and TARGET BLACK, TARGET WHITE levels
0%
IN BLACK
Input image
100%
IN WHITE
Output image
0%
TARGET BLACK
100%
TARGET WHIE
52
5-4-4. USER1, 2 AREA SET
Selecting USER1 (or 2) AREA for AREA in the AVO SETTING menu opens the USER1, 2
AREA SET menus.
Menu button
U S E R 1 A R E A S E T
S T A R T H : 0 P I X E L
S T A R T V : 0 L I N E
H S I Z E : 3 6 0 P I X E L
V S I Z E : 3 6 0 L I N E
1 8
AVO
MAPPING
To set the sample area, set the start point and the size.
Parameter
START H
START V
H SIZE
V SIZE
Default
0 Pixel
0 Line
360
360
Setting range
Variable
(2Pixel)
Variable
(2Line)
Variable
(2Pixel)
Variable
(2Line)
Description
Specifies the horizontal start point.
Specifies the vertical start point.
Specifies the horizontal size (distance) from the start point.
Specifies the vertical size (distance) from the start point.
(START V , START H)
H SIZE
Sample area
Default setting of sample area
in 1080/59.94i.
IMPORTANT
The sample area should be set within the effective lines and pixels. Otherwise, the sample area will automatically revert to their default values. Be particularly careful in the following cases.
- When the video format is changed to SDTV after the sample area has been set.
- When the sample area settings are changed by loading an event.
While the USER 1, 2 AREA SET setting menu is open and the AREA is changed via web browser or the connected FA-95RU to other than USER AREAs 1 and 2 in the
AVO SETTING menu (5-4-1), the menu will change to display the AVO SETTING menu (5-4-1).
53
5-4-4-1. Manual Level Adjustment
the MODE is set to HOLD or OFF.
To provide fine adjustment on the automatically adjusted level
Changing the AVO MODE selection from AUTO to HOLD will enable fine adjustment of the adjusted signal levels that are provided by the automatic level adjustment. However, the change will not be retained after restarting the unit. The signal levels return to the values before the manual adjustment (the values provided by the automatic level adjustment).
While AVO is turned on, the COLOR CORRECT menu settings will automatically adjust.
MODE will change to BALANCE, and CURVE to BLACK. The fine adjustment enabled in
HOLD mode is enabled only for color correction BALANCE mode.
To manually adjust the signal levels
Set AVO MODE to OFF to manually adjust the signal levels. If the AVO MODE selection is changed from AUTO to OFF, the signal levels return to their values before the automatic level adjustment.
The adjustable items in the Color Correction menus are as shown in the table below.
AVO MODE selection
Color Corrector Menu
AUTO HOLD OFF
-
✓ ✓
WHITE LEVEL
Reference
-
-
✓
✓
✓
✓
BLACK LEVEL
GAMMA LEVEL
- -
✓
CORRECTION MODE /CURVE
✓ : The setting is enabled.
- : The setting is disabled.
The message "NOT ADJUST" appears when the disabled menu is opened.
54
5-5. CLIP (VIDEO CLIP)
5-5-1. YPbPr/RGB CLIP
Y P b P r / R G B C L I P
C L I P M O D E : O F F
2 5
Menu button
CLIP
DELAY
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter Default Setting range
CLIP MODE
(Clip Mode)
OFF
OFF,
YPbPr CLIP,
RGB CLIP
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
Description
Selects a mode whether to clip signals in the YPbPr color space or
RGB color space.
YPbPr CLIP
Y P b P r / R G B C L I P
M O D E : Y P b P r C L I P
Y W H I T E : 1 0 9 . 0 %
Y B L A C K : - 7 . 5 %
C H R O M A : 1 1 1 . 0 %
2 5
Parameter
Y WHITE
(Y White Clip)
Y BLACK
(Y Black Clip)
CHROMA
(YPbPr Chroma Clip)
Default
109.0%
-7.5％
111.0％
RGB CLIP
Y P b P r / R G B C L I P
M O D E : R G B C L I P
W H I T E : 3 0 0 . 0 %
B L A C K : - 2 0 0 . 0 %
2 5
Setting range
(Steps)
50.0 - 109.0%
(0.5％)
-7.5 - 50.0%
(0.5％)
50.0 - 111.0%
(0.5％)
Description
Sets the Y signal upper threshold.
Sets the Y signal lower threshold.
Sets both the upper and lower thresholds of PbPr signals.
Parameter
WHITE
(RGB White Clip)
BLACK
(RGB Black Clip)
Default
300.0%
-200.0％
Setting range
(Steps)
50 - 300%
(0.5％)
-200 - 50%
(0.5％)
Description
Sets the upper threshold of RGB color space.
Sets the lower threshold of RGB color space.
55
5-5-2. COMPOSITE CLIP
C O M P O S I T E C L I P
M O D E : C O M P O S I T E C L I P
W H I T E : 1 5 0 . 0 %
B L A C K : - 5 0 . 0 %
2 6 Menu button
CLIP
DELAY
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
CLIP MODE
(Clip Mode)
WHITE
(Composite White Clip)
BLACK
(Composite Black Clip)
Default
OFF
150.0%
-50.0％
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
OFF,
COMPOSITE CLIP
50 - 150%
(0.5％)
-50 - 50%
(0.5％)
COMPOSITE CLIP enables clipping on the composite output signals.
Sets the upper threshold of analog composite color space.
Sets the lower threshold of analog composite color space.
The COMPOSITE CLIP settings are effective only on the analog composite outputs.
The settings are not effective on the SDI1/2 and SDI3/4 outputs.
To enable the COMPOSITE CLIP menu, set YPbPr/RGB CLIP to OFF.
5-5-3. VIDEO CLIP Setting Ranges
YPbPr CLIP
Y Signal Settings
① Y White Clip Level
Setting range 50 - 109％ (Default: 109％)
100%
109%
50%
0%
SMPTE 100% color bar when 100% white.
② Y Black Clip Level
Setting range -7.5 - 50％ (Default: -7.5％)
Y white clip level setting range
50%
50%
100%
50%
Y Black clip level setting range
0%
-7.5%
SMPTE 100% color bar when 100% black.
56
③ C White Clip Level
Setting range 50 - 111％ (Default: 111％)
50%
50%
100%
111% (default)
SMPTE 100% color bar when color 700mVp-p.
RGB CLIP
To adjust the RGB clipping, select the RGB
CLIP under CLIP MODE, and then set RGB
White Clip and RGB Black Clip.
Once the “RGB CLIP” is selected, the YPbPr input video signal is converted into an RGB signal in the unit. The converted RGB signal is processed so as not to exceed the RGB gamut range set under the RGB White Clip and RGB Black Clip parameters in the menu.
Then the processed RGB signal is converted again to YPbPr format. This correction is used to eliminate out-of RGB gamut problems.
300%
100％
50％
0％
-200%
RGB Clip Processing
White setting range
Black setting range
COMPOSITE CLIP
To adjust the COMPOSITE clip, set WHITE and BLACK.
Once the COMPOSITE CLIP mode is turned ON, YPbPr input video signal is converted to composite signal in the unit.
The converted composite signal is processed so as not to exceed the composite gamut range set at WHITE and
BLACK in the menu.
The processed composite signal is then reconverted to YPbPr format. This correction is used to eliminate out-of composite gamut problems.
This correction is applied to composite output signals.
150%
100％
50％
0％
-50%
Composite Clip processing
White setting range
Black setting range
57
5-6. VIDEO INPUT SELECT (IN SEL)
Allows you to select input video signals, and select the operation for when signal input is lost.
5-6-1. FS INPUT SELECT
F S I N P U T S E L E C T
F S 1 I N S E L : S D I 1
F S 2 I N S E L : S D I 2
2 8
Menu button
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
Parameter Default Setting range Description
FS1 IN SEL
FS2 IN SEL
SDI1
SDI2
SDI1
SDI2
COMPOSITE
OPTION A
OPTION B
SDI1
SDI2
*1
*2
COMPOSITE
OPTION A
OPTION B
*1
*2
Selects an input video signal for
FS1.
OPTION A: Input signal from the
FA-95AIO in option slot A.
OPTION B: Input signal from the
FA-95AIO in option slot B.
Selects an input video signal for
FS2.
OPTION A: Input signal from the
FA-95AIO in option slot A.
OPTION B: Input signal from the
FA-95AIO in option slot B.
*1 Selectable only if the FA-95AIO option is installed in option slot A.
*2 Selectable only if the FA-95AIO option is installed in option slot B.
COMPOSITE, OPTION A, or OPTION B cannot be selected for both FS1 and FS2.
If you wish to select COMPOSITE, OPTION A, or OPTION B for either FS while the same signal is selected for the other FS, reset the current COMPOSITE, OPTION A, or OPTION B selection to SDI 1 or 2 first, then select a signal as you wish.
If COMPOSITE, OPTION A or OPTION B is selected for both FS1 IN SEL and FS2 IN SEL, the “CANNOT ASSIGN SIMUL COMPOSITE, FA-95AIO” alert message will appear.
58
5-6-2. VIDEO INPUT SET
V I D E O I N P U T S E T
L O S S : B A C K C O L O R
B A C K C O L O R : O F F
S D A S P E C T : 4 : 3
I N S T A T U S :
2 9 Menu button
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
LOSS
BACK COLOR
Default
BACK COLOR
BLACK
Setting range
BACK COLOR
*1
AUTO FREEZE
COLOR BAR
OUT DISABLE
OFF
BLACK
BLUE
RED
MAGENTA
GREEN
CYAN
YELLOW
Description
Selects an operation for the time the signal input selected under FS
INPUT SELECT is lost.
Select a background color.
SD ASPECT 4:3
4:3
16:9
Selects the aspect ratio for SD input signals.
This setting is used for fixed aspect ratio conversions that are performed when ASPECT in the CONV menu is set to other than AFD (4:3),
AFD-ALT (4:3), AFD (16:9),
AFD-ALT (16:9), AFD, or AFD-ALT.
IN STATUS -
SDI1
SDI2
OPTION A
OPTION B
Displays the input video signal in
FS1 or FS2. (Cannot be changed.)
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
*1 The selected AUTO FREEZE functions the same as BACK COLOR if SYNCHRO in
section 5-9-1 “FS MODE SET” is set to LINE or AVDL. In such case, the menu is indicated
as “＊AUTO FREEZE”.
LOSS Operation
If the signal input that is selected under FS INPUT SELECT is lost, the FA-9520 operates in the selected LOSS mode as follows.
In BACK COLOR mode
Outputs a matte signal of the color selected under BACK COLOR.
In AUTO FREEZE mode
Freezes the last image before signal input is lost.
Freezes the field.
Freezes the frame if the lost input signal is of a progressive scan video format such as
720p.
In COLOR BAR mode
Outputs the SMPTE color bar.
In OUT DISABLE mode
Does not output any signal from SDI OUT1, 2, 3, 4, COMPOSITE OUT1 or 2.
In AUTO FREEZE mode
Outputs a black screen if SYNCHRO is set to LINE or AVDL under FS MODE SET (section
59
5-6-3. ANC DETECT LINE
Allows you to select a line to detect ancillary RP186 VI or BT1119-2 WSS data in input signals.
For RP186 VI
A N C D E T E C T L I N E
A N C ： R P 1 8 6 V I
F O R M A T ： 5 2 5 / 6 0
F I E L D 1 ： 1 4 L I N E
F I E L D 2 ： 2 7 7 L I N E
3 0
Menu button
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
ANC
FORMAT
FIELD1
FIELD2
Default
RP186 VI
525/60
14 LINE (525/60)
19 LINE (625/50)
277 LINE (525/60)
324 LINE (625/50)
Setting range
RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
525/60
625/50
12-19 LINE (525/60)
8-22 LINE (625/50)
275-282 LINE (525/60)
321-335 LINE (625/50)
Description
Selects an ancillary data standard.
Selects the input signal format.
Selects a line to detect ancillary data in field 1.
Selects a line to detect ancillary data in field 2.
For BT1119 WSS
A N C D E T E C T L I N E
A N C ： B T 1 1 1 9 W S S
F O R M A T ： 6 2 5 / 5 0
F I E L D 1 ： 2 3 L I N E
3 0
Parameter
ANC
FORMAT
FIELD1
Default
RP186 VI
625/60
23LINE
Menu button
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
Setting range
RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
625/50
8-23 LINE
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Description
Selects an ancillary data standard.
Selects the input video format.
Selects a line to detect ancillary data in field 1.
5-6-4. ANC DETECT SEL
A N C D E T E C T S E L
C A P T I O N : C E A 6 0 8 C C
A F D : S 2 0 1 6 - 3 A F D
3 1
Menu button
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
CAPTION
*1
Default
CEA608 CC
Setting range
CEA608 CC
S334-1 CC
Description
Select CEA608 CC to process closed caption data in the luminance signal (Y) of
525/60 system.
Select S334-1 CC to process closed caption data in ancillary data space of SDI signal.
AFD S2016-3 AFD
S2016-3 AFD
RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
Selects a type of AFD data to be detected for SD input signals.
*1 Be sure to set to CEA608 CC when processing closed caption data in 525/60 composite signals. Otherwise the caption data will not be detected.
60
5-6-5. AIO A IN MODE
A I O A I N M O D E
M O D E : Y P b P r S M P T E
Parameter Default
MODE YPbPr SMPTE
3 2
Menu button
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
Setting range
YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr BETACAM
RGB
Y/C
Description
Selects the operation mode for input video signals in the
FA-95AIO installed in slot A.
This menu will not appear if no
FA-95AIO is installed in slot A.
5-6-6. AIO B IN MODE
A I O B I N M O D E
M O D E : Y P b P r S M P T E
Parameter Default
3 3
Menu button
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
MODE YPbPr SMPTE
Setting range
YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr BETACAM
RGB
Y/C
Description
Selects the operation mode for input video signals in the
FA-95AIO installed in slot B.
This menu will not appear if no
FA-95AIO is installed in slot B.
61
5-7. VIDEO OUT SELECT (OUT SEL)
Allows you to select output modes and whether to output a signal from FS1 or FS2 for respective video output connectors.
5-7-1. OUTPUT ASSIGN
Allows you to assign video signals to output from video output connectors.
O U T P U T A S S I G N
S D I 1 / 2 : F S 1
S D I 3 / 4 : F S 2
C O M P O S I T E : F S 1
Parameter
SDI1/2
SDI3/4
COMPOSITE
Default
FS1
FS1
FS1
3 4
Setting range
FS1
FS2
FS1
FS2
FS1
FS2
Menu button
OUT SEL
MODE
Description
Selects either FS1 or FS2 signal to be output from SDI1 and 2 connectors.
Selects either FS1 or FS2 signal to be output from SDI3 and 4 connectors.
Selects either FS1 or FS2 signal to be output from COMPOSITE connectors.
Outputs a black signal for HD output signals.
Composite Output Format Table
FS1 and 2 output signals Output signal from COMPOSITE connector
525/60 CONV signals in 525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
1080/24PsF
CONV signals in 625/50
B.B. in 525/60
B.B. in 625/50
B.B. in 625/50
1080/23.98PsF
720/59p
720/50p
1080/59p
1080/50p
B.B. in 525/60
B.B. in 525/60
B.B. in 625/50
B.B. in 525/60
B.B. in 625/50
62
5-7-2. AIO A ASSIGN
Allows you to assign video signals to output from video output connectors on the FA-95AIO in slot A.
3 5
Menu button
A I O A A S S I G N
A S S I G N : F S 1
M O D E : Y P b P r S M P T E
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
Parameter Default Setting range Description
ASSIGN FS1
FS1
FS2
Selects either FS1 or FS2 signal to be output from the video output connector on the FA-95AIO in slot
A.
MODE YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr BETACAM
RGB
Y/C
Selects the operation mode for output video signals from the
FA-95AIO installed in slot A.
* This menu does not appear if there is no FA-95AIO installed in slot A.
* The FA-95AIO connector outputs a black video if the output signal from the selected FS1 or FS2 is 1080p and MODE is set to YPbPr or RGB. See the below YPbPr/RGB Output
Format table for details.
* The FA-95AIO connector outputs a black video if the output signal from the selected FS1 or FS2 is an HD signal and MODE is set to Y/C. See the below Y/C Output Format table for details.
YPbPr/RGB Output Format
FS1 or 2 output signal
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
FA-95AIO YPbPr/RGB output signal
525/60 signal in FS 1 or 2
625/50 signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/59i signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/50i signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/24PsF
1080/23.98PsF
720/59p
720/50p
1080/59p
1080/50p
1080/24PsF signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/23.98PsF signal in FS 1 or 2
720/59p signal in FS 1 or 2
720/50p signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/59i black video
1080/50i black video
Y/C Output format
FS 1 or 2 output signal
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
1080/24PsF
1080/23.98PsF
720/59p
720/50p
1080/59p
1080/50p
Y/C output signal
525/60 signal in FS 1 or 2
625/50 signal in FS 1 or 2
525/60 BB signal
625/50 BB signal
625/50 BB signal
525/60 BB signal
525/60 BB signal
625/50 BB signal
525/60 BB signal
625/50 BB signal
63
5-7-3. AIO B ASSIGN
Allows you to assign video signals to output from video output connectors on the FA-95AIO in slot B.
3 5
Menu button
A I O B A S S I G N
A S S I G N : F S 1
M O D E : Y P b P r S M P T E
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
Parameter Default Setting range Description
ASSIGN FS1
FS1
FS2
Selects either FS1 or FS2 signal to be output from the video output connector on the FA-95AIO in slot
B.
MODE YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr BETACAM
RGB
Y/C
Selects the operation mode for output video signals from the
FA-95AIO installed in slot B.
* This menu does not appear if there is no FA-95AIO installed in slot B.
* The FA-95AIO connector outputs a black video if the output signal from the selected FS1 or FS2 is 1080p and MODE is set to YPbPr or RGB. See the below YPbPr/RGB Output
Format table for details.
* The FA-95AIO connector outputs a black video if the output signal from the selected FS1 or FS2 is an HD signal and MODE is set to Y/C. See the below Y/C Output Format table for details.
YPbPr/RGB Output Format
FS1 or 2 output signal
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
FA-95AIO YPbPr/RGB output signal
525/60 signal in FS 1 or 2
625/50 signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/59i signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/50i signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/24PsF
1080/23.98PsF
720/59p
720/50p
1080/59p
1080/50p
1080/24PsF signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/23.98PsF signal in FS 1 or 2
720/59p signal in FS 1 or 2
720/50p signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/59i black video
1080/50i black video
Y/C Output format
FS 1 or 2 output signal
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
1080/24PsF
1080/23.98PsF
720/59p
720/50p
1080/59p
1080/50p
Y/C output signal
525/60 signal in FS 1 or 2
625/50 signal in FS 1 or 2
525/60 BB signal
625/50 BB signal
625/50 BB signal
525/60 BB signal
525/60 BB signal
625/50 BB signal
525/60 BB signal
625/50 BB signal
64
5-7-4. ANC DATA EMBED
Allows you to set ancillary data insertion into SDI signal ancillary spaces.
A N C D A T A E M B E D
A N C : C E A 6 0 8 C C
F O R M A T : 5 2 5 / 6 0
E M B E D : D I S A B L E
3 7
Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
Parameter Default Setting range Description
ANC CEA608 CC
CEA608 CC
S334-1 CC SD
CEA708 CC HD
S2016-3 AFD
RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
Selects an ancillary data type to insert.
FORMAT - *
Selects a video format that supports the ancillary data selected under ANC. Only selectable format will be shown.
EMBED DISABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE: Does not insert ancillary data selected under ANC.
ENABLE: Inserts ancillary data selected under ANC.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively. See the “Ancillary Data Types” table below for details.
Ancillary Data Types
Data type Description
CEA608 CC Closed caption data inserted as Y signals into line 21 of 525/60 analog and SDI signals.
S334-1 CC Closed caption data inserted as data packets into the ancillary data space of
525/60 SDI signals.
CEA708 CC Closed caption data inserted as data packets into the ancillary data space of
HD-SDI signals (1080i/720p).
S2016-3 AFD Aspect ratio data inserted as data packets into the ancillary data space of SD and HD-SDI signals (525/60, 625/50, 1080i/PsF, 720p, 1080p/(3G)).
RP186 VI Aspect ratio data inserted into bit 3 of Chroma data in the SD-SDI (525/60,
625/50) V ANC data space.
BT1119 WSS Aspect ratio data inserted as Y signals into line 23 of 625/50 analog or SDI signals.
65
5-7-5. ANC EMBED LINE
Allows you to select a line of SDI signal ancillary data space to insert closed caption data.
Menu button
A N C E M B E D L I N E
A N C : C E A 6 0 8 C C
F O R M A T : 5 2 5 / 6 0
F I E L D 1 : 2 1 ( 2 8 4 ) L I N E
3 8
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
Parameter
ANC
Default
CEA608 CC
Setting range
CEA608 CC
S334-1 CC SD
CEA708 CC HD
S2016-3 AFD
RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
Description
Selects a type of ancillary data to insert.
FORMAT
LINE
FIELD1
-
-
*1
*1
Selects a video format compatible with the ancillary data selected under ANC. Only compatible Video formats will be displayed.
Selects a line in ancillary data space into which ancillary data is inserted. A line can be selected for different ANC and FORMAT selections separately.
If ANC is set to RP186 VI, this parameter allows you to select a line for FIELD 1. Lines can be selected for fields 1 and 2 respectively.
FIELD2 -
*1
If ANC is set to RP186 VI, this parameter allows you to select a line for FIELD 2. Lines can be selected for fields 1 and 2 respectively.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
*1 The setting range varies according to the ancillary data type and video format.
Ancillary data type FORMAT LINE Default
ANC:CEA 608 CC
ANC:S334-1 CC SD
525/60
525/60
FIELD1: 21(284) fixed
*1
FIELD1:12(275) to 19(282)
*1
FIELD1:12(275)
*1
ANC:CEA708 CC HD
1080i
720p
525/60
625/50
LINE 9 to 20 LINE 9
LINE 9 to 25 LINE 9
FIELD1:12(275) to 19(282)
*1
FIELD1:12(275)
*1
FIELD1:8(321) to 22(335)
*1
FIELD1:8(321)
*1
ANC:S2016-3 AFD 1080i/PsF
720p
1080p/(3G)
LINE 9 to 20
LINE 9 to 25
LINE 9
LINE 9
LINE 9 to 41
FIELD1: 12 to 19
LINE 9
FIELD1: 14
ANC:RP186 VI
525/60
625/50
FIELD2: 275 to 282
FIELD1: 8 to 22
FIELD2: 321 to 335
FIELD2: 277
FIELD1: 11
ANC:BT1119 WSS 625/50 FIELD1: 8 to 23
*1 Field2 line number displayed in parentheses.
NOTE
FIELD2: 324
FIELD1: 23
If CEA608 or S334-1 CC closed caption data is detected in the 525/60 input signal, and the CONV1 and/or CONV2 output format/s is/are 1080/59i and/or 720/59p, the detected closed caption data will not be converted to CEA708. The CEA708 closed caption data insertion will be automatically terminated.
Meanwhile, if CEA708 closed caption data is detected in the 1080/59i or 720/59p input signal, it will be converted to S334-1 CC or CEA608 CC for 525/60 output signals to output from CONV 1 and/or CONV 2.
66
IMPORTANT
Closed caption data output will stop when data input is lost. S2016-3 AFD, RP186 VI, and BT1119 WSS ancillary data will be output according to the ANC LOSS SET
settings when their data input is lost. See section 5-9-7 “ANC LOSS SET” for details.
Ancillary data combinations that cannot be simultaneously embedded to the same line.
Video format
Ancillary data type S334-1 CC S2016-3 AFD
S334-1 CC
Can be set to same line
525/60 S2016-3 AFD
RP186 VI
Can be set to same line
Unable to set to same line
Unable to set to same line
S2016-3 AFD
625/50 RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
Unable to set to same line
Unable to set to same line
RP186 VI
Unable to set to same line
Unable to set to same line
Unable to set to same line
Can be set to same line
BT1119 WSS
Unable to set to same line
Can be set to same line
If the same line is set for the ancillary data combination described as “Unable to set to same line
”, and both ancillary data types are set to be embedded in the ANC DATA EMBED menu
“*” will appear next to the selected data type as an error message.
If the sign is displayed, ancillary data will not be properly embedded. The line settings must be properly set. Usually the default value will properly embed the ancillary data. Keep this in mind when changing the value to configure a system with other devices.
Error message example:
A N C E M B E D L I N E
A N C : * R P 1 8 6 V I
F O R M A T : 5 2 5 / 6 0
F I E L D 1 : * 1 2 L I N E
F I E L D 2 : * 2 7 5 L I N E
3 8
IMPORTANT
Ancillary data insersion line settings specified under the ANC DATA EMBED (sec.
5-7-4) and ANC EMBED LINE (sec. 5-7-5) menus take priority over the line settings specified under the SDI LINE MASK menu (sec. 5-9-13) and take effect.
67
5-8. VIDEO OPTION (VIDEO OP)
5-8-1. Logo Generator
The logo generator allows you to superimpose logos to FA-9520 outputs for each converter.
Run the FA-95 LG GUI, which can be downloaded from FOR-A ’s website, on a PC to register logos to the FA-9520 via Ethernet. See the FA-95LG GUI Operation Manual (downloaded with the software) for details on logo management.
The VIDEO OP/AUDIO OP button LED flashes red while storing logo data to the FA-9520 from the FA-95LG GUI. Once the data is stored, it will be transmitted to the video memory.
The VIDEO OP/AUDIO OP button LED flashes green during this transmission. Do not turn the power of the unit off while the button is flashing in order not to obstruct the data storage process.
IMPORTANT
The FA-9520 front panel button/control operation, and web browser will be slowed down while storing logo data using FA-95LG GUI. Complete necessary settings before storing logo data.
5-8-1-1. LOGO SELECT
Allows you to select a logo function mode for FS1 and FS2.
L O G O S E L E C T 4 1
L O G O I D : 1
N A M E : F O R A
L O G O F O R M A T ： H D 1 0 8 0
F S F O R M A T : 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 i
Menu button
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter Default
Setting range
Description
LOGO ID
NAME
*1
1
-
1-256
-
Selects a logo to be output to FS1 or FS2 output signal.
Displays the registered name of the ID-selected logo.
Displays “-----“ if the logo is not registered.
LOGO
FORMAT
*1
- -
Displays the format of the ID-selected logo.
Logo formats: SD 525, SD 625, HD 1080, HD 720
Displays “-----“ if the logo is not registered.
FS FORMAT
*2
- -
Displays the video format of the FS1 or FS2 output signal.
*1 NAME and LOGO FORMAT can be registered for each logo ID via FA-95LG GUI. See the separate FA-95LG GUI Operation Manual for details.
*2 The video format displayed under FS FORMAT and the logo format displayed under
LOGO FORMAT must match. Otherwise no logo will be displayed even if KEYER in
section 5-8-1-2 “KEYER SET” is turned On.
68
5-8-1-2. KEYER SET
Allows you to set a keyer for FS1 or FS2.
K E Y E R S E T
K E Y E R : O F F
L E V E L : 1 0 0 %
H P O S : 0 P I X E L
V P O S : 0 L I N E
4 2
Menu button
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
KEYER
LEVEL
H POS
*1
*1
OFF
100%
0
OFF
ON
0-100%
(0.1%)
*2
(2 Pixel)
Allows you to enable or disable the keyer for the
FS1 or FS2 output signal.
ON: Enables display of logos selected in the
Allows you to set a key level for a logo to be output to the FS1 or FS2 output signal.
Allows you to set the horizontal positon for a logo to be output to the FS1 or FS2 output signal.
V POS
*1
0
*2
(1 Line)
Allows you to set the vertical positon for a logo to be output to the FS1 or FS2 output signal.
*1 Key level and position settings are saved for each logo ID. Changing logo settings for
FS1 will also change the logo settings of FS2 using the same logo.
*2 Actual logo position differs depending on the logo format selected when registering the
logo. See section 5-8-1-3 “Logo Position Setting Range” for details.
LEVEL and H/V POS settings are disabled under the following conditions:
No logo is assigned to the logo ID selected under LOGO ID in the 5-8-1-1 LOGO
Different formats are displayed for LOGO FORMAT and FS1 or FS2 in the 5-8-1-1
K E Y E R S E T
K E Y E R : O N
L E V E L : N O T A D J
H P O S : N O T A D J
V P O S : N O T A D J
4 2
5-8-1-3. Logo Position Setting Range
Positional settings will vary according to the logo formats as shown below.
Logo Format
SD 525
H POS setting range V POS setting range
0 to 718 0 to 486
SD 625
HD 1080
0 to 718
0 to 1918
0 to 575
0 to 1079
HD 720 0 to 1278 0 to 719
The logo format selection is saved for each logo ID using FA-95LG GUI. See the separate
FA-95LG GUI Operation Manual for details.
69
5-9. VIDEO SYSTEM (VIDEO SYS)
5-9-1. FS MODE SET
Allows you to set the FS (Frame Synchronizer) operation modes.
F S M O D E S E T
S Y N C H R O : F R A M E
S Y N C F R M T : A U T O D E T
F R A M E D E L A Y ： O F F
F O R C E D F I E L D : O F F
6 1
Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
SYNCHRO
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Default Setting range
FRAME
FRAME
LINE
AVDL
*6
Description
FRAME: Enables horizontal and vertical alignment of video signals to a genlock signal. Effective on both synchronous and asynchronous signals.
LINE: Locks the video signal of within ±1/2H to a genlock signal. Output delay is 1H. Effective only when video signal is synchronous to the genlock signal.
AVDL: Locks the video signal to a genlock signal with a
1H delay. Effective only when video signal is synchronous to the genlock signal.
INPUT: Locks the system to an input video signal. The delay can be adjusted by System Phase and/or Frame
Delay. However, the minimum delay is 520clk common in all formats. (HD: 74MHz, SD: 27MHz) Does not use a genlock signal.
SYNC FRMT
FRAME
DELAY
*1 *2
AUTO
DET
OFF
AUTO DET
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23f
1080/24f
1080/59p
1080/50p
*2
*2
OFF
1 FRAME to
8 FRAME
Sets a system format for the FA-9520.
AUTO DET: Detects and sets the detected input video format to the system format.
Other values make the system work in the format.
Sets the amount of frame delay.
FORCED
FIELD
*1 *3
OFF
OFF
ODD
EVEN
Selects which field to be used twice to compose a frame.
(Effective on composite signal inputs.)
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
*1 Selecting ODD/EVEN for FORCED FIELD, while IN SEL in section 5-6-1 “FS INPUT SELECT” is set to
COMPOSITE, SYNCHRO to FRAME, and FRAME DELAY is set to OFF, FRAME DELAY will always reset to 1 frame. Set FRAME DELAY beween 1 and 8 frames.
*2 FRAME DELAY cannot be set if SYNCHRO is set to LINE or AVDL. In such case, the menu will be displayed as “FRAME FRAME DELAY: NOT ADJ”.
*3 FORCED FIELD cannot be set if SYNCHRO is set to LINE or AVDL. In such case, the menu will be displayed as “FORCED FIELD: NOT ADJ”.
*4 The FREEZE function via GPI input is disabled if SYNCHRO is set to LINE or AVDL. See section 7-6
*5 Changing the SYNCHRO setting will reset V 1080 and V 720 settings in section 5-9-2
and the V PHASE setting in section 5-9-3 “SD PHASE SET” to their default values according to the set
SYNCHRO mode.
*6 Switching input signals with a phase difference using a router or such device may cause shock noise to occur on video or audio signals if the phase difference (compared to the genlock signal) exceeds the range shown in the following table. If the difference is within range, shock noise will not occur.
Video format Phase difference from genlock signal
SD
HD
-1H (with line differences depending on video format) to +1/2H
-5H (with line differences depending on video format) to +1/2H
70
Table of Reference signals and Input formats that can lock
Input signal
525/60
1080/59i
720/59p
1080/59p
625/50
1080/50i
720/50p
1080/50p
1080/23PsF
525/60
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
-
-
-
-
✓
-
1080/59i 720/59p
✓✓✓ ✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
-
-
-
✓✓✓
-
-
-
-
✓
-
-
✓
-
625/50
-
-
-
-
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
-
✓
1080/24PsF
✓✓✓: SYNCHRO can be set to FRAME, LINE, or AVDL.
✓: SYNCHRO can only be set to FRAME.
-: Unable to synchronize.
Reference signal
1080/50i
-
-
-
-
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
-
✓
720/50p
-
-
-
-
✓
✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
-
✓
1080/23PsF 1080/24PsF
✓ -
✓
✓
-
-
✓
-
-
-
-
✓
✓
✓
-
✓✓✓
-
✓
-
✓✓✓
5-9-2. HD PHASE SET
6 2
Menu button
H D P H A S E S E T
H 1 0 8 0 : 0 C L K
V 1 0 8 0 : 0 L I N E
H 7 2 0 : 0 C L K
V 7 2 0 : 0 L I N E
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
H 1080
V 1080
*1
*1
(Horizontal Phase)
(Vertical Phase)
Default
0
0
*2
(FRAME)
1
*2
(LINE,AVDL)
Setting range(Steps)
-1375 - 1375
(CLK)
-563 - 563
(LINE)
Description
Adjusts the horizontal and vertical phases of the system referring to genlock signal. This setting is applied to 1080-format output signals.
H 720
*1
(Horizontal Phase)
V 720
*1
(Vertical Phase)
0
0
*2
(FRAME)
1
*2
(LINE,AVDL)
-2063 - 2063
(CLK)
-375 - 375
(LINE)
Adjusts the horizontal and vertical phases of the system referring to genlock signal. This setting is applied to 720-format output signals.
*1 The settings are not available if there is no reference signal input. In such case, the menu as shown below will be displayed.
H D P H A S E S E T
H 1 0 8 0 : N O T A D J U S T
V 1 0 8 0 : N O T A D J U S T
H 7 2 0 : N O T A D J U S T
V 7 2 0 : N O T A D J U S T
6 2
*2 The default value varies depending on the SYNCHRO setting in section 5-9-1 “FS MODE
” and the setting in section 5-6-1 “FS INPUT SELECT” as shown in the below table.
The set value will be reset to its relevant default value whenever the SYNCHRO setting is changed.
SYNCHRO
FRAME
IN SEL
─
Default
0
SDI1, 2 1
LINE
AVDL
COMPOSITE (525/60)
COMPOSITE (625/50)
COMPONENT (Y/C)
COMPONENT (others)
SDI1, 2
COMPOSITE (525/60)
COMPOSITE (625/50)
COMPONENT (Y/C)
COMPONENT (others)
1
3
4
4
3
4
4
1
1
71
5-9-3. SD PHASE SET
S D P H A S E S E T
H P H A S E : 0 C L K
V P H A S E : 0 L I N E
6 3 Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
H PHASE
*1
V PHASE
*1
0
0
*2
(FRAME)
1
*2
(LINE, AVDL)
-864 - 864
( CLK)
-313 - 313
( LINE)
Adjusts the horizontal and vertical phases of the system referring to genlock signal. This setting is applied to SD output signals.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
*1 The settings are not available if there is no reference signal input. In such case, the menu as shown below will be displayed.
S D P H A S E S E T
H P H A S E : N O T A D J U S T
6 3
V P H A S E : N O T A D J U S T
S C P H A S E : N O T A D J U S T
*2 The default value varies depending on the SYNCHRO setting in section 5-9-1 “FS MODE
” and the IN SEL setting in section 5-6-1 “FS INPUT SELECT” as shown in the below
table. The set value will be reset to its relevant default value whenever the SYNCHRO setting is changed.
SYNCHRO
FRAME
LINE
AVDL
IN SEL
─
SDI1, 2
COMPOSITE (525/60)
COMPOSITE (625/50)
COMPONENT (Y/C)
COMPONENT (others)
SDI1, 2
COMPOSITE (525/60)
COMPOSITE (625/50)
COMPONENT (Y/C)
COMPONENT (others)
Default
0
1
3
4
4
1
1
3
4
4
1
72
5-9-4. VIDEO POSITION
V I D E O P O S I T I O N
H P O S : 0 P I X E L
V P O S : 0 L I N E
6 4
Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
H POS 0
525/60 ±92
625/50 ±92
1080/59i ±240
1080/50i ±240
1080/23PsF ±240
1080/24PsF ±240
720/59p ±160
720/50p ±160
1080/59p ±240
1080/50p ±240
(PIXEL)
V POS 0
525/60 ±30
625/50 ±36
1080/59i ±68
1080/50i ±68
1080/23PsF ±68
1080/24PsF ±68
720/59p ±90
720/50p ±90
1080/59p ±135
1080/50p ±135
( LINE)
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
Description
Adjusts the horizontal/vertical position of output videos.
5-9-5. FREEZE SET
Allows you to set an operation mode for FREEZE.
Menu button
F R E E Z E S E T
F R E E Z E : O F F
M O D E : F R A M E
S T R O B E ： O F F
6 5
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
FREEZE
*1
MODE
*2
Default Setting range
OFF
FRAME
OFF, ON
FRAME
ODD, EVEN
Description
Turns FREEZE ON/OFF.
Selects an operation mode for FREEZE.
STROBE OFF
OFF
1 - 255
Sets the interval to refresh the images by the number of fields for the field or frame freeze.
OFF: Images are not refreshed.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
*1 Changing the SYNCHRO setting in section 5-9-1 “FS MODE SET” while FREEZE is set to
ON will turn FREEZE OFF. FREEZE cannot be set to ON if SYNCHRO is set to LINE.
FREEZE is always set to OFF at startup. These settings are not stored in the event memory.
F R E E Z E S E T
F R E E Z E : N O T A D J U S T
M O D E : N O T A D J U S T
S T R O B E : N O T A D J U S T
6 5
F S M O D E I S N O T F R A M E
When FREEZE is ON:
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS button flashes.
73
*2 If the input signal is a PsF signal, MODE is automatically set to FRAME and the setting cannot be changed. See the following FREEZE MODE table for details.
FREEZE Mode Table
Input signal
SYNC FRMT setting 525/60 625/50 1080/59i 1080/50i 720/59p 720/50p 1080/23PsF 1080/24PsF 1080/59p 1080/50p
AUTO
525/60
625/50
OE OE
NOE OE
OE
OE NOE NOE
NOE
OE
NOE
NOE
F
NOE
NOE
F
NOE
NOE
F
NOE
NOE
F
NOE
NOE
F
NOE
NOE
F
NOE
NOE
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
1080/59p
1080/50p
NOE NOE OE
NOE NOE NOE
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NOE
OE
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NOE
NOE
F
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
NOE
NOE
NF
F
NF
NF
NF
NF
NOE
NOE
NF
NF
F
NF
NF
NF
NOE
NOE
NF
NF
NF
F
NF
NF
NOE
NOE
NF
NF
NF
NF
F
NF
NOE
NOE
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
F
OE: Can be set to FRAME, ODD, or EVEN.
F: Fixed to FRAME.
NOE: Can be set to FRAME, ODD, or EVEN, but the image does not appear properly.
NF: Fixed to FRAME, and the image does not appear properly.
See section 5-9-1 “FS MODE SET” for the SYNC FRMT.
5-9-6. ANC SET
6 6 Menu button A N C S E T
A N C M O D E : H / V A N C
H A N C : O V E R W R I T E
V A N C : B L A N K
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
ANC
MODE
H ANC * OVERWRITE
V ANC *
Default
H/V ANC
PASS
Setting range
H/V ANC
DETAIL
OVERWRITE
IN DATA
BLANK
PASS
BLANK
Description
Selects ancillary data processing mode for the
FS1 or FS2 output signal. H ANC and V ANC menu settings will become available when H/V
ANC is selected.
DETAIL: Removes all H and V ancillary data, and embeds newly specified ancillary data
(such as CC and AFD).
Set to DETAIL to enable settings in 5-7-4.
“ANC DATA EMBED” and 5-7-5. “ANC
Embeds audio signals into horizontal ancillary data of FS1 or FS2 output videos.
OVERWRITE: Removes the embedded audio signal from the input SDI video signal, then embeds the processed audio data on the video signal. Whether to embed is determined by the AUDIO GROUP setting in section
The input SDI data will be embedded on the video signal after audio signals are embedded.
IN DATA: Passes the input SDI horizontal ancillary data without processing. (Processed audio data cannot be embedded.)
BLANK: Deletes all horizontal ancillary data, and embeds the processed audio data.
Embeds audio signals into vertical ancillary data of FS1 or FS2 output videos.
PASS: Embeds the vertical ancillary data without processing.
BLANK: Deletes all vertical ancillary data.
74
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
* H ANC and V ANC settings become available when ANC MODE is set to H/V ANC. H ANC and V ANC settings are effective if input and output formats are the same. If such formats are different, both H ANC and V ANC will be set to BLANK.
5-9-7. ANC LOSS SET
Allows you to select an operation mode when input AFD data is lost, or unsupported AFD code is input.
6 7 Menu button A N C L O S S S E T
A N C ： S 2 0 1 6 - 3 A F D
F O R M A T ： S D
M O D E : R E M O V E
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
ANC
Default
S2016-3
AFD
Setting range
S2016-3 AFD
RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
Description
Selects an ancillary data type to insert into the SDI signal.
FORMAT SD
SD
HD
*1
Selects a video format compatible with the ancillary data selected under ANC.
Only compatible Video formats will be displayed
MODE REMOVE
If FORMAT is set to SD
REMOVE
*2
HOLD
*2
*2
4:3 L 16:9 T
4:3 L14:9 T
*2
4:3 L>16:9
*2
4:3 F 4:3
*2
4:3 L16:9PRTD
*2
4:3 L 14:9
*2
4:3 F ALT14:9
*2
4:3 L ALT14:9
4:3 L ALT 4:3
16:9 L>16:9
16:9 F FRM
*2
16:9 P 4:3
16:9 F PRTD
16:9 P 14:9
16:9P ALT14:9
16:9F ALT14:9
16:9 F ALT4:3
MODE can be set for respective ANC and FORMAT selections.
REMOVE: Does not embed the ancillary data to either FS1, or 2.
HOLD: Retains the last ancillary data aspect ratio and outputs video signal in the aspect ratio.
Other values operate according to the selected AFD as an input AFD.
BT1119 WSS selected under ANC can only select AFD codes indicated by
*2
.
If FORMAT is set to HD
REMOVE
HOLD
16:9 L>16:9
16:9 F 16:9
16:9 P 4:3
16:9 F PRTD
16:9 P 14:9
16:9P ALT14:9
16:9F ALT14:9
16:9F ALT4:3
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
*1 HD is selectable only when ANC is set to S2016-3.
*2 BT1119 WSS selected under ANC can only select the AFD codes above indicated by
*2
75
5-9-8. WSS AFD ERROR
Allows you to select the operation mode when the aspect ratio conversion result is not standarized by WSS, and embedding WSS AFD ancillary data to FS1 and/or 2 is enabled.
W S S A F D E R R O R
M O D E : R E M O V E
6 8 Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter Default Setting range Description
MODE REMOVE
REMOVE
F 4:3
REMOVE:
Does not embed BT1119 WSS to FS1 and/or
2.
F 4:3:
Embeds BT1119 WSS F 4:3 (code 8) to FS1 and/or 2.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
5-9-9. AUDIO GROUP
Allows you to set whether or not to embed audio signals as a group.
Menu button
A U D I O G R O U P
G R O U P 1 : E N A B L E
G R O U P 2 : E N A B L E
G R O U P 3 : E N A B L E
G R O U P 4 : E N A B L E
6 9
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
GROUP1
Default
ENABLE
Setting range
DISABLE
ENABLE
*2
Description
DISABLE: Does not insert the GROUP1 embedded audio.
ENABLE: Inserts the GROUP1 embedded audio.
GROUP2
GROUP3
ENABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
*2
*2
DISABLE: Does not insert the GROUP2 embedded audio.
ENABLE: Inserts the GROUP2 embedded audio.
DISABLE: Does not insert the GROUP3 embedded audio.
ENABLE: Inserts the GROUP3 embedded audio.
GROUP4
*1
ENABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
*2
DISABLE: Does not insert the GROUP4 embedded audio.
ENABLE: Inserts the GROUP4 embedded audio.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
*1 GROUP4 embedded audio cannot be inserted into SD-SDI output signals regardless of the GROUP4 setting.
*2 The setting is ineffective if the input and output formats are the same and H ANC is set to
IN DATA in the 5-9-6 ANC SET menu.
76
5-9-10. TEST SIGNAL
Internal test signal settings.
Video and audio signal processing will stop and a test signal will be output from all output connectors.
7 0
Menu button
T E S T S I G N A L
V I D E O : O F F
A U D I O : O F F
E X T A U D I O : O F F
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
VIDEO
AUDIO
Default Setting range
OFF
OFF
OFF
FULL CB
75％ CB
SMPTE CB
RAMP
OFF
1KHzTONE
Description
Selects an internal video test signal.
Outputs an internal embedded audio test signal in FS1 or FS2, respectively.
EXT AUDIO OFF
OFF
1KHzTONE
Outputs an audio test signal to AES and analog audio outputs.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
If VIDEO, AUDIO and EXT AUDIO of the TEST SIGNAL menu are set to other than OFF:
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
5-9-11. BY-PASS SETTING
This setting is used to bypass through input signals.
Input signals will be output to output connectors without being internally processed.
B Y - P A S S S E T T I N G 7 1
S D I 1 I N - S D I 1 O U T : O F F
S D I 2 I N - S D I 3 O U T : O F F
V B S I N – V B S O U T : O F F
Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
Parameter Default Setting range Description
SDI1 IN-SDI1 OUT OFF
OFF
ON
Setting to ON bypasses SDI1 input signals to SDI 1 output with a relay connection.
SDI2 IN-SDI3 OUT OFF
OFF
ON
Setting to ON bypasses SDI2 input signals to SDI 3 output with a relay connection.
VBS IN-VBS OUT OFF
OFF
ON
Setting to ON bypasses composite input signals to composite output with a relay connection.
If any by-pass setting is set to ON: button flashes.
AUDIO SYS
Conditions for by-passing SDI1 IN-SDI1 OUT circuit
The SDI1 IN to SDI1 OUT by-pass circuit is enabled, when the FS1 input signal is assigned to
SDI1 and SDI 1/2 output is set to FS1, or, when the FS2 input signal is assigned to SDI1 and the SDI 1/2 output is set to FS2. If the BY-PASS setting cannot be turned ON, an “SDI1
BYPASS DISABLED ” message will be displayed.
77
Conditions for by-passing SDI2 IN-SDI3 OUT circuit
The SDI2 IN to SDI3 OUT by-pass circuit is enabled, when FS1 input signal is assigned to
SDI2 and SDI 3/4 output is set to FS1, or, when FS2 input signal is assigned to SDI2 and SDI
3/4 output is set to FS2. If the BY-PASS setting cannot be turned ON, an “SDI2 BYPASS
DISABLED ” message will be displayed.
Conditions for by-passing VBS IN-VBS OUT circuit
The VBS IN to VBS OUT by-pass circuit is enabled, when FS1 input signal is assigned to
COMPOSITE and COMPOSITE output is set to FS1, or, when FS2 input signal is assigned to
COMPOSITE and COMPOSITE output is set to FS2. If the BY-PASS setting cannot be turned
ON, a “VBS BYPASS DISABLED” message will be displayed.
See section 5-6-1 “FS INPUT SELECT” for details on FS1 and FS2 input signal assignments,
and 5-7-1 “OUTPUT ASSIGN” for details on output signal assignments.
5-9-12. AIO BY-PASS SET
This setting is used to bypass through FA-95AIO input signals.
Input signals will be output to output connectors without being internally processed.
A I O B Y - P A S S S E T
A I O O P A I N - O U T : O F F
A I O O P B I N - O U T : O F F
7 2 Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
Parameter Default Setting range Description
AIO OP A IN-OUT
*1
OFF
OFF
ON
Setting to ON bypasses the input signal in the FA-95AIO in option slot A to its output connector with a relay connection.
AIO OP B IN-OUT
*2
OFF
OFF
ON
Setting to ON bypasses the input signal in the FA-95AIO in option slot B to its output connector with a relay connection.
*1 Available only if the FA-95AIO is installed in option slot A.
*2 Available only if the FA-95AIO is installed in option slot B.
The AIO BY-PASS SET menu does not appear, if no FA-95AIO is installed in either option slot
A or B.
If any by-pass setting is set to ON: button flashes.
AUDIO SYS
Conditions for by-passing AIO OP A IN-OUT circuit
The AIO OPT A IN-OUT by-pass circuit is enabled when the FS1 input signal is assigned to
OPTION A and AIO A ASSIGN output is set to FS1, or when the FS2 input signal is assigned to OPTION A and the AIO A ASSIGN output is set to FS2. If AIO BY-PASS SET cannot be set to ON, an “AIO OP A DISABLED” message will be displayed.
Conditions for by-passing AIO OP B IN-OUT circuit
The AIO OPT B IN-OUT by-pass circuit is enabled when the FS1 input signal is assigned to
OPTION B and AIO B ASSIGN output is set to FS1, or when the FS2 input signal is assigned to OPTION B and the AIO B ASSIGN output is set to FS2. If AIO BY-PASS SET cannot be set to ON, an “AIO OP B DISABLED” message will be displayed.
78
5-9-13. SD LINE MASK
S D L I N E M A S K
L I N E S E L : L I N E 6
M A S K S E T : P A S S
7 3 Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Parameter
LINE SEL
Default
LINE6
Setting range
LINE6 - 23
Description
Selects a line from lines 6 through 23 of an
SD-SDI or COMPOSITE output signal.
MASK SET PASS
PASS
BLANK
Sets the line selected in LINE SEL to PASS or BLANK.
PASS: Outputs a line of the composite, Y/C
*1
, SD-SDI input signal that is the same number as the selected output signal line to a composite, Y/C
*1
, SD-SDI output signal without processing.
BLANK: Masks the selected composite, Y/C
*1
, SD-SDI output signal line.
* Settings can be set for FS1 and FS2, respectively.
*1 Selectable only if FA-95AIO option is installed.
IMPORTANT
Ancillary data insersion line settings specified under the ANC DATA EMBED (sec.
5-7-4) and ANC EMBED LINE (sec. 5-7-5) menus take priority over the line settings specified under the SDI LINE MASK menu and take effect.
79
5-9-14. COMPOSITE SET1
C O M P O S I T E S E T 1
S C P H A S E : 0 . 0
C O M B F I L T E R : 3 D
N R L E V E L : O F F
C R O S S C O L O R : O F F
7 4
Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
Parameter Default Setting range Description
SC PHASE
*1
COMB FILTER
NR LEVEL
0.0°
2D
OFF
-179.8° - 180°
3D
2D
TRAP
OFF
LEVEL1 - 4
Adjusts the subcarrier phase of comosite and Y/C output signals referring to the B.B. genlock signal.
Not adjustable with the tri-level genlock signal. In such case, the menu will appear as “NOT ADJUST”.
Selects a mode to separate the Y
(luminance) and C (chrominance) of composite signals.
Sets the noise reduction level for the composite signal inputs.
CROSS COLOR OFF
OFF
LEVEL1 - 3
Sets the cross color (noise) reduction level.
*1 The setting is effective on Y/C and composite outputs on the FA-95AIO option installed in option slot A and/or B.
5-9-15. COMPOSITE SET2
C O M P O S I T E S E T 2
V I T S ： O F F
N T S C S E T U P : O F F
P A L - M M O D E : D I S A B L E
7 5
Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
Parameter
VITS
Default
OFF
Setting range
OFF
ON
Description
ON: Passes through VITS (V-ANC) lines 10 to
21 (NTSC), or 6 to 23 (PAL) of composite input signals. For SD-SDI output signals, inserts
VITS lines into Y signals.
Set to OFF for signals without 7.5 IRE setup.
Set to ON for signals with 7.5 IRE setup.
NTSC SETUP OFF
OFF
ON
PAL-M MODE DISABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE: Allows NTSC signals to be output.
ENABLE: Allows PAL-M signals to be output.
*2
*1 The setting is effective on Y/C and composite I/O on the FA-95AIO option installed in option slot A and/or B.
*2 This setting enables PAL-M output for COMPOSITE OUT and Y/C
*1
outputs, however,
NTSC signal output will be disabled.
To synchronize the PAL-M output, input a PAL-M BB or 59.94/29.97 Hz tri-level sync signal to the GENLOCK IN connector. (NTSC BB signals cannot synchronize PAL-M output signals.)
PAL signals can always be input and output regardless of this setting.
80
5-10. Various Signal Status Display (STATUS)
5-10-1. UNIT ALARM
U N I T A L A R M
F A N 1 : N O R M A L
F A N 2 : N O R M A L
D C P O W E R 1 : N O R M A L
D C P O W E R 2 : N O R M A L
5 0 1
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
FAN1
FAN2
DC POWER1
DC POWER2
*1
*1
Display
NORMAL
STOPPED
NORMAL
STOPPED
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
NORMAL
ABNORMAL
*1 Displayed only if FA-95PS is installed.
Description
Displays the status of FAN1.
NORMAL: Operating normally.
STOPPED: FAN1 has stopped.
Turn the unit power OFF, and contact your dealer if the replacement is needed.
Displays the status of FAN2.
NORMAL: Operating normally.
STOPPED: FAN2 has stopped.
Turn the unit power OFF, and contact your dealer if the replacement is needed.
Displays the status of DC POWER1.
NORMAL: The power supply is normal.
ABNORMAL: DC POWER1 has failed.
A power failure has occurred. Although the unit is working properly, It is recommended that the power supply unit be replaced. Contact your dealer if a replacement is necessary.
Displays the status of DC POWER2.
NORMAL: The power supply is normal.
ABNORMAL: DC POWER2 has failed.
A power failure has occurred. Although the unit is working properly, It is recommended that the power supply unit be replaced. Contact your dealer if a replacement is necessary.
81
5-10-2. VIDEO IN STATUS
V I D E O I N S T A T U S
F S 1 ( S D I 1 ) ： 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 i
5 0 2
F S 1 ( S D I 2 ) ： 5 2 5 / 6 0
C O M P O S I T E : 5 2 5 / 6 0
R E F E R E N C E : 5 2 5 / 6 0
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
FS1(SDI1)
FS2(SDI2)
COMPOSITE
Display
LOSS
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
1080/59p
1080/50p
BY-PASS
UNKNOWN
LOSS
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
1080/59p
1080/50p
BY-PASS
UNKNOWN
-----
LOSS
525/60
625/50
BY-PASS
Displays the video format of the SDI1 input signal.
Displays
Displays signal.
“LOSS” if there is no input signal.
“UNKNOWN” if there is an unsupported input
Displays video format, LOSS, or UNKNOWN only if
FS1 IN SEL or FS2 IN SEL is set to SDI1 in the FS
INPUT SELECT menu (section 5-6-1). Otherwise,
“-----“ is displayed.
Displays the video format of the SDI2 input signal.
Displays “LOSS” if there is no input signal.
Displays “UNKNOWN” if there is an unsupported input signal.
Displays video format, LOSS, or UNKNOWN only if
FS1 IN SEL or FS2 IN SEL is set to SDI2 in the FS
INPUT SELECT menu (section 5-6-1). Otherwise,
“-----“ is displayed.
Description
Displays the video format of the COMPOSITE input signal.
Displays “LOSS” if there is no input signal.
REFERENCE
LOSS
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
Displays the video format of the genlock input signal.
Displays “LOSS” if there is no input signal.
Displays “UNKNOWN” if there is an unsupported input signal.
1080/24PsF
PAL-M
*1
UNKNOWN
*1 Shown when PAL-M Mode in the 5-9-15 “COMPOSITE SET2” is set to ENABLE, and an
input signal in GENLOCK IN connector is 525/60 or PAL-M signal.
82
5-10-3. VIDEO OPTION INPUT
This menu is accessible only if the FA-95AIO option is installed in slot A or B.
V I D E O O P T I O N I N P U T 5 0 3
O P A : 5 2 5 / 6 0
M O D E A : Y P b P r S M P T E
O P B : 5 2 5 / 6 0
M O D E B : Y P b P r S M P T E
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
OP A
MODE A
OP B
MODE B
Display
LOSS
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
BY-PASS
UNKNOWN
YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr BETACAM
RGB
Y/C
-----
Displays the input video format of the FA-95AIO installed in slot A.
Displays
Displays
“LOSS” if there is no input signal.
“UNKNOWN” if there is an unsupported input signal.
Displays the input signal format of the FA-95AIO installed in slot A.
Description
Same as OP A
Same as MODE A
Displays the input video format of the FA-95AIO installed in slot B.
Displays “LOSS” if there is no input signal.
Displays “UNKNOWN” if there is an unsupported input signal.
Displays the input signal format of the FA-95AIO installed in slot B.
83
5-10-4. VIDEO OUT STATUS
Displays the status of output video signals.
V I D E O O U T S T A T U S
S D I 1 / 2 ： 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 i
5 1 1
S D I 3 / 4 ： 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 i
C O M P O S I T E : 5 2 5 / 6 0
Parameter
SDI1/2
SDI3/4
COMPOSITE
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Display
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
1080/59p
1080/50p
BY-PASS
DISABLE
Description
Displays the video format of the SDI1/2 output signals.
Displays “DISABLE” if there is no signal output.
Same as above
525/60
625/50
BY-PASS
DISABLE
PAL-M
Displays the video format of the SDI3/4 output signals.
Displays “DISABLE” if there is no signal output.
Displays the video format of the COMPOSITE output signal.
Displays “DISABLE” if there is no signal output.
Displays
“PAL-M” if 5-9-15 “COMPOSITE SET2”
is enabled, and the format of the output video signal from COMPOSITE OUT is 525/60.
5-10-5. VIDEO OPTION OUTPUT
This menu is accessible only if the FA-95AIO option is installed in slot A or B.
V I D E O O P O U T N P U T
O P A : 5 2 5 / 6 0
M O D E A : Y P b P r S M P T E
O P B : 5 2 5 / 6 0
M O D E B : Y P b P r S M P T E
5 1 2
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
OP A
MODE A
Display
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
BY-PASS
DISABLE
YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr BETACAM
RGB
Y/C
*1
Description
Displays the output video format of the FA-95AIO installed in slot A.
Displays “DISABLE” if there is no signal output.
Displays the output signal format of the FA-95AIO installed in slot A.
See section 5-7-2 “AIO A ASSIGN” for details on
signal format settings.
OP B Same as OP A
Displays the output video format of the FA-95AIO installed in slot B.
Displays “DISABLE” if there is no signal output.
MODE B Same as MODE A
Displays the output signal format of the FA-95AIO installed in slot B.
See section 5-7-2 “AIO A ASSIGN” for details on
signal format settings.
*1 The output video format for Y/C mode is either 525/60,625/50, or PAL-M.
84
5-10-6. AUDIO IN DETECT1
A U D I O I N D E T E C T 1 5 4 1
E M B 1 ( S D I I N 1 ) C H 1 - 1 6
P P P P N N N N S S S S - - - -
E M B 2 ( S D I I N 2 ) C H 1 - 1 6
P P P P N N N N S S S S - - - -
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter Display Description
EMB1(SDI IN1)
CH1-16
EMB2(SDI IN2)
CH1-16
*1
*1
P
S
N
-
*
P
S
N
-
*
Displays information on EMB1 audio input signals CH1 through 16 in 16 characters on the 2nd line from top.
P (PCM): Normal audio signal
S (Silence): Mute signal
N (NON-PCM): Compressed audio data such as AC3
-: No audio signal
*: Detection is disabled due to the input setting.
*2
Displays information on EMB2 audio input signals CH1 through 16 in 16 characters on the 4th line from top.
P (PCM): Normal audio signal
S (Silence): Mute signal
N (NON-PCM): Compressed audio data such as AC3
-: No audio signal
*: Detection is disabled due to the input setting.
*2
*1 (SDI IN1) and (SDI IN2) indicate the detected SDI signal. If it is displayed as (***), SDI embedded audio signal detection is disabled due to the FS input video signal setting.
*2 Displayed when SDI embedded audio signal detection is disabled due to the FS input
video signal setting. See section 5-6-1. “FS INPUT SELECT” for details on FS input video
signal settings.
5-10-7. AUDIO IN DETECT2
5 4 2 A U D I O I N D E T E C T 2
A E S C H 1 - 8
P P S S N N - -
A N A L O G C H 1 - 4
P P - -
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter Display Description
AES CH1-8
P
S
N
O
-
Displays information on AES input audio signals CH1 through 8 in 8 characters on the 2nd line from top.
P (PCM): Normal audio signal
S (Silence): Mute signal
N (NON-PCM): Compressed audio data such as AC3
O (Output): AES connector is set to for output use.
*1
-: No audio signal
ANALOG CH1-4
P
-
Displays information on ANALOG input audio signals CH1 through 4 in 4 characters on the 4th line from top.
P (Present): An audio signal is present
-: No audio signal
*1 See section 6-2-4. “AES I/O SETUP” for details on AES connector I/O settings.
85
5-10-8. AUDIO OUTPUT1
A U D I O O U T P U T 1 5 4 6
S D I 1 / 2 ( E M B 1 ) C H 1 - 1 6
P P P P N N N N S S S S - - - -
S D I 3 / 4 ( E M B 2 ) C H 1 - 1 6
P P P P N N N N S S S S - - - -
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter Display Description
SDI 1/2 (EMB1)
CH1-16
P
S
N
-
B
Displays information on SDI 1/2 output audio signals CH1 through 16 in 16 characters on the 2nd line from top.
P (PCM): Normal audio signal
S (Silence): Mute signal
N (NON-PCM): Compressed audio data such as AC3
-: No embedded audio
B (BY-PASS): Video signal is bypassed and output.
*1
SDI 3/4 (EMB2)
CH1-16
P
S
N
-
B
Displays information on SDI 3/4 output audio signals CH1 through 16 in 16 characters on the 4th line from top.
P (PCM): Normal audio signal
S (Silence): Mute signal
N (NON-PCM): Compressed audio data such as AC3
-: No embedded audio
B (BY-PASS): Video signal is bypassed and output.
*1
*1 See section 5-3-1. “CONV MODE” for details on SDI output signal by-pass settings.
5-10-9. AUDIO OUTPUT3
5 4 8 A U D I O O U T P U T 3
A E S C H 1 - 8
P P S S N N - -
A N A L O G C H 1 - 4
P P - -
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter Display Description
AES CH1-8
P
S
N
I
Displays information on AES output audio signals CH1 through 8 in 8 characters on the 2nd line from top.
P (PCM): Normal audio signal
S (Silence): Mute signal
N (NON-PCM): Compressed audio data such as AC3
I (Input: AES connector is set for input use.
*1
ANALOG CH1-4
P
-
Displays information on ANALOG output audio signals
CH1 through 4 in 4 characters on the 4th line from top.
P (Present): An audio signal is present
-: No embedded audio
S (Silence): Mute signal
*1 See section 6-2-4. “AES I/O SETUP” for details on DIGITAL AUDIO connector I/O settings.
86
5-10-10. EMB 1 IN AUDIO
E M B 1 I N A U D I O
C H 1 : L O S S
C H 2 : L O S S
C H 3 : L O S S
C H 4 : L O S S
E M B 1 I N A U D I O
C H 5 : L O S S
C H 6 : L O S S
C H 7 : L O S S
C H 8 : L O S S
E M B 1 I N A U D I O
C H 9 : L O S S
C H 1 0 : L O S S
C H 1 1 : L O S S
C H 1 2 : L O S S
E M B 1 I N A U D I O
C H 1 3 : L O S S
C H 1 4 : L O S S
C H 1 5 : L O S S
C H 1 6 : L O S S
5 5 1
5 5 2
5 5 3
5 5 4
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
.
Parameter
CH1-CH16
Display
LOSS
PCM
SILENCE
NON-PCM
PCM(Async)
SILENCE (Async)
NON-PCM(Async)
UNKNOWN
Description
Displays the status of audio signals CH1 through CH16 embedded to the FS1 video signal.
LOSS: No audio signals
PCM: Normal audio signal (SDI input)
SILENCE: Mute signal (SDI input)
NON-PCM: Compressed audio data such as AC3
PCM (Async) : Normal audio signal (Asynchronous SDI input)
SILENCE (Async): Mute signal (Asynchronous SDI input)
NON-PCM (Async): Compressed audio data such as AC3
(Asynchronous SDI input)
UNKNOWN: Unidentifiable
87
5-10-11. EMB 2 IN AUDIO
E M B 2 I N A U D I O
C H 1 : L O S S
C H 2 : L O S S
C H 3 : L O S S
C H 4 : L O S S
E M B 2 I N A U D I O
C H 5 : L O S S
C H 6 : L O S S
C H 7 : L O S S
C H 8 : L O S S
E M B 2 I N A U D I O
C H 9 : L O S S
C H 1 0 : L O S S
C H 1 1 : L O S S
C H 1 2 : L O S S
E M B 2 I N A U D I O
C H 1 3 : L O S S
C H 1 4 : L O S S
C H 1 5 : L O S S
C H 1 6 : L O S S
5 5 5
5 5 6
5 5 7
5 5 8
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
.
Parameter
CH1-CH16
Display
LOSS
PCM
SILENCE
NON-PCM
PCM(Async)
SILENCE (Async)
NON-PCM(Async)
UNKNOWN
Description
Displays the status of audio signals CH1 through CH16 embedded to the FS2 video signal.
LOSS: No audio signals
PCM: Normal audio signal (SDI input)
SILENCE: Mute signal (SDI input)
NON-PCM: Compressed audio data such as AC3
PCM (Async) : Normal audio signal (Asynchronous SDI input)
SILENCE (Async): Mute signal (Asynchronous SDI input)
NON-PCM (Async): Compressed audio data such as AC3
(Asynchronous SDI input)
UNKNOWN: Unidentifiable
88
5-10-12. AES IN AUDIO
A E S I N A U D I O
C H 1 : L O S S
C H 2 : L O S S
C H 3 : L O S S
C H 4 : L O S S
5 5 9
A E S I N A U D I O
C H 5 : L O S S
C H 6 : L O S S
C H 7 : L O S S
C H 8 : L O S S
5 6 0
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter Display Description
CH1 - CH8
LOSS
PCM 48kHz
PCM 44.1kHz
PCM 32kHz
PCM Other
SILENCE 48kHz
SILENCE 44.1kHz
SILENCE 32kHz
SILENCE Other
NON-PCM
OUTPUT SETTING
5-10-13. ANALOG IN AUDIO
Displays the status of the audio signal input to the
DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors.
LOSS: No audio signals
PCM 48kHz: Normal audio signal (approx. 48kHz)
PCM 44.1kHz: Normal audio signal (approx. 44.1kHz)
PCM 32kHz: Normal audio signal (approx. 32kHz)
PCM Other: Normal audio signal (Non AES input)
SILENCE 48kHz: Mute signal (approx. 48kHz)
SILENCE 44.1kHz: Mute signal (approx. 44.1kHz)
SILENCE 32kHz: Mute signal (approx. 32kHz)
SILENCE Other: Mute signal (Non AES input)
NON-PCM: Compressed audio data such as AC3
OUTPUT SETTING: Connector is set to output
A N A L O G I N A U D I O
C H 1 : L O S S
C H 2 : L O S S
C H 3 : L O S S
C H 4 : L O S S
5 6 1
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
CH1 - CH4
Display
LOSS
IN
Description
Displays the status of the input audio signal in the ANALOG AUDIO connector.
LOSS: No audio signal is present.
IN: An audio signal is present.
89
5-10-14. SDI 1/2 OUT AUDIO
5 7 1 S D I 1 / 2 O U T A U D I O
C H 1 : P C M
C H 2 : P C M
C H 3 : P C M
C H 4 : P C M
5 7 2 S D I 1 / 2 O U T A U D I O
C H 5 : P C M
C H 6 : P C M
C H 7 : P C M
C H 8 : P C M
S D I 1 / 2 O U T A U D I O
C H 9 : P C M
C H 1 0 : P C M
C H 1 1 : P C M
C H 1 2 : P C M
S D I 1 / 2 O U T A U D I O
C H 1 3 : P C M
C H 1 4 : P C M
C H 1 5 : P C M
C H 1 6 : P C M
5 7 3
5 7 4
Parameter
CH1 - CH16
Display
PCM
SILENCE
NON-PCM
UNKNOWN
BLANK
BY-PASS
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Description
Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 through CH16 of the SDI 1/2 output.
PCM: Normal audio signal
SILENCE: Mute signal
NON-PCM: Compressed audio data such as AC3
UNKNOWN: Unidentifiable
BLANK: No audio signal embedding
BY-PASS: By-passed through
90
5-10-15. SDI 3/4 OUT AUDIO
5 7 5 S D I 3 / 4 O U T A U D I O
C H 1 : P C M
C H 2 : P C M
C H 3 : P C M
C H 4 : P C M
5 7 6 S D I 3 / 4 O U T A U D I O
C H 5 : P C M
C H 6 : P C M
C H 7 : P C M
C H 8 : P C M
S D I 3 / 4 O U T A U D I O
C H 9 : P C M
C H 1 0 : P C M
C H 1 1 : P C M
C H 1 2 : P C M
S D I 3 / 4 O U T A U D I O
C H 1 3 : P C M
C H 1 4 : P C M
C H 1 5 : P C M
C H 1 6 : P C M
5 7 7
5 7 8
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
CH1 - CH16
Display
PCM
SILENCE
NON-PCM
UNKNOWN
BLANK
BY-PASS
Description
Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 through CH16 of the SDI 3/4 output.
PCM: Normal audio signal
SILENCE: Mute signal
NON-PCM: Compressed audio data such as AC3
UNKNOWN: Unidentifiable
BLANK: No audio signal embedding
BY-PASS: By-passed through
5-10-16. AES OUT AUDIO
5 8 7 A E S O U T A U D I O
C H 1 : P C M
C H 2 : P C M
C H 3 : P C M
C H 4 : P C M
A E S O U T A U D I O
C H 5 : P C M
C H 6 : P C M
C H 7 : P C M
C H 8 : P C M
5 8 8
Parameter
CH1 - CH8
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Display
PCM
SILENCE
NON-PCM
UNKNOWN
INPUT SETTING
Description
Displays the status of the audio signal output from the
DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors.
PCM: Normal audio signal
SILENCE: Mute signal
NON-PCM: Compressed audio data such as AC3
UNKNOWN: Unidentifiable
INPUT SETTING: Connector is set to input
91
5-10-17. ANALOG OUT AUDIO
5 8 9 A N A L O G O U T A U D I O
C H 1 : S I L E N C E
C H 2 : S I L E N C E
C H 3 : S I L E N C E
C H 4 : S I L E N C E
Parameter Display
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
CH1 - CH4
SILENCE
OUT
Description
Displays the status of the output audio signal from the ANALOG AUDIO connector.
SILENCE: Mute signal
OUT: Output signal is present
5-10-18. Dolby OPA AUX
* This menu is displayed only if FA-95D-D option is installed in option slot A.
D o l B y O P A A U X 5 9 1
I N P U T A : L O S S
O U T P U T A : N O N E
R E F E R E N C E A : L O S S
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
INPUT A
OUTPUT A
Display
LOSS
PCM
NON-PCM
UNKNOWN
PCM
NON-PCM
NONE
Description
Displays status or type of signal input to the optional Dolby input connector (Dolby IN) in slot A.
LOSS: No audio signal
PCM: Standard audio signal
NON-PCM: Compressed audio data such as
Dolby E encoded data
UNKNOWN: Unknown signal.
Displays status or type of signal output to the optional Dolby output connectors (Dolby OUT) in slot A.
PCM: Standard audio signal
NON-PCM: Compressed audio data such as
Dolby E encoded data
NONE: No signal
REFERENCE A
LOSS
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
UNKNOWN
Displays signal format of reference signal input to the optional Dolby REF IN connector in slot
A.
LOSS: No signal
UNKNOWN: Unknown signal format
92
5-10-19. Dolby OPB AUX
* This menu is displayed only if FA-95D-D option is installed in option slot B.
D o l B y O P B A U X
I N P U T B : L O S S
5 9 6
O U T P U T B : N O N E
R E F E R E N C E B : L O S S
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
INPUT B
OUTPUT B
Display
LOSS
PCM
NON-PCM
UNKNOWN
PCM
NON-PCM
NONE
Description
Displays status or type of signal input to the optional Dolby input connector (Dolby IN) in slot B.
LOSS: No audio signal
PCM: Standard audio signal
NON-PCM: Compressed audio data such as
Dolby E encoded data
UNKNOWN: Unknown signal.
Displays status or type of signal output to the optional Dolby output connectors (Dolby OUT) in slot B.
PCM: Standard audio signal
NON-PCM: Compressed audio data such as
Dolby E encoded data
NONE: No signal
REFERENCE B
LOSS
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
UNKNOWN
Displays signal format of reference signal input to the optional Dolby REF IN connector in slot
B.
LOSS: No signal
UNKNOWN: Unknown signal format
93
5-10-20. AFD IN STATUS
Displays the state of FS1/FS2 AFD detection.
When detecting AFD in input S2016-3
A F D 1 I N S T A T U S
D E T E C T : S 2 0 1 6 - 3
A F D : 0 2 A R : 0
4 : 3 L 1 6 : 9 T
D : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 0 1
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
FS1/LOCK
AFD: Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format.
AR: Aspect Ratio is displayed in binary format (0=4:3, 1=16:9)
The detected AFD type is shown on the third row.
D: Detected Data1-8 are displayed in hexadecimal format.
FS2/LOCK
When detecting AFD in input RP186 VI
A F D 1 I N S T A T U S 6 0 1
D E T E C T ： R P 1 8 6 V I
A F D ： 0 2 S S ： 0 0
4 : 3 L 1 6 : 9 T
D 1 ： 1 0 D 2 ： 0 0 D 3 ： 0 0
Displays the status of RP186 VI (Video Index) Class1.
AFD: Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format.
SS: Scanning System is displayed in hexadecimal format.
The detected AFD type is shown on the third row.
D1-D3: Detected Data are displayed in hexadecimal format.
When detecting AFD in input BT1119-2 WSS
A F D 1 I N S T A T U S
D E T E C T ： B T 1 1 1 9 W S S
A F D : 0 1
B O X 1 4 : 9 C E N T E R
B I T 1 3 - 0 : 0 0 0 0
6 0 1
Displays the status of BT1119-2 WSS (Wide Screen Signalling).
AFD: Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format.
The detected AFD type is shown on the third row.
BIT13-0: Detected Bits 13 – 0 are displayed in hexadecimal format.
See section 20-6 “AFD Code Abbreviations” for details on AFD types.
5-10-21. ANC1 IN STATUS
A N C 1 I N S T A T U S 6 1 1
C E A 6 0 8 : P R E S E N T L : 2 1
W S S : A B S E N T
V I : P R E S E N T L : 1 4 / 2 7 7
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Displays the state of CEA608, WSS, and VI ancillary data in the FS1/FS2 input signal luminance component.
The line number in which the ancillary data is in is displayed.
94
5-10-22. ANC1 IN STATUS 1-2
6 2 1 A N C 1 I N S T A T U S 1
D I D / S D I D : * * / * *
S 3 3 4 - 1 C D P ( 7 0 8 )
S 3 5 2 M V P I D
- - - - -
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Displays the status of ancillary data packets in an FS1/FS2 input SDI signals.
Displays the detected DID and SDID of the ancillary data in hexadecimal format, such as
DID/SDID: 15/30, if they are different from that of supported formats.
Displays the ancillary data name, such as S334-1CDP(708), if the DID and SDID of the ancillary data match that of supported formats.
See section 19. “FA-9520 Ancillary Data Packet Name List” for details on ancillary data
names, and DID and SDID of formats.
The status of up to 8 ancillary data can be displayed.
5-10-23. ANC OUT
A N C O U T 6 4 1
C E A 6 0 8 : P R E S E N T L : 2 1
W S S : A B S E N T
V I : P R E S E N T L : 1 4 / 2 7 7
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Displays the status of CEA608, WSS, and VI ancillary data inserted into luminance signal of
FS1/FS2 output.
The line number in which the ancillary data is in is displayed.
Displays PRESENT if ancillary data is inserted. Displays ABSENT if no anceillary data is inserted. If ANC MODE is set to H/V ANC, the state of the V ANC setting (PASS or BLANK)
will be displayed. In such case, no line number will be displayed. (See section 5-9-6 ANC SET
for details on ANC MODE and V ANC setting.)
5-10-24. S2016 OUT
Displays whether the S2016-3 ancillary data is inserted into FS1/FS2 output video signals.
When no S2016-3 is in the FS1 output video signal
S 2 0 1 6 O U T 6 4 6 Menu button
S 2 0 1 6 - 3 : A B S E N T
STATUS
OTHER
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
If ANC MODE in 5-9-6 ANC SET is set to H/V ANC, the state of the V ANC setting (PASS or
BLANK) is displayed.
When S2016-3 is in the FS1 output video signal
S 2 0 1 6 O U T
S 2 0 1 6 - 3 : P R E S E N T
A F D : 0 2 A R : 0
4 : 3 L 1 6 : 9 T
D : 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6 4 6
AFD: Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format.
AR: Aspect Ratio is displayed in binary format (0=4:3, 1=16:9)
The detected AFD type is shown on the third row.
D: Detected Data1-8 are displayed in hexadecimal format.
See section 20-6 “AFD Code Abbreviations” for details on AFD types.
95
5-10-25. VI OUT
Displays whether the RP186 VI ancillary data is inserted into FS1/FS2 output video signals.
When no RP186 VI is in the output video signal
V I O U T
R P 1 8 6 V I : A B S E N T
6 4 7
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
If ANC MODE in 5-9-6 ANC SET is set to H/V ANC, the state of the V ANC setting (PASS or
BLANK) is displayed.
When RP186 VI is in the output video signal
V I O U T
R P 1 8 6 V I : P R E S E N T
A F D : 0 2 S S : 0 2
B O X 1 6 : 9 T O P
D 1 : 1 2 D 2 : 0 2 D 3 : 0 2
6 4 7
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
FS1/LOCK
Displays the status of RP186 VI (Video Index) Class1.
AFD: Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format.
SS: Scanning System is displayed in hexadecimal format.
The detected AFD type is shown on the third row.
D1-D3: Detected Data are displayed in hexadecimal format.
FS2/LOCK
See section 20-6 “AFD Code Abbreviations” for details on AFD types.
5-10-26. WSS OUT
When no BT1119-2 WSS is in the FS1/FS2 output video signals
W S S O U T
B T 1 1 1 9 W S S : A B S E N T
6 4 8
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
If ANC MODE in 5-9-6 ANC SET is set to H/V ANC, the state of the V ANC setting (PASS or
BLANK) is displayed.
When BT1119-2 WSS is in the FS1/FS2 output video signals
W S S O U T
B T 1 1 1 9 W S S ： P R E S E N T
A F D : 0 4
B O X 1 6 : 9 T O P
B I T 1 3 - 0 : 0 0 0 4
6 4 8
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
Displays the status of BT1119-2 WSS.
AFD: Active Format Description is displayed in hexadecimal format.
SS: Scanning System is displayed in hexadecimal format.
The detected AFD type is shown on the third row.
D1-D3: Detected Data are displayed in hexadecimal format.
See section 20-6 “AFD Code Abbreviations” for details on AFD types.
96
5-10-27. ANC OUT1
A N C O U T 1 6 6 1
S 3 3 4 - 1 C E A 6 0 8 L 1 1
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
FS1/LOCK FS2/LOCK
L indicates the line number into which ancillary data is inserted.
Displays the ancillary data packet name and line number for the inserted ancillary data in the
FS1/FS2 output signals. The status of up to 4 ancillary data can be displayed.
See section 19. “FA-9520 Ancillary Data Packet Name List” for details on ancillary data names.
97
6. AUDIO Settings
Make the menu buttons light up orange using the VIDEO/AUDIO button.
(Pressing the button while the buttons are lit green turns the lights orange.)
Afterwards, the audio menus displayed on the lower row on each menu button can be selected.
6-1. SDI AUDIO Settings (SDI AUDIO)
Menu button
VIDEO
AUDIO
Allows you to set FS1/FS2 embedded audio signal settings.
6-1-1. EMB1 IN GAIN
E M B 1 I N G A I N
C H S E L : C H 1
G A I N S E T : 0 . 0 d B
M A S T E R : 0 . 0 d B
1 0 1
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
CH SEL
GAIN SET
CH1
0.0 dB
CH1 - CH16
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
*1
Selects an FS1 embedded audio channel for which to adjust the gain.
Sets the input gain for the SDI embedded audio channel that is selected under CH
SEL.
MASTER 0.0 dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Sets the offset to the input gain for all channels CH1 to CH16 of SDI-embedded audio.
*1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range. If the range is exceeded, the alert will be displayed as *20.0 dB or *-20.0 dB.
6-1-2. EMB1 OUT MONO
1 0 2 E M B 1 O U T M O N O
C H S E L : C H 1 / 2
M O N O S U M ： D I S A B L E
Parameter
CH SEL
Default
CH1/2
MONO SUM DISABLE
Setting range
CH1/2-15/16
DISABLE
ENABLE
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Description
Selects a stereo pair of FS1 embedded audio channels.
ENABLE: Outputs the stereo pair channels selected under CH SEL as a mono sum.
(The signals of the selected pair channels are added and devided by two to output from each channel.)
98
6-1-3. EMB1 IN SET
E M B 1 I N S E T
A L I G N M E N T : D I S A B L E
H D - S D I A C L K : A U T O
1 0 3
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Parameter Default Setting range Description
ALIGNMENT
*1
DISABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE
Enables or disables automatic phase adjustment for FS1 input embedded audio channel groups.
ENABLE: Automatic adjustment
DISABLE: No adjustment (normal setting)
Selects audio clock signal to use for de-embedding and processing audio data in
HD-SDI input signal.
AUTO: De-embeds HD-SDI embedded audio data using the audio clock phase data in the embedded audio. Synchronous and asynchronous embedded audio signals from 4 audio groups can be de-embedded separately.
*2
HD-SDI
ACLK
AUTO
AUTO
SYNC SDI
AUD CLK
Audio data will be processed as synchronous data if the audio clock phase data is incorrect, or jitter is too great.
SYNC SDI: All audio data in 4 audio groups are always processed as synchronous data without refering to the respective audio clock phase data.
*3
AUD CLK: Always uses audio clock phase data in HD-SDI embedded audio data to de-embed the audio data.
*4
*1 Embedded audio signal groups are automatically phase-adjusted when they are input to the FA-9520. If there is an abnormal audio signal in an audio group, whether the audio group is in use or not, audio streams may be obstructed by the auto phase adjustment. In such cases, audio stream obstruction can be avoided using this Alignment enable/disable function.
*2 Embedded audio signals in SD-SDI video inputs are always processed as synchronous signals.
*3 SYNC SDI should be selected only if audio data cannot pass through as AUTO or asynchronous audio data is never input.
*4 AUD CLK may be effective in the case audio data cannot properly pass through as AUTO or Sync SDI.
IMPORTANT
Use this Alignment enable/disable function only if the audio output has noise or is muted. Do not change the setting for normal audio output.
Note that the audio output will be temporally muted when ALIGNMENT is changed from DISABLE to ENABLE while audio signal phases are aligning.
99
6-1-4. EMB1 OUT CLOCK
E M B 1 O U T C L O C K
G R O U P 1 : R E F E R E N C E
G R O U P 2 : R E F E R E N C E
G R O U P 3 : R E F E R E N C E
G R O U P 4 : R E F E R E N C E
1 0 4
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Parameter Default Setting range Description
GROUP 1
GROUP 2
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
AUTO
REFERENCE
INPUT CH 1/2
INPUT CH 3/4
AUTO
REFERENCE
INPUT CH 5/6
INPUT CH 7/8
Selects an audio clock signal per group for SDI embedded audio output from
FS1.
AUTO: Automatically selects audio clock input in the NON-PCM signal channel, if an input NON-PCM signal is in the selected SDI embedded audio group.
Automatically selects audio clock signal in the smallest numbered channel, if all signals in the audio group are NON-PCM.
Automatically selects audio clock signal synchronized to the output video signal, if all signals in the audio group are PCM.
*2
GROUP 3 REFERENCE
AUTO
REFERENCE
INPUT CH 9/10
INPUT CH 11/12
REFEFENCE: Audio clock signal synchronized to the output video signal.
(Used to synchronize audio with the video signals processed in the SRC.)
CH 1/2 to 15/16: Audio clock input in
SOURCE channels CH 1/2 to 15/16.
*1
GROUP 4 REFERENCE
AUTO
REFERENCE
INPUT CH 13/14
INPUT CH 15/16
To output asynchronous audio signals, select one input channel pair for each group.
*2
For SD-SDI outputs, REFERENCE is automatically selected regardless of the settings.
*1 See section 6-5 “AUDIO MAPPING (MAPPING)” for details on SOURCE settings.
*2 Embedded audio signals are divided into 4 groups. Each group consists of 4 audio channels; Group 1 (CH 1 to 4), Group 2 (CH 5 to 8), Group 3 (CH 9 to 12), Group 4 (CH 13 to 16). The audio signals in the same group are transmitted together using the same audio clock (48kHz). PCM audio signals will be synchronized to a genlock signal in the SRC
(sampling rate converter) so as to synchronize with the output video signal. Non-PCM audio signals (compressed audio data such as AC-3) do not go into SRC. If the NON-PCM audio input signal is asynchronous with the output video signal, the NON-PCM audio output signal will be asynchronous. The asynchronous NON-PCM audio signals can be embedded to SDI video signals by selecting an audio clock for each audio group. To do so, all 4 channels in the respective audio groups must be synchronous. Assign 4 synchronous
audio signals to channels in a group. (See section 6-5-1. “EMB1 OUT REMAP” for details.)
Then the asynchronous audio signal will be properly embedded to the video signal.
100
6-1-5. EMB2 IN GAIN
E M B 2 I N G A I N
C H S E L : C H 1
G A I N S E T : 0 . 0 d B
M A S T E R : 0 . 0 d B
1 0 5
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
CH SEL
GAIN SET
CH1
0.0 dB
CH1 - CH16
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
*1
Selects an FS2 embedded audio channel for which to adjust the gain.
Sets the input gain for the SDI embedded audio channel that is selected under CH
SEL.
MASTER 0.0 dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Sets the offset to the input gain for all channels CH1 to CH16 of SDI-embedded audio.
*1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range. If the range is exceeded, the alert will be displayed as *20.0 dB or *-20.0 dB.
6-1-6. EMB2 OUT MONO
1 0 6 E M B 2 O U T M O N O
C H S E L : C H 1 / 2
M O N O S U M ： D I S A B L E
Parameter
CH SEL
Default
CH1/2
MONO SUM DISABLE
Setting range
CH1/2-15/16
DISABLE
ENABLE
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Description
Selects a stereo pair of FS2 embedded audio channels.
ENABLE: Outputs the stereo pair channels selected under CH SEL as a mono sum.
(The signals of the selected pair channels are added and devided by two to output from each channel.)
101
6-1-7. EMB2 IN SET
E M B 2 I N S E T
A L I G N M E N T : D I S A B L E
H D - S D I A C L K : A U T O
1 0 7
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Parameter Default Setting range Description
ALIGNMENT
*1
DISABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE
Enables or disables automatic phase adjustment for FS2 input embedded audio channel groups.
ENABLE: Automatic adjustment
DISABLE: No adjustment (normal setting)
Selects audio clock signal to use for de-embedding and processing audio data in
HD-SDI input signal.
AUTO: De-embeds HD-SDI embedded audio data using the audio clock phase data in the embedded audio. Synchronous and asynchronous embedded audio signals from 4 audio groups can be de-embedded separately.
*2
HD-SDI
ACLK
AUTO
AUTO
SYNC SDI
AUD CLK
Audio data will be processed as synchronous data if the audio clock phase data is incorrect, or jitter is too great.
SYNC SDI: All audio data in 4 audio groups are always processed as synchronous data without refering to the respective audio clock phase data.
*3
AUD CLK: Always uses audio clock phase data in HD-SDI embedded audio data to de-embed the audio data.
*4
*1 Embedded audio signal groups are automatically phase-adjusted when they are input to the FA-9520. If there is an abnormal audio signal in an audio group, whether the audio group is in use or not, audio streams may be obstructed by the auto phase adjustment. In such cases, audio stream obstruction can be avoided using this Alignment enable/disable function.
*2 Embedded audio signals in SD-SDI video inputs are always processed as synchronous signals.
*3 SYNC SDI should be selected only if audio data cannot pass through as AUTO or asynchronous audio data is never input.
*4 AUD CLK may be effective in the case audio data cannot properly pass through as AUTO or Sync SDI.
IMPORTANT
Use this Alignment enable/disable function only if the audio output has noise or is muted. Do not change the setting for normal audio output.
Note that the audio output will be temporally muted when ALIGNMENT is changed from DISABLE to ENABLE while audio signal phases are aligning.
102
6-1-8. EMB2 AUDIO CLOCK
E M B 2 A U D I O C L O C K 1 0 8
G R O U P 1 : R E F E R E N C E
G R O U P 2 : R E F E R E N C E
G R O U P 3 : R E F E R E N C E
G R O U P 4 : R E F E R E N C E
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Parameter Default Setting range Description
GROUP 1
GROUP 2
REFERENCE
REFERENCE
AUTO
REFERENCE
INPUT CH 1/2
INPUT CH 3/4
AUTO
REFERENCE
INPUT CH 5/6
INPUT CH 7/8
Selects an audio clock signal per group for SDI embedded audio output from
FS2.
AUTO: Automatically selects audio clock input in the NON-PCM signal channel, if an input NON-PCM signal is in the selected SDI embedded audio group.
Automatically selects audio clock signal in the smallest numbered channel, if all signals in the audio group are NON-PCM.
Automatically selects audio clock signal synchronized to the output video signal, if all signals in the audio group are PCM.
*2
GROUP 3 REFERENCE
AUTO
REFERENCE
INPUT CH 9/10
INPUT CH 11/12
REFEFENCE: Audio clock signal synchronized to the output video signal.
(Used to synchronize audio with the video signals processed in the SRC.)
CH 1/2 to 15/16: Audio clock input in
SOURCE channels CH 1/2 to 15/16.
*1
GROUP 4 REFERENCE
AUTO
REFERENCE
INPUT CH 13/14
INPUT CH 15/16
To output asynchronous audio signals, select one input channel pair for each group.
*2
For SD-SDI outputs, REFERENCE is automatically selected regardless of the settings.
*1 See section 6-5 “AUDIO MAPPING (MAPPING)” for details on SOURCE settings.
*2 Embedded audio signals are divided into 4 groups. Each group consists of 4 audio channels; Group 1 (CH 1 to 4), Group 2 (CH 5 to 8), Group 3 (CH 9 to 12), Group 4 (CH 13 to 16). The audio signals in the same group are transmitted together using the same audio clock (48kHz). PCM audio signals will be synchronized to a genlock signal in the SRC
(sampling rate converter) so as to synchronize with the output video signal. Non-PCM audio signals (compressed audio data such as AC-3) do not go into SRC. If the NON-PCM audio input signal is asynchronous with the output video signal, the NON-PCM audio output signal will be asynchronous. The asynchronous NON-PCM audio signals can be embedded to SDI video signals by selecting an audio clock for each audio group. To do so, all 4 channels in the respective audio groups must be synchronous. Assign 4 synchronous
audio signals to channels in a group. (See section 6-5-2. “EMB2 OUT REMAP” for details.)
Then the asynchronous audio signal will be properly embedded to the video signal.
103
6-2. AES AUDIO Settings (AES AUDIO)
Allows you to set the DIGITAL AUDIO IN/OUT settings.
6-2-1. AES IN GAIN
A E S I N G A I N
C H S E L : C H 1
G A I N S E T : 0 . 0 d B
M A S T E R : 0 . 0 d B
1 1 1 Menu button
C C
AES AUDIO
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
CH SEL
GAIN SET
CH1
0.0 dB
CH1 - CH8
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
*1
Selects an AES audio channel for which to adjust the gain from channels CH1 through 8.
Sets the input gain for the AES audio channel that is selected under CH SEL.
MASTER 0.0 dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Sets the offset to the input gain for all channels
CH1 to 8 of AES inputs.
*1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range. If the range is exceeded, the alert will be displayed as *20.0 dB or *-20.0 dB.
6-2-2. AES HYSTERESIS
A E S H Y S T E R E S I S
C H S E L : C H 1 / 2
H Y S S E T : O F F
1 1 2 Menu button
C C
AES AUDIO
Parameter
CH SEL
HYS SET
Default Setting range (Steps)
CH 1/2
OFF
CH 1/2
CH 3/4
CH 5/6
CH 7/8
OFF
GROUP A
GROUP B
Description
Synchronizes the AES input signals in group A or B per group.
These settings are effective when using
AES audio signals to output multi-channel audio signals such as surround sound.
The channel pair with the smallest channel numbers within a group is used as the reference pair and other channel pairs are synchronized to it. If there is no audio signal in the channel pair, the next channel pair will be the reference. Audio signals with a phase difference relative to the reference within ±0.25 of a sample period can be synchronized.
Setting Examples:
When setting all channel pairs CH 1/2 to 7/8 to GROUP A
CH 1/2 will be the reference. Other channel pairs will be synchronized to the word clock of
CH1/2.
When setting channels CH1/2 to 3/4 to GROUP A, and channels CH5/6 to 7/8 to
GROUP B
CH 1/2 will be the reference pair for GROUP A, and CH 5/6 the reference pair for GROUP B.
IMPORTANT
Channel pairs in an audio group must be synchronous and must have the same sampling rate. Changing the audio assignment of the reference channel pair may cause noise on other channel pairs in the same audio group.
Also, changing the assignment may affect the phase alignment of the reference and other channel pairs. If the alignment is turned off, set MASTER MUTE (see section
6-4-1 “MASTER OUT GAIN”) on and off, or turn the unit power off and on to regain the
alignment.
104
6-2-3. AES OUT MONO
A E S O U T M O N O
C H S E L : C H 1 / 2
M O N O S U M : D I S A B L E
1 1 3
Menu button
C C
AES AUDIO
Parameter Default Setting range Description
CH SEL
MONO SUM
CH1/2
DISABLE
CH1/2 - 7/8
DISABLE
ENABLE
Selects a stereo pair of AES output audio channels.
ENABLE: Outputs the stereo pair channels that are selected under CH
SEL as a mono sum.
(The signals of the selected pair channels are added and devided by two to output from each channel.)
If the AES connector is set to be used for input, the menu display for the selected AES output
audio channel appears as ＊CH1. See section 6-2-4 “AES I/O SETUP” and change the
setting if necessary.
6-2-4. AES I/O SETUP
A E S I / O S E T U P
A E S 1 - 4 I / O : I N P U T
A E S 5 - 8 I / O : I N P U T
1 1 4
Menu button
C C
AES AUDIO
Parameter Default Setting range Description
AES1 - 4
AES5 - 8
INPUT
INPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT
OUTPUT
INPUT: AES1/2, and 3/4 connectors are set to be input connectors.
OUTPUT: AES1/2, and 3/4 connectors are set to be output connectors.
INPUT: AES5/6, and 7/8 connectors are set to be input connectors.
OUTPUT: AES5/6, and 7/8 connectors are set to be output connectors.
All connectors are set as input connectors and this menu is not displayed if the FA-95DACBL option is installed.
105
6-3. ANALOG AUDIO Settings (ANALOG)
6-3-1. ANALOG IN LEVEL
1 2 1 A N A L O G I N L E V E L
C H S E L : C H 1
L E V E L S E T : + 4 d B m
Parameter
CH SEL
Default
CH1
Setting range
CH1 - CH4
Menu button
CONV1
ANALOG
Description
Selects an analog audio input channel for which to set the signal level from channels CH1 to CH4.
LEVEL SET +4dBm
-10dBm
0dBm
+4dBm
+8dBm
Sets the signal level for the analog audio input signal that is selected under CH SEL.
6-3-2. ANALOG IN GAIN
A N A L O G I N G A I N
C H S E L : C H 1
G A I N S E T : 0 . 0 d B
M A S T E R : 0 . 0 d B
1 2 2
Menu button
CONV1
ANALOG
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
CH SEL
GAIN SET
CH1
0.0dB
CH1 - CH4
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB) *1
Selects an analog audio input channel for which to set the input gain from channels CH1 to CH4.
Sets the input gain for the analog audio input signal that is selected under CH SEL.
MASTER 0.0 dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Sets the offset to the input gain for all analog audio channels CH1 to
CH4.
*1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range. If the range is exceeded, the alert will be displayed as *20.0dB or *-20.0dB.
6-3-3. ANALOG OUT LEVEL
A N A L O G O U T L E V E L 1 2 3
C H S E L : C H 1
L E V E L S E T : + 4 d B m
Parameter
CH SEL
Default
CH1
Setting range
CH1 - CH4
Menu button
CONV1
ANALOG
Description
Selects an analog audio output channel for which to set the signal level from channels CH1 to CH4.
LEVEL SET +4dBm
-10dBm
0dBm
+4dBm
+8dBm
Sets the signal level for the analog audio output signal that is selected under CH SEL.
106
6-3-4. ANALOG OUT MONO
A N A L O G O U T M O N O
C H S E L : C H 1 / 2
M O N O S U M : D I S A B L E
Parameter
CH SEL
MONO SUM
1 2 4
Default
CH1/2
DISABLE
Setting range
CH1/2-3/4
DISABLE
ENABLE
Menu button
CONV1
ANALOG
Description
Selects a stereo pair of analog audio output channels.
ENABLE: Outputs the stereo pair channels that are selected under
CH SEL as a mono sum.
(The signals of the selected pair channels are added and devided by two to output from each channel.)
6-3-5. ANALOG IN SYSTEM
A N A L O G I N S Y S T E M 1 2 5
T E R M I N A L S E T : 6 0 0 Ω
S I L E N C E T I M E : 2 s e c
S I L E N C E L V L : - 7 2 d B F S
Parameter
TERMINAL SET
SILENCE TIME
SILENCE LVL
Default
600 Ω
2sec
-72dBFS
Menu button
CONV1
ANALOG
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
600 Ω
Hi-Z
1 - 10sec
-72 - -48dBFS
(6dBFS Step)
Selects how to terminate the analog inputs 1/2 and 3/4.
600 Ω: 600Ω termination
Hi-Z: High-impedance
Sets the duration to determine whether the input analog audio is silent.
Sets the audio level to determine whether the input analog audio is silent.
107
6-4. OUTPUT GAIN CONTROL
Allows you to adjust audio signal output gain.
6-4-1. MASTER OUT GAIN
M A S T E R O U T G A I N
G A I N S E T : 0 . 0 d B
M U T E : O F F
1 3 1
Parameter
GAIN SET
MUTE
Default
0.0dB
OFF
Setting range
(Steps)
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
OFF
ON
6-4-2. EMB1 OUT GAIN
Menu button
Description
CONV2
MASTER
Sets audio gain for the signal selected under CH SEL.
ON: Mutes all audio channels.
E M B 1 O U T G A I N
C H S E L : C H 1
G A I N S E T : 0 . 0 d B
M A S T E R : 0 . 0 d B
M A S T E R M U T E : O F F
1 3 2
Menu button
CONV2
MASTER
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
CH SEL
GAIN SET
CH1
0.0dB
CH1 - 16
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
*1
Selects an audio channel from among FS1 embedded audio channels CH1 through 16 for which to set audio gain.
Sets audio output gain for the signal selected under CH SEL.
MASTER －
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Sets the offset to audio output gain for all audio channels CH1 through 16 in FS1.
MUTE OFF
OFF
ON
ON: Mutes all embedded audio channels in FS1.
*1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range. If the range is exceeded, the alert will be displayed as *20.0dB or *-20.0dB.
108
6-4-3. EMB2 OUT GAIN
E M B 2 O U T G A I N
C H S E L : C H 1
G A I N S E T : 0 . 0 d B
M A S T E R : 0 . 0 d B
M U T E : O F F
1 3 3
Menu button
CONV2
MASTER
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
CH SEL
GAIN SET
MASTER
CH1
0.0dB
－
CH1 - 16
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
*1
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Selects an audio channel from among FS2 embedded audio channels CH1 through 16 for which to set audio gain.
Sets audio output gain for the signal selected under CH SEL.
Sets the offset to audio output gain for all audio channels CH1 through 16 in FS2.
MUTE OFF
OFF
ON
ON: Mutes all embedded audio channels in FS2.
*1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range. If the range is exceeded, the alert will be displayed as *20.0dB or *-20.0dB.
6-4-4. AES OUT GAIN
A E S O U T G A I N
C H S E L : C H 1
G A I N S E T : 0 . 0 d B
M A S T E R : 0 . 0 d B
M U T E : O F F
1 3 4
Menu button
CONV2
MASTER
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
CH SEL
GAIN SET
CH1
0.0dB
CH1 - 8
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
*1
Selects an AES audio channel for which to set audio gain from channels CH1 to CH8.
Sets audio output gain for the signal selected under CH SEL.
MASTER
MUTE
－
OFF
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
OFF
ON
Sets the offset to audio output gain for all AES audio channels.
ON: Mutes all AES audio channels.
*1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range. If the range is exceeded, the alert will be displayed as *20.0dB or *-20.0dB.
109
6-4-5. ANALOG OUT GAIN
A N A L O G O U T G A I N
C H S E L : C H 1
G A I N S E T : 0 . 0 d B
M A S T E R : 0 . 0 d B
M U T E : O F F
1 3 5
Menu button
CONV1
ANALOG
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
CH SEL
GAIN SET
MASTER
CH1
0.0dB
0.0 dB
CH1 - CH4
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Selects an analog audio output channel for which to set the input gain from channels CH1 to CH4.
Sets the output gain for the analog audio output signal that is selected under CH SEL.
Sets the offset to the output gain for all analog audio channels CH1 to CH4.
MUTE OFF
OFF
ON
ON: Mutes all analog audio channels.
*1 The total value of GAIN SET and MASTER should not exceed the setting range. If the range is exceeded, the alert will be displayed as *20.0dB or *-20.0dB.
110
6-5. AUDIO MAPPING (MAPPING)
Allows you to assign embedded audio, AES audio, and analog audio signals to output channels..
6-5-1. EMB1 OUT REMAP
E M B 1 O U T R E M A P
C H S E L : C H 1
A S S I G N : E M B 1 C H 1
F R O M : S D I I N 1
1 4 1
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Parameter
CH SEL
Default
CH1
Setting range
CH1 - CH16
Description
Selects an FS1 audio channel to embed audio signal from CH1 through 16.
ASSIGN EMB1 CH1-16
EMB1 CH1-16
EMB2 CH1-16
AES CH1-8
*1
ANALOG CH1-4
DOWN MIX1-L
DOWN MIX1-R
DOWN MIX2-L
DOWN MIX2-R
500Hz TONE
1KHz TONE
SILENCE
Dolby DECA CH1-8
*2
Dolby DMA-L
Dolby DMA- R
*2
*2
Dolby ENCA CH1-2
Dolby DECB CH1-8
*3
*4
Dolby DMB-L
Dolby DMB- R
*4
*4
Dolby ENCB CH1-2
*5
LOUD1A
LOUD2A
LOUD1B
LOUD2B
*6
*6
*7
*7
L
R
C
LFE
Ls
Rs
Selects an audio signal to embed into the FS1 audio channel selected under CH SEL.
FROM -
SDI IN1
SDI IN2
-----
Displays the input signal from which the selected embedded audio signal is input, if ASSIGN is set to one among EMB1 CH1 through 16 and
EMB2 CH1 through 16.
*1 If the AES connector is set to be used for input, the selected AES channel will be displayed with an “＊“ as “＊AES CH1“ and no audio signal will be output. To change AES I/O
settings, see section 6-2-4. „AES I/O SETUP“ for details.
*2 Not shown if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot A.
*3 Not shown if the FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot A.
*4 Not shown if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot B.
*5 Not shown if the FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot B.
*6 Not shown if the FA-95ALA option is not installed in option slot A.
*7 Not shown if the FA-95ALA option is not installed in option slot B.
Auto Channel Pairing for NON-PCM Audio Inputs
The FA-9520 recognizes NON-PCM audio input signals in L/R channel pair units, and adjusts assignments according to the signal selected for the L channel.
Ex. L/R channel pairs in EMB1: CH1/CH2, CH3/CH4......CH15/CH16.
The channel assignments that are changed by the adjustment will be shown with “＊” as
“CH1:＊EMB1 CH1”.
111
6-5-2. EMB2 OUT REMAP
E M B 2 O U T R E M A P
C H S E L : C H 1
A S S I G N : E M B 2 C H 1
F R O M : S D I I N 2
1 4 2
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Parameter
CH SEL
Default
CH1
Setting range
CH1 - CH16
Description
Selects an FS2 audio channel to embed audio signal from CH1 through 16.
ASSIGN EMB2 CH1-16
EMB1 CH1-16
EMB2 CH1-16
AES CH1-8
*1
ANALOG CH1-4
DOWN MIX1-L
DOWN MIX1-R
DOWN MIX2-L
DOWN MIX2-R
500Hz TONE
1KHz TONE
SILENCE
Dolby DECA CH1-8
*2
Dolby DMA-L
*2
Dolby DMA- R
*2
Dolby ENCA CH1-2
*3
Dolby DECB CH1-8
*4
Dolby DMB-L
*4
Dolby DMB- R
*4
Dolby ENCB CH1-2
*5
LOUD1A
LOUD2A
LOUD1B
*6
*6
*7
LOUD2B
*7
L
R
C
LFE
Ls
Rs
Selects an audio signal to embed into the FS2 audio channel selected under CH SEL.
FROM -
SDI IN1
SDI IN2
-----
Displays the input signal from which the selected embedded audio signal is input, if ASSIGN is set to one among EMB1 CH1 through 16 and
EMB2 CH1 through 16.
*1 If the AES connector is set to be used for input, the selected AES channel will be displayed with an “＊“ as “＊AES CH1“ and no audio signal will be output. To change AES I/O
settings, see section 6-2-4. “AES I/O SETUP“ for details.
*2 Not shown if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot A.
*3 Not shown if the FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot A.
*4 Not shown if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot B.
*5 Not shown if the FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot B.
*6 Not shown if the FA-95ALA option is not installed in option slot A.
*7 Not shown if the FA-95ALA option is not installed in option slot B.
Auto Channel Pairing for NON-PCM Audio Inputs
The FA-9520 recognizes NON-PCM audio input signals in L/R channel pair units, and adjusts assignments according to the signal selected for the L channel.
L/R channel pairs are, such as CH1 and CH2, CH3 and CH4......CH15 abd CH16 as an example in EMB1.
The channel assignments that are changed by the adjustment will be shown with “＊” as
“CH1:＊EMB1 CH1”.
112
6-5-3. AES OUT REMAP
A E S O U T R E M A P
C H S E L : C H 1
A S S I G N : A E S C H 1
1 4 3
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
Parameter
CH SEL
Default
CH1
Setting range
CH1 – CH8
Description
Selects an AES audio channel to output audio signal from CH1 through 8.
ASSIGN AES CH1-8
EMB1 CH1-16
EMB2 CH1-16
AES CH1-8
*1
ANALOG CH1-4
DOWN MIX1-L
DOWN MIX1-R
DOWN MIX2-L
DOWN MIX2-R
500Hz TONE
1KHz TONE
SILENCE
Dolby DECA CH1-8
*2
Dolby DMA-L
*2
Dolby DMA- R
*2
Dolby ENCA CH1-2
*3
Dolby DECB CH1-8
*4
Dolby DMB-L
*4
Dolby DMB- R
*4
Dolby ENCB CH1-2
*5
LOUD1A
LOUD2A
LOUD1B
*6
*6
*7
LOUD2B
*7
L
R
C
LFE
Ls
Rs
Selects an audio signal to be output to the AES audio channel selected under CH SEL.
FROM
SDI IN1
SDI IN2
-----
Displays the source signal input channel of the embedded audio signal for EMB1 CH1-CH16, or
EMB2 CH1-CH16 selected under
ASSIGN.
*1 If the AES connector is set to be used for input, the selected AES channel will be displayed with an “＊“ as “＊AES CH1“ and no audio signal will be output. To change AES I/O
settings, see section 6-2-4. “AES I/O SETUP“ for details.
*2 Not shown if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot A.
*3 Not shown if the FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot A.
*4 Not shown if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot B.
*5 Not shown if the FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot B.
*6 Not shown if the FA-95ALA option is not installed in option slot A.
*7 Not shown if the FA-95ALA option is not installed in option slot B.
Auto Channel Pairing for NON-PCM Audio Inputs
The FA-9520 recognizes NON-PCM audio input signals in L/R channel pair units, and adjusts assignments according to the signal selected for the L channel.
L/R channel pairs are, such as CH1 and CH2, CH3 and CH4......CH15 abd CH16 as an example in EMB1.
The channel assignments that are changed by the adjustment will be shown with “＊” as
“CH1:＊EMB1 CH1”.
113
6-5-4. ANALOG OUT REMAP
A N A L O G O U T R E M A P 1 4 4
C H S E L : C H 1
A S S I G N : A N A L O G C H 1
Menu button
CONV1
ANALOG
Parameter
CH SEL
Default
CH1
Setting range
CH1 - 8
Description
Selects an audio output channel to output analog audio signal from CH1 through 8.
ASSIGN ANALOG CH1 - 4
EMB1 CH1-16
EMB2 CH1-16
AES CH1-8
*1
ANALOG CH1-4
DOWN MIX1-L
DOWN MIX1-R
DOWN MIX2-L
DOWN MIX2-R
500Hz TONE
1KHz TONE
SILENCE
Dolby DECA CH1-8
*2
Dolby DMA-L
*2
Dolby DMA- R
*2
Dolby DECB CH1-8
*3
Dolby DMB-L
*3
Dolby DMB- R
*3
LOUD1A
LOUD2A
LOUD1B
*4
*4
*5
LOUD2B
*5
L
R
C
LFE
Ls
Rs
Selects a signal to be output from the analog audio output channel that is selected under
CH SEL.
FROM
SDI IN1
SDI IN2
-----
Displays the source signal input channel of the embedded audio signal for EMB1 CH1-CH16, or
EMB2 CH1-CH16 selected under ASSIGN.
*1 If the AES connector is set to be used for input, the selected AES channel will be displayed with an “＊“ as “＊AES CH1“ and no audio signal will be output. To change AES I/O
settings, see section 6-2-4. “AES I/O SETUP“ for details.
*2 Not shown if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot A.
*3 Not shown if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is not installed in option slot B.
*4 Not shown if the FA-95ALA option is not installed in option slot A.
*5 Not shown if the FA-95ALA option is not installed in option slot B.
114
6-6. AUDIO DELAY Settings
6-6-1. EMB1 IN DELAY
E M B 1 I N D E L A Y
C H S E L : C H 1
O F F S E T : 0 m s
M A S T E R : 4 m s
T O T A L : 4 m s
1 5 1
Menu button
CLIP
DELAY
Parameter
CH SEL
OFFSET
MASTER
Default
CH 1
0msec
4msec
TOTAL -
6-6-2. EMB2 IN DELAY
E M B 2 I N D E L A Y
C H S E L : C H 1
O F F S E T : 0 m s
M A S T E R : 4 m s
T O T A L : 4 m s
Parameter
CH SEL
OFFSET
MASTER
Default
CH 1
0msec
4msec
1 5 2
TOTAL -
6-6-3. AES IN DELAY
Setting range
CH1 - CH16
-996ms - 996ms
4ms - 1000ms
-
Description
Selects an embedded audio channel in FS1 for which to set delay.
Sets the delay for the audio channel that is selected under CH SEL.
Sets the offset to the delay for all audio channels CH1 to 16.
Displays the total amount of delay set for the audio channel that is selected under CH SEL. (OFFSET + MASTER)
Menu button
CLIP
DELAY
Setting range
CH1 - CH16
-996ms - 996ms
4ms - 1000ms
-
Description
Selects an embedded audio channel in FS2 for which to set delay.
Sets the delay for the audio channel that is selected under CH SEL.
Sets the offset to the delay for all audio channels CH1 to 16.
Displays the total amount of delay set for the audio channel that is selected under CH SEL. (OFFSET + MASTER)
A E S I N D E L A Y
C H S E L : C H 1
O F F S E T : 0 m s
M A S T E R : 4 m s
T O T A L : 4 m s
1 5 3
Menu button
CLIP
DELAY
Parameter
CH SEL
OFFSET
MASTER
TOTAL
Default
CH 1
0msec
4msec
-
Setting range
CH1 – CH8
-996ms - 996ms
4ms - 1000ms
-
Description
Selects an AES audio channel for which to set delay.
Sets the delay for the audio channel that is selected under CH SEL.
Sets the offset to the delay for all audio channels CH1 to 8.
Displays the total amount of delay set for the audio channel that is selected under CH SEL. (OFFSET + MASTER)
115
6-6-4. ANALOG IN DELAY
A N A L O G I N D E L A Y
C H S E L : C H 1
O F F S E T : 0 m s
M A S T E R : 4 m s
T O T A L : 4 m s
Parameter
CH SEL
OFFSET
MASTER
Default
CH 1
0msec
4msec
1 5 4
TOTAL -
Menu button
CLIP
DELAY
Setting range
CH1 – CH4
-996ms - 996ms
4ms - 1000ms
-
Description
Selects an analog audio channel for which to set delay.
Sets the delay for the audio channel that is selected under CH SEL.
Sets the offset to the delay for all audio channels CH1 to 4.
Displays the total amount of delay set for the audio channel that is selected under CH SEL. (OFFSET + MASTER)
116
6-7. DOWN MIX1 SET
D O W N M I X 1 S E T
M O D E : S T E R E O
S U R R O U N D M I X : - 3 d B
C E N T E R M I X : - 3 d B
M A S T E R L V L : - 3 d B
1 6 1 Menu button
IN SEL
DOWN MIX
Parameter
MODE
*1
Default
STEREO
Setting range
(Steps)
STEREO
SURROUND
MONAURAL
Description
Selects a mode to downmix1 audio signals.
SURROUND MIX -3dB
-3dB
-6dB
-9dB
0
Sets the Ls/Rs (surround channels) level.
0 : (-∞dB) Excludes surround channels from the downmix.
CENTER MIX -3dB
-3dB
-4.5 dB
-6dB
Sets the C (center channel) level.
-3dB: The output level after the downmix retains the original center channel level.
-4.5dB, -6dB: Used to reduce the audio level in case it becomes too loud due to the center channel audio mixing to both the right and left channels.
MASTER LVL -3dB
-3dB
AUTO
Sets the level for the downmixed audio signals as a whole.
If set to AUTO, Down MIX Master
Level changes according to the
Downmix Mode and Surround
Mix level selections.
*2
*1 See section 10. “Downmix Block Diagram” for details on downmix modes.
*2 If MASTER LVL is set to AUTO, Master Level changes as shown in the below table.
Surround Mix Level
Down Mix Mode
-3dB -6dB -9dB 0 (-
∞dB)
Stereo approx.-7.7dB approx.-6.9dB approx.-6.3dB approx.-4.6dB
Surround
Monaural approx.-9.9dB approx.-8.7dB approx.-7.7dB approx.-4.6dB approx.-12.9dB approx.-12.0dB approx.-11.4dB approx.-9.5dB
117
6-7-1. DOWN MIX1 ASSIGN
D O W N M I X 1 A S S I G N 1 6 2
C H S E L : L E F T
A S S I G N : L E F T : E M B 1 C H 1
Menu button
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
Parameter Default Description
CH SEL LEFT
LEFT(L)
RIGHT(R)
CENTER(C)
LEFT SRRND(LS)
RIGHT SRRND(RS)
Selects a channel to be downmixed in downmix
2 for which to assign a source audio.
ASSIGN
LEFT:EMB1 CH1
RIGHT:EMB1 CH2
CENTER:EMB1 CH3
LEFT SRRND: EMB1 CH5
RIGHT SRRND: EMB1 CH6
EMB1 CH1 - 16
EMB2 CH1 - 16
AES CH1 - 8
ANALOG CH1 - 4
Selects an audio signal to be assigned to the channel that is selected under CH SEL.
If the same audio signal is selected for multiple CH SEL channels, or a NON-PCM signal is assigned to an audio channel, the menu will be indicated with an “*“, i.e. „*EMB1 CH1“, and
DOWNMIX-L and DOWNMIX-R will be muted.
NOTE
Setting range
(Steps)
To output downmixed audio signals, see sections 6-5-1
118
6-8. DOWN MIX2 SET
D O W N M I X 2 S E T
M O D E : S T E R E O
S U R R O U N D M I X : - 3 d B
C E N T E R M I X : - 3 d B
M A S T E R L V L : - 3 d B
1 6 3 Menu button
IN SEL
DOWN MIX
Parameter
MODE
*1
Default
STEREO
Setting range
(Steps)
STEREO
SURROUND
MONAURAL
Description
Selects a mode to downmix2 audio signals.
SURROUND MIX -3dB
-3dB
-6dB
-9dB
0
Sets the Ls/Rs (surround channels) level.
0 : (-∞dB) Excludes surround channels from the downmix.
CENTER MIX -3dB
-3dB
-4.5 dB
-6dB
Sets the C (center channel) level.
-3dB: The output level after the downmix retains the original center channel level.
-4.5dB, -6dB: Used to reduce the audio level in case it becomes too loud due to the center channel audio mixing to both the right and left channels.
MASTER LVL -3dB
-3dB
AUTO
Sets the level for the downmixed audio signals as a whole.
If set to AUTO, Down MIX Master
Level changes according to the
Downmix Mode and Surround
Mix level selections.
*2
*1 See section 10. “Downmix Block Diagram” for details on downmix modes.
*2 If MASTER LVL is set to AUTO, Master Level changes as shown in the below table.
Surround Mix Level
Down Mix Mode
-3dB -6dB -9dB 0 (-
∞dB)
Stereo approx.-7.7dB approx.-6.9dB approx.-6.3dB approx.-4.6dB
Surround
Monaural approx.-9.9dB approx.-8.7dB approx.-7.7dB approx.-4.6dB approx.-12.9dB approx.-12.0dB approx.-11.4dB approx.-9.5dB
119
6-8-1. DOWN MIX2 ASSIGN
D O W N M I X 2 A S S I G N 1 6 4
C H S E L : L E F T
A S S I G N : L E F T : E M B 2 C H 1
Menu button
IN SEL
DOWNMIX
Parameter Default Description
CH SEL LEFT
LEFT(L)
RIGHT(R)
CENTER(C)
LEFT SRRND(LS)
RIGHT SRRND(RS)
Selects a channel to be downmixed in downmix
1 for which to assign a source audio.
ASSIGN
LEFT:EMB2 CH1
RIGHT:EMB2 CH2
CENTER:EMB2 CH3
LEFT SRRND: EMB2 CH5
RIGHT SRRND: EMB2 CH6
EMB1 CH1 - 16
EMB2 CH1 - 16
AES CH1 - 8
ANALOG CH1 - 4
Selects an audio signal to be assigned to the channel that is selected under CH SEL.
If the same audio signal is selected for multiple CH SEL channels, or a NON-PCM signal is assigned to an audio channel, the menu will be indicated with an “*“, i.e. “*EMB1 CH1“, and
DOWNMIX-L and DOWNMIX-R will be muted.
NOTE
Setting range
(Steps)
To output downmixed audio signals, see sections 6-5-1
120
6-9. AUDIO MODE SET (MODE)
6-9-1. EMB1 SRC MODE
E M B 1 S R C M O D E
C H S E L : C H 1 / 2
S R C M O D E : S R C I N
1 7 1
Menu button
OUT SEL
MODE
Parameter
CH SEL
SRC MODE
Default
CH1/2 CH1/2 - CH15/16
SRC IN
Setting range
AUTO
BY-PASS
SRC IN
Description
Selects a stereo pair of FS1 embedded audio signals to be set to pass or by-pass the SRC circuit.
Sets the SRC circuit to pass or by-pass the audio channel pair selected under CH SEL.
AUTO:
Sets the SRC circuit to pass signals. However,
NON-PCM audio signals will be by-passed.
BY-PASS:
Sets the SRC circuit to by-pass signals. Set to
By-pass to output asynchronous audio signals. To embed the asynchronous audio signals to SDI video signals, an audio clock
must be selected under (6-1-4) “EMB1 OUT
CLOCK “ for the respective audio groups.
SRC IN:
Sets the SRC circuit to pass both PCM or
NON-PCM signals. Useful for the irregular
PCM signal with the NON-PCM audio channel status indication. However, real NON-PCM signals cannot be output properly.
6-9-2. EMB2 SRC MODE
E M B 2 S R C M O D E
C H S E L : C H 1 / 2
S R C M O D E : S R C I N
1 7 2
Menu button
OUT SEL
MODE
Parameter
CH SEL
SRC MODE
Default
CH1/2 CH1/2 - CH15/16
SRC IN
Setting range
AUTO
BY-PASS
SRC IN
Description
Selects a stereo pair of FS2 embedded audio signals to be set to pass or by-pass the SRC circuit.
Sets the SRC circuit to pass or by-pass the audio channel pair selected under CH SEL.
AUTO:
Sets the SRC circuit to pass signals. However,
NON-PCM audio signals will be by-passed.
BY-PASS:
Sets the SRC circuit to by-pass signals. Set to
By-pass to output asynchronous audio signals. To embed the asynchronous audio signals to SDI video signals, an audio clock
must be selected under (6-1-8) “EMB2 AUDIO
CLOCK “ for the respective audio groups.
SRC IN:
Sets the SRC circuit to pass both PCM or
NON-PCM signals. Useful for the irregular
PCM signal with the NON-PCM audio channel status indication. However, real NON-PCM signals cannot be output properly.
121
6-9-3. AES SRC MODE
A E S S R C M O D E
C H S E L : C H 1 / 2
S R C M O D E : S R C I N
1 7 3
Menu button
OUT SEL
MODE
Parameter
CH SEL
SRC MODE
Default Setting range
CH1/2 CH1/2 - CH15/16
SRC IN
AUTO
BY-PASS
SRC IN
Description
Selects a stereo pair of AES audio signals to be set to pass or by-pass the SRC circuit.
Sets the SRC circuit to pass or by-pass the audio channel pair selected under CH SEL.
AUTO:
Sets the SRC circuit to pass signals. However,
NON-PCM audio signals will be by-passed.
BY-PASS:
Sets the SRC circuit to by-pass signals. Set to
By-pass to output asynchronous audio signals. To embed the asynchronous audio signals to SDI video signals, an audio clock
must be selected under (6-1-4) “EMB1 OUT
CLOCK “ for the respective audio groups.
SRC IN:
Sets the SRC circuit to pass both PCM or
NON-PCM signals. Useful for the irregular
PCM signal with the NON-PCM audio channel status indication. However, real NON-PCM signals cannot be output properly.
6-9-4. EMB1 POLARITY
E M B 1 P O L A R I T Y
C H S E L ： C H 1
P O L A R I T Y : N O R M A L
1 7 4
Menu button
OUT SEL
MODE
Parameter
CH SEL
POLARITY
Default
CH1
NORMAL
6-9-5. EMB2 POLARITY
Setting range
CH 1 - 16
NORMAL
INVERT
Description
Selects a channel from among FS1 embedded audio channels for which to set polarity.
Sets the polarity for the channel that is selected under CH SEL.
INVERT: Reverses the polarity.
E M B 2 P O L A R I T Y
C H S E L ： C H 1
P O L A R I T Y : N O R M A L
1 7 5
Menu button
OUT SEL
MODE
Parameter
CH SEL
POLARITY
Default
CH1
NORMAL
Setting range
CH 1 - 16
NORMAL
INVERT
Description
Selects a channel from among FS2 embedded audio channels for which to set polarity.
Sets the polarity for the channel that is selected under CH SEL.
INVERT: Reverses the polarity.
122
6-9-6. AES POLARITY
A E S P O L A R I T Y
C H S E L ： C H 1
P O L A R I T Y : N O R M A L
1 7 6
Menu button
OUT SEL
MODE
Parameter
CH SEL
POLARITY
Default
CH1
NORMAL
6-9-7. ANALOG POLARITY
Setting range
CH 1 - 8
NORMAL
INVERT
Description
Selects a channel from among AES audio channels for which to set polarity.
Sets the polarity for the channel that is selected under CH SEL.
INVERT: Reverses the polarity.
A N A L O G P O L A R I T Y
C H S E L ： C H 1
P O L A R I T Y : N O R M A L
1 7 7
Menu button
OUT SEL
MODE
Parameter
CH SEL
POLARITY
Default
CH1
NORMAL
Setting range
CH 1 - 4
NORMAL
INVERT
Description
Selects a channel from among analog audio channels for which to set polarity.
Sets the polarity for the channel that is selected under CH SEL.
INVERT: Reverses the polarity.
123
6-9-8. Dolby A POLARITY
* This menu is accessible only if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E is installed in option slot A.
Menu button
D o l b y A P O L A R I T Y
C H S E L : D E C C H 1
P O L A R I T Y : N O R M A L
1 7 8
OUT SEL
MODE
Item
CH SEL
POLARITY
Default
DEC CH1
NORMAL
Setting range
DEC CH1 – 8
DolbyDM-L
DolbyDM-R
NORMAL
INVERT
Description
Selects a channel from among Dolby decoder output channels for which to set polarity.
Sets the polarity for the channel that is selected under CH SEL.
INVERT: Reverses polarity.
6-9-9. Dolby B POLARITY
* This menu is accessible only if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E is installed in option slot B.
Menu button
D o l b y B P O L A R I T Y
C H S E L : D E C C H 1
P O L A R I T Y : N O R M A L
1 7 9
OUT SEL
MODE
Item
CH SEL
POLARITY
Default
DEC CH1
NORMAL
Setting range
DEC CH1 – 8
DolbyDM-L
DolbyDM-R
NORMAL
INVERT
Description
Selects a channel from among Dolby decoder output channels for which to set polarity.
Sets the polarity for the channel that is selected under CH SEL.
INVERT: Reverses polarity.
124
6-10. AUDIO OPTION (AUDIO OP)
6-10-1. FA-95D-D / FA-95DE-E
6-10-1-1. Dolby AUX OUT
This menu is displayed only if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is installed in slot A.
D o l b y A U X O U T A
O U T P U T : D E C C H 1 / 2
1 8 1 Menu button
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B change as shown below.
D o l b y A U X O U T B 2 3 1
Parameter
OUTPUT
Default
DEC CH1/2
Setting range
DEC CH1/2 – CH7/8
DolbyDM L/R
ENC CH1/2
*1
500Hz TONE
1kHz TONE
SILENCE
NONE
Description
Selects an audio signal to be output from the optional Dolby output connector (Dolby OUT).
DEC CH1/2 – CH7/8: Dolby-decoded
PCM signals
DolbyDM L/R: Down mixed signals generated from Dolby-decoded PCM signals
ENC CH1/2: Encoded Dolby E signal of selected SOURCE channel signals.
500Hz/1KHz TONE:Test signal (TONE)
SILENCE: Mute signal
NONE: No signal output
*1 Shown only if the FA-95DE-E option is installed.
125
6-10-1-2. Dolby DEC IN
* This menu is displayed only if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is installed in slot A.
D o l b y D E C I N A
I N P U T : A U X I N
S T R E A M : L O S S
P R O G R A M : L O S S
1 8 2
Menu button
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B change as shown below.
D o l b y D E C I N B 2 3 2
Parameter Default
INPUT
STREAM
PROGRAM
AUX IN
-
-
Setting range
AUX IN
EMB1 CH1/2 - 15/16
EMB2 CH1/2 - 15/16
AES CH1/2 - 7/8
D 32bit
D 16bit 1, 2, 1/2 CH
E 24, 20, 16 bit
PCM
LOSS
ERROR
Description
Selects an audio signal to be input to the
Dolby decoder.
AUX IN: Input signal in the optional Dolby input connector (Dolby IN).
Displays signal type and bit width of signal selected under INPUT.
D ***: Dolby Digital signal
E ***: Dolby E signal
PCM: Normal audio signal
LOSS: No signal
ERROR: Unidentifiable
Dolby E
5.1+2
5.1+2x1
4+4
4+2x2
4+2+2x1
4+4x1
4x2
3x2+2x1
2x2+4x1
2+6x1
8x1
5.1
4+2
4+2x1
3x2
2x2+2x1
2+4x1
6x1
4
2+2
2+2x1
4x1
7.1
7.1 Screen
NON-Dolby E
Dolby Digital
1+1
1/0
2/0
3/0
2/1
3/1
2/2
3/2
3/0L
2/1L
3/1L
2/2L
3/2L
LOSS
INVALID
Displays Dolby E program configuration
(Coding mode) or status of signal selected under INPUT.
See Dolby E/Digital Decoder Output
Channel Assignment table in section 13
“Dolby E Decoder/Encoder Channel
Assignment Table ” for channel
assignments of respective configurations.
126
6-10-1-3. Dolby DECODER REFERENCE
This menu is displayed only if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is installed in slot A.
D o l b y D E C R E F A 1 8 3
Menu button
I N P U T : N O N E
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B change as shown below.
D o l b y D E C R E F B 2 3 3
Parameter Default Setting range
INPUT NONE
NONE
FS1 OUTPUT
FS2 OUTPUT
AUX REF IN
FS1 INPUT
FS2 INPUT
Description
Selects a reference signal to be used in the
Dolby decoder. PCM signal output from the
Dolby decoder will be synchronized to the selected reference signal.
NONE: No reference signal used
FS1/2 OUTPUT: Uses the respective FS output video signals.
AUX REF IN: Uses the input signal in the optional Dolby reference input connector
(REF IN). If no signal is in the REF IN connector, the PCM signal output will be in free-run mode.
FS1/2 INPUT: Uses the respective FS input video signals.
6-10-1-4. Dolby DOWNMIX
This menu is displayed only if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is installed in slot A.
D o l b y D O W N M I X A
M O D E : S U R R O U N D
1 8 4
Menu button
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B chang as shown below.
D o l b y D O W N M I X B 2 3 4
Parameter Default
MODE SURROUND
Setting range
SURROUND
STEREO
MONAURAL
Description
Selects a downmix mode for the Dolby decoder.
127
6-10-1-5. Dolby DECODER GAIN
This menu is displayed only if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is installed in slot A.
D o l b y D E C G A I N A 1 8 5
C H S E L : D E C C H 1
G A I N S E T : 0 . 0 d B
M A S T E R : 0 . 0 d B
Menu button
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B chang as shown below.
D o l b y D O W N M I X B 2 3 5
Parameter
CH SEL
Default
DEC CH1
Setting range
DEC CH1 – CH8
DolbyDM-L
DolbyDM-R
Description
Selects a signal for gain adjustment.
DEC CH1-CH8: Dolby-decoded PCM signal
DolbyDM-L/R: Down mixed signal generated from Dolby-decoded PCM signal
GAIN SET
MASTER
0.0 dB
0.0 dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
*1
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Sets gain for the signal selected under
CH SEL.
Sets offset for all Dolby-decoded signals.
*1 If the MASTER setting exceeds the total setting range of individual channels, the alert will be displayed as *20.0dB or *-20.0dB.
128
6-10-1-6. Dolby ENCODER INPUT
This menu is displayed only if FA-95DE-E option is installed in option slot A.
D o l b y E N C I N A 1 8 6
Menu button
I N P U T : D I R E C T I N S E L
C H S E L : C H 1
A S S I G N : E M B 1 C H 1
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B chang as shown below.
D o l b y E N C I N B 2 3 6
Parameter
INPUT
Default
DIRECT
IN SEL
Setting range
DIRECT IN SEL
Dolby DEC OUT
Description
Selects a signal to be input to the Dolby encoder.
*1
DIRECT IN SEL: SOURCE channel signals of the FA-9520.
Dolby DEC OUT: Output signal from the
Dolby decoder
CH SEL CH 1 CH 1-8
Selects a channel to which to assign a signal.
ASSIGN
EMB1
CH1
*2
When DIRECT IN SEL is selected:
EMB1 CH1 - 16
EMB2 CH1 - 16
AES CH1 - 8
ANALOG CH1 - 4
DOWNMIX1-L
DOWNMIX1-R
DOWNMIX2-L
DOWNMIX2-R
500Hz TONE
1KHz TONE
SILENCE
LOUD1A -
LOUD2A -
LOUD1B -
LOUD2B -
*3
*3
*4
*4
L
R
C
LFE
Ls
Rs
When INPUT is set to DIRECT IN SEL:
EMB1 CH1 - 16: FS1 embedded audio signals.
EMB2 CH1 - 16: FS2 embedded audio signals.
AES CH1 – 8: AES audio signals
ANALOG CH1 – 4: Analog audio signals
DOWNMIX-L/R: Down mixed signal generated from SOURCE channel signals.
500Hz/1KHz TONE: Test signal (TONE)
SILENCE: Mute signal
LOUD1, 2A, B-L-Rs: Loudness controlled signal
When INPUT is set to Dolby DEC OUT:
Dolby DEC1-8: PCM signal output from the Dolby decoder
DolbyDM-L/R: Down mixed signal generated from Dolby-decoded PCM signal
500Hz/1KHz TONE: Test signal (TONE)
SILENCE: Mute signal
When Dolby DEC OUT is selected:
Dolby DEC 1-8
DolbyDM-L
DolbyDM-R
500Hz TONE
1KHz TONE
SILENCE
*1 DIRECT IN SEL and Dolby DEC OUT settings are retained until changed. When an INPUT setting, DIRECT IN SEL or Dolby DEC OUT, is changed, CH1-8 signal assignments will be changed to that of the INPUT selection. DIRECT IN SEL and Dolby DEC OUT signals cannot be input to the Dolby encoder together. Dolby Digital signal output from the Dolby decoder, Dolby DEC OUT, cannot be encoded to the Dolby E signal.
*2 EMB1 channels corresponding to CH1-8 will be the default value.
(CH1: EMB 1 CH1/2 - CH8: EMB1 CH15/16)
If INPUT is set to Dolby DEC OUT, the settings will be; CH1: Dolby DEC 1 - CH8: Dolby
DEC 8.
*3 Shown if the FA-95ALA is installed in slot A.
*4 Shown if the FA-95ALA is installed in slot B.
129
6-10-1-7. Dolby ENCODER SETTING
This menu is displayed only if FA-95DE-E option is installed in option slot A.
D o l b y E N C S E T A 1 8 7 Menu button
P R O G R A M : 5 . 1 + 2
B I T D E P T H : 2 0 b i t
F R A M E R E F : F S 1
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B chang as shown below.
D o l b y E N C S E T B 2 3 7
Parameter
PROGRAM
Default
5.1+2
Setting range
5.1+2
*1
5.1+2x1
*1
4+4
*1
4+2x2
*1
4+2+2x1
*1
4+4x1
*1
*1
4x2
3x2+2x1
*1
2x2+4x1
*1
2+6x1
*1
8x1
*1
5.1
4+2
4+2x1
3x2
2x2+2x1
2+4x1
6x1
4
2+2
2+2x1
4x1
7.1
*1
7.1 Screen
*1
Description
Selects Dolby E encoder program configuration.
See Dolby E Encoder Input Channel
Assignment table in section 13 “Dolby
Assignment Table ” for channel
assignments of respective configurations.
BIT DEPTH 20bit
20bit
16bit
Selects the bit width of the Dolby E encoder output.
FRAME REF FS1
FS1
FS2
Selects a video output to which the
Dolby E encoder output is synchronized. (FS 1 or FS 2)
*2
*1 If BIT DEPTH is set to 16bit, the “＊“ will be displayed and the program functions as 5.1. To select these configurations, set BIT DEPTH to 20bit.
*2 See section 5-7 “VIDEO OUT SELECT (OUT SEL)” for details on FS1 and FS2 settings.
130
6-10-1-8. METADATA INPUT
This menu is displayed only if FA-95DE-E option is installed in option slot A.
M E T A D A T A I N P U T A 1 8 8
Menu button
S E L E C T : I N T E R N A L
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
Menu names and menu pages for the option in slot B chang as shown below.
M E T A D A T A I N P U T B 2 3 8
Parameter Default
SELECT INTERNAL
Setting range
INTERNAL
Dolby DEC OUT
Description
Selects a metadata to be used for Dolby E encoding.
INTERNAL: Uses the program configuration and bit depth selected in the
6-9-7 Dolby ENCODER SETTING menu.
Other metadata will be reset to default.
Dolby DEC OUT: Uses the metadata of the
Dolby E signal input to the Dolby decoder.
The program configuration and bit depth
selected in the 6-10-1-7 Dolby ENCODER
131
6-10-2. Automatic Loudness Adjustment (FA-95ALA)
Automatic Loudness Adjustment is the function that measures and automatically adjusts the input audio signal loudness level to the target level. The FA-95ALA in one option slot can measure and adjust the loudnes level of 2 signals (monaural, stereo, or 5.1 ch selectable) simultaneously. The following menus allow you to set the loudness measurement and
adjustment parameters. See section 6-5 AUDIO MAPPING (MAPPING) for details on the
output assignments of the adjusted signals to SDI, AES or analog audio output.
* Available only if the FA-95ALA option is installed.
6-10-2-1. LOUDNESS MEASUREMENT
∙ When installed in option slot A (Channel -1)
L O U D M E A S U R E 1 A 2 1 1
M O M E N T S H O R T L O N G
I : - 2 0 . 0 - 2 0 . 0 - 2 0 . 0
O : - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
F 3 > S T R F 4 > C L 0 : 0 0 : 0 3
Menu button
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
Menu names and menu pages for the second channel of the FA-95ALA in option slot A, and the first and second channels of the FA-95ALA in option slot B change as shown below.
∙ Channel -2 of the FA-95ALA in option slot A
L O U D M E A S U R E 2 A 2 2 1
∙ Channel -1 of the FA-95ALA in option slot A
L O U D M E A S U R E 1 B 2 6 1
∙ Chabnnel -2 of the FA-95ALA in option slot B
L O U D M E A S U R E 2 B 2 7 1
Parameter
I
(INPUT)
Default
-
Setting range
-
Description
Displays the measured loudness level of the
FA-95ALA input audio signal in LKFS. See
section 6-10-2-4. LOUDNESS CHANNEL
ASSIGNMENT for details on input settings.
*1
MOMENT: Momentary loudness level
SHORT: Short-term loudness level
LONG: Long-term loudness level
O
(OUTPUT)
F3>
-
STR
-
STR (START)
STP (STOP)
Displays the loudness level of the audio signal adjusted by the FA-95ALA in LKFS.
Displays “-----“ if the adjustment is disabled. *1
MOMENT: Momentary loudness level
SHORT: Short-term loudness level
LONG: Long-term loudness level
Pressing the F3 control knob starts loudness measurement and adjustment. Press again to stop. Pressing the F3 control knob alternates the menu display between STR and STP.
*2
STR: Starts measuring and adjusting.
STP: Stops measuring and adjusting.
Once the measurement and adjustment starts, the elapsed time will be displayed.
F4> CL -
Pressing the F4 control knob clears all measured loudness levels and the elapsed time display.
*1 Displays “NA” for no input signal. All values measured as over 0.0 LKFS will be displayed as “0.0”.
IMPORTANT
Measurement and adjustment can be performed for up to 6:59:59 (6 hr 59 min 59 sec).
If measurement continues for the maximum duration, the elapsed time display restarts from 0:00:00.
132
6-10-2-2. LOUDNESS CONTROL ENABLE
∙ When installed in option slot A (Channel -1)
L O U D C T R L E N A 1 A 2 1 2
C O N T R O L : O F F
R E S P O N S E S : N O R M A L
R E S P O N S E F : N O R M A L
Menu button
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
Menu names and menu pages for the second channel of the FA-95ALA in option slot A, and the first and second channels of the FA-95ALA in option slot B change as shown below.
∙ Channel -2 of the FA-95ALA in option slot A
L O U D C T R L E N A 2 A 2 2 2
∙ Channel -1 of the FA-95ALA in option slot A
L O U D C T R L E N A 1 B 2 6 2
∙ Channel -2 of the FA-95ALA in option slot A
L O U D C T R L E N A 2 B 2 7 2
Parameter
CONTROL
RESPONSE S
RESPONSE F
Default
OFF
NORMAL
NORMAL
Setting range
OFF
ON
NA
-4, -3, -2, -1
NORMAL
+1, +2, +3, +4
NA
-4, -3, -2, -1
NORMAL
+1, +2, +3, +4
Description
Allows you to turn On or Off the Loudness
Level Adjustment feature.
Set to Off to measure loudness, but not to adjust.
The setting can be changed only when loudness is not being measured.
While measuring the loudness level,
“OFF(LOCK)” or “ON(LOCK)” is displayed, and the setting cannot be changed.
Allows you to select the loudness level adjustment speed (SLOW) to achieve the target level for long-term loudness level adjustment, allowing gradual leveling.
The larger the value, the faster the response allowing greater adjustment.
NA: Disables the SLOW adjustment function.
Allows you to select the loudness level adjustment speed (FAST) to achieve the target level for instantaneous loudness level adjustment, allowing sudden leveling (leveling down only).
The larger the value, the faster the response allowing greater adjustment.
NA: Disables the FAST adjustment function.
IMPORTANT
Set RESPONSE according to the input signal. Larger values under both RESPONSE settings are recommended for materials with dynamic loudness level ranges. Smaller values under both settings are recommended for materials for which only minimum leveling is preferred, such as music materials.
133
6-10-2-3. LOUDNESS CONTROL SETTINGS
∙ When installed in option slot A (Channel -1)
L O U D C T R L S E T 1 A 2 1 3
T A R G E T : - 2 4 . 0 + 0 . 0 L U
M I N G A I N : - 2 0 . 0 d B
M A X G A I N : 0 . 0 d B
Menu button
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
Menu names and menu pages for the second channel of the FA-95ALA in option slot A, and the first and second channels of the FA-95ALA in option slot B change as shown below.
∙ Channel -2 of the FA-95ALA in option slot A
L O U D C T R L S E T 2 A 2 2 3
∙ Channel -1 of the FA-95ALA in option slot B
L O U D C T R L S E T 1 B 2 6 3
∙ Channel -2 of the FA-95ALA in option slot B
L O U D C T R L S E T 2 B 2 7 3
Parameter
TARGET
MIN GAIN
MAX GAIN
Default
+0.0 LU
-20.0 dB
0.0 dB
Setting range
-2.0 to +2.0 LU
(0.1 LU)
-20.0 to 0.0 dB
(1.0 dB)
0.0 to +5.0 dB
(1.0 dB)
Description
Allows you to set the target loudness level.
The target level specified by the standard that is
selected under the LOUDNESS STANDARD menu
(sec. 6-10-2-5) is displayed to the left.
Allows you to set the minimum gain (lower threshold) to limit attenuation.
Allows you to set the maximum gain (upper threshold) to limit magnification.
134
6-10-2-4. LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT
∙ When installed in option slot A (Channel -1)
L O U D C H A S G N 1 A 2 1 4
M O D E : S T E R E O
L : E M B 1 C H 1
R : E M B 1 C H 2
C : I N V A L I D
L O U D C H A S G N 1 A 2 1 5
L F E : I N V A L I D
L s : I N V A L I D
R s : I N V A L I D
∙ When installed in option slot A (Channel -2)
L O U D C H A S G N 2 A 2 2 4
M O D E : S T E R E O
L : E M B 2 C H 1
R : E M B 2 C H 2
C : I N V A L I D
L O U D C H A S G N 2 A
L F E : I N V A L I D
L s : I N V A L I D
R s : I N V A L I D
2 2 5
Menu button
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
Menu names and menu pages for the FA-95ALA in option slot B change as shown below.
∙ When installed in option slot A (Channel -1)
L O U D C H A S G N 1 B 2 6 4
L O U D C H A S G N 1 B 2 6 5
∙ When installed in option slot A (Channel -2)
L O U D C H A S G N 2 B 2 7 4
L O U D C H A S G N 2 B 2 7 5
Parameter
MODE
Default
STEREO
Setting range
MONAURAL
*3
STEREO
5.1 CH
Description
Allows you to specify the audio mode of the audio signal loudness level to be measured and adjusted.
L (CH)
R (CH)
C (CH)
LFE (CH)
Ls (CH)
Rs (CH)
*2
EMB1/2 CH1
EMB1/2 CH2
INVALID
(EMB1/2 CH3)
INVALID
(EMB1/2 CH4)
INVALID
(EMB1/2 CH5)
INVALID
(EMB1/2 CH6)
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
EMB1 CH 1-16
EMB2 CH 1-16
AES CH 1-8
ANALOG CH 1-4
DOWNMIX1-L, R
DOWNMIX2-L, R
Dolby DECA-1-8
Dolby DMA-L, R
Dolby DECB-1-8
Dolby DMB-L, R
*4
*4
*5
*5
Allows you to select an audio channel of which loudness level to be measured and adjusted.
EMB1: FS1 IN input audio channels
EMB2: FS2 IN input audio channels
AES: AES input audio channels
ANALOG: Input analog audio channels
DOWNMIX: Internally generated downmixed audio channels
(See sec. 6-7. 6-8. DOWNMIX1, 2
SET)
Dolby DEC: Dolby decoder output audio channels
(See sec. 6-10-1.FA-95D-D,
FA-95DE-E.)
Dolby DM: Dolby decoder downmixed output audio channels
(See sec. 6-10-1.FA-95D-D,
FA-95DE-E.)
Invalid channels due to their Mode settings will be indicated as “INVALID”.
*1 Default values of Channel-1 are “EMB1 CH1-6”, and Channel-2 are “EMB2 CH9-14”.
*2 The LFE channel is not subject to measurement, but to adjustment.
*3 *3 If MODE is set to MONAURAL, the output signal for LOUD 1/2 R selected in the SDI, AES or Analog REMAPPING menu will be the same as that for LOUD 1/2-L.
*4 Shown if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E is installed in option slot A.
*5 Shown if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E is installed in option slot B.
135
6-10-2-5. LOUDNESS STANDARD
Settings in this menu are common for the FA-95ALA in option slot A (channels 1 and 2) and in option slot B (channels 1 and 2).
L O U D S T A N D A R D 2 8 0
S T A N D A R D : A R I B
T A R G E T L V L : - 2 4 . 0 L K F S
M O M E N T A R Y : 4 0 0 m s e c
S H O R T T E R M : 3 0 0 0 m s e c
Parameter
STANDARD
TARGET LVL
MOMENTARY
SHORT TERM
Default Setting range
ARIB
-
-
-
ARIB
ATSC A85
EBUR128
ITU R1770
-
-
-
Description
Allows you to select the standard under which the loudness measurement and adjustment will be conducted.
ARIB: ARIB TR-B32
ATSC A85: ATSC A/85
EBU R128: EBU-R128
ITU R1770: ITU-R BS.1770
Displays the specified target level of the selected standard.
Displays the specified measurement duration
(Momentary) of the selected standard.
Displays the specified measurement duration
(Short Term) of the selected standard.
Parameter Specification of Standards used in the FA-95ALA
Parameter ARIB TR-B32 ATSC A/85 EBU-R128 ITU-R BS.1770
Target Level -24.0 LKFS -24.0 LKFS -23.0 LUFS
Momentary Average Time 400 msec 125 msec 400 msec
Short Term Average Time 3000 msec 10000 msec 3000 msec
Absolute Gating -70.0 LKFS NONE -70.0 LUFS
Relative Gating
Overlap Size
-10 LU
75%
NONE
0%
-10 LU
75%
-24.0 LKFS
400 msec
3000 msec
-70.0 LKFS
-10 LU
75%
136
6-11. AUDIO SYSTEM Settings (AUDIO SYS)
Allows you to set basic settings on the audio system.
6-11-1. FADE IN / OUT
F A D E I N / O U T
F A D E M O D E : D I S A B L E
F A D E T I M E : 1 2 m s e c
2 8 1
Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
Input signal
Internal
Process
Audio delay Muting 12 msec (24 msec)
IMPORTANT
FADE IN/OUT may not function properly for the switching between AES input signals whose sampling rates are different, or that are asynchronous.
Parameter Default Setting range Description
FADE MODE DISABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
DISABLE: Always outputs input audio signals without adding any effect such as Fade or Mute.
ENABLE: Sets an audio to mute with fade out if an audio error is detected, and make it fade in when recovered.
*1
FADE TIME 12 msec
12 msec
24 msec
Sets the duration for FADE IN and
OUT transitions.
*1 To use this function, the audio delay must be set longer than the sum of the FADE TIME and error detection time (2 msec).
Ex.) If FADE TIME is set to 12 msec, the audio delay must be longer than 14 msec; i.e. 12+
2 msec (error detection time).
Error detection Return to normal
137
6-11-2. DIGITAL AUDIO
D I G I T A L A U D I O
R E F L E V E L : - 2 0 d B F S
2 8 2
G R A D E : P R O F E S S I O N A L
R E S O L U T I O N : 2 4 b i t
Parameter
REF LEVEL
GRADE
RESOLUTION
Default
-20dBFS
PROFESSIONAL
PROFESSIONAL
CONSUMER
24bit
Setting range
-18dBFS
-20dBFS
-24dBFS
24bit,
20bit,
16bit
Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
Description
Selects the reference level for digital audio signals.
See section 11-2 “Digital Output
Level Relative to the Analog Input
Selects an audio application for
AES and SDI AUDIO outputs.
PROFESSIONAL: Optimized for professional use.
CONSUMER: Optimized for consumer use.
Selects an audio word length for
AES and SDI AUDIO outputs.
6-11-3. AUDIO ERR SENSE
A U D I O E R R S E N S E 2 8 3
C H S E L : F S - 1 / 2
C H S T A T U S : S R C B Y P A S S
V A L I D I T Y : S R C B Y P A S S
Parameter
CH SEL
CH STATUS
Default
FS1-1/2
SRC
BYPASS
Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
Setting range
FS1-1/2 – FS1-15/16
FS2-1/2 – FS2-15/16
AES 1/2 - AES 7/8
Description
Selects a stereo channel pair for which to enable Audio Error SENSE.
SRC BYPASS
PCM
MUTE
Selects audio error sensor mode for each stereo channel pair of SDI and AES input audio signals whose NON-PCM channel status flag is 1.
*1
SRC BYPASS: Treats audio signals as
NON-PCM. By-passes audio signals through SRC
*2
, and selects audio clock input in the NON-PCM signal channel for
SDI AUDIO CLOCK.
*3
PCM: Treats audio signals as PCM
(standard audio signal). By-passes audio signals through SRC
*2
, and selects
REFERENCE for SDI AUDIO CLOCK.
*3
MUTE: Treats audio signals as mute signals.
138
Parameter Default Setting range Description
VALIDITY
SRC
BYPASS
CORRECTION NORMAL
SRC BYPASS
PCM
MUTE
DISABLE
NORMAL
SENSITIVE
Selects audio error sensor mode for each stereo channel pair of SDI and AES input audio signals whose channel status
Validity Bit flag is 1.
*1
SRC BYPASS: Treats audio signals as
NON-PCM. By-passes audio signals through SRC
*2
, and selects audio clock input in the NON-PCM signal channel for
SDI AUDIO CLOCK.
*3
PCM: Treats audio signals as PCM
(standard audio signal). By-passes audio signals through SRC
*2
, and selects
REFERENCE for SDI AUDIO CLOCK.
*3
MUTE: Treats audio signals as mute signals.
FA-9520 can fade
*4
and mute audio when it detects a change in the audio status due to, e.g., signal switchover. This parameter allows you to select whether to detect changes and how sensitive detection should be to such changes.
DISABLE: Disables mute function when change in audio status is detected.
Normally not selected.
NORMAL: Mutes when a change on an
SDI signal, ADP (Audio Data Packet), or
DBN (Data Block Number) is detected.
Normally selected.
SENSITIVE: Mutes when a change on channel status, or EDP (Extended Data
Packet) presence (only for SD-SDI), as well as the above items, is detected.
*1 Channel status and audio channel (input) Validity Bit can be checked using a wave form monitor.
*2 Processes audio signals as described if SRC MODE in 6-9-1
“EMB1 SRC MODE”, 6-9-2 “EMB2 SRC
”, and 6-9-3 “AES SRC MODE” is set to AUTO.
*3 Processes audio signals as described if EMB1 OUT CLOCK in section 6-1-4 is set to AUTO.
*4 Fade function depends on the FADE MODE setting in the 6-11-1 FADE IN / OUT menu.
CH STATUS
The FA-9520 determins whether the input audio signal is PCM or not from the NON-PCM flag carried in the Audio Channel Status (ACS). If ACS is incorrect it may lead to improper processing. This setting may effective processing such audio signals with incorrect ACS properly.
VALIDITY
The FA-9520 determines whether the input audio signal is PCM or not using Validity Bits (V
Bit) in audio signal. If Validity Bit (V Bit) is incorrect the audio signal may cause improper processing. This setting may effective processing such audio signals with incorrect Validy Bits properly.
IMPORTANT
Please use these settings only if there is audio noise or the audio is muted. Otherwise, do not change the default setting.
CORRECTION
Normally set to NORMAL. Set to DISABLE for a specific program or duration when audio output has noise or is muted.
The FA-9520 fades out audio or resets the delay circuit when a status change (SDI signal input interruption, signal switchover (by a router, etc.) is detected. Faulty ancillary data in normal audio signals may also be detected as status changes.
139
Audio signals with such faulty ancillary data may lead the FA-9520 ’s automatic correction to improperly process the audio input and produce noise or mute the audio.
Note that disableing the automatic correction can prevent such improper processing, however, the following functions will also be disabled.
- After a signal switchover by router or the recovery of an interrupted SDI signal, delay settings will lose their accuracy to within 1.3 msec max. Audio signal phases among audio groups will not match.
Perform either of the following operations when setting CORRECTION to DISABLE, or changing the setting from DISABLE to NORMAL.
(a) Change the 6-1-3. “EMB1 IN SET ALIGNMENT setting from DISABLE to ENABLE.
(b) Disconnect and reinput the SDI input signal.
These operations reset the audio circuit and minimize the delay differences and group audio phase differences. Output audio signals will be muted while performing the operations.
6-11-4. DIGITAL SILENCE
D I G I T A L S I L E N C E 2 8 4
S I L E N C E T I M E : 2 s e c
S I L E N C E L V L : - 7 2 d B F S
Menu button
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
Parameter
SILENCE TIME
Default
2sec
Setting range
1 - 10sec
Description
Sets the duration to determine the SDI embedded audio and
AES input signals are silent. The audio status display appears as
Silence after the set duration.
*1
SILENCE LVL -72dBFS
-72dBFS
-66dBFS
-60dBFS
-54dBFS
-48dBFS
Sets the audio level to determine the SDI embedded audio and
AES input signals are silent.
*1
*1 According to this setting, the audio status is displayed in the EMB 1 IN AUDIO (5-10-10),
EMB 2 IN AUDIO (5-10-11), and AES IN AUDIO menus (5-10-12).
140
7. Other Settings & Information (OTHER)
Allows you to set other settings other than video and audio settings.
Also, information on the various versions and installation states of FA-9520 option items can be viewed.
7-1. FS1/FS2 COPY
F S 1 / F S 2 C O P Y
M O D E : C O P Y F S 1 - F S 2
F 2 U N I T Y C O P Y S T A R T
2 9 1
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter Default Setting range Description
MODE COPY FS1->FS2
COPY FS1->FS2
COPY FS2->FS1
COPY FS1<->FS2
Allows you to copy settings between
FS1 and FS2. Select a mode and press the F2 UNITY button to copy.
COPY FS1->FS2: Copies FS1 settings to FS2. (FS1 and FS2 settings will become the same.)
COPY FS2->FS1: Copies FS2 settings to FS1. (FS1 and FS2 settings will become the same.)
COPY FS1<->FS2: Copies FS1 settings to FS2 and FS2 settings to
FS1. (Exchanged)
Refer to the “Menus of Which Settings are Copied” for the settings that will be copied.
* This menu cannot be accessed from the FA-95RU.
NOTE
It is better to save settings to an event memory before copying. Doing so enables you to recall the settings, in case the copying fails.
See section 8. “Event Memory” for details on Event memory.
Copy Settings Menus
Menu button
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
CC
AES AUDIO
VIDEO menus (Lit green)
VIDEO PROC AMP
GAMMA LEVEL,
COLOR CORRECT
CONV1
ANALOG
AVO *2
MAPPING
CLIP
DELAY
IN SEL
DOWN MIX
OUT SEL
MODE
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
WHITE LEVEL,
BLACK LEVEL,
U/D MODE,
SIZE/POS SET,
CROPPING,
AVO SETTING,
USER1-5 LEVEL SET,
YPbPr/RGB CLIP,
VIDEO INPUT SET,
ANC DETECT LINE,
ANC DATA EMBED,
LOGO SEL,
VIDEO IMPROVE,
SIDE RGB
USER1-2 AREA SET,
AVO SETUP
COMPOSITE CLIP
ANC DETECT SEL
ANC EMBED LINE
KEYER SET
VIDEO SYS
AUDIO SYS
FS MODE SET HD PHASE
SET,
SD PHASE SET,
VIDEO POSITION,
FREEZE SET,
ANC SET,
ANC LOSS SET,
WSS AFD ERROR,
AUDIO GRP,
TEST SIGNAL,
SD LINE MASK
141
7-2. MU OPERATION
M U O P E R A T I O N
M O D E : F A - 9 5 2 0
2 9 2
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter Default Setting range Description
MODE FA-9520
FA-9520
FA-9500
Allows you to select an FA-9520 operation mode.
FA-9500:
Mode in which the unit operates the same as the former FA-9500. Suitable for simultaneous outputs.
FA-9520:
Independent 2-channel frame synchronizers can be used.
A WAIT 5sec AND REBOOT message appears when the operation mode is changed. In such case, wait at least 5 seconds, then reboot the
FA-9520. The FA-9520 can be used in the selected operation mode after the restart.
Make sure that the MU OPERATION menu is open when rebooting the unit.
Rebooting while another menu is open does not implement the operation mode change.
* This menu cannot be accessed from the FA-95RU.
7-2-1. Important Note on Changing the Operation Mode
Be sure to follow the procedure described in section 7-2-2 “FA-9520 Operation Mode Change
Procedure ”, if you wish to change the FA-9520 operation mode to ensure proper
performance.
7-2-2. FA-9520 Operation Mode Change Procedure
1. Be sure to close all Web browser connections with the FA-9520.
2. If you are using remote control interfaces such as an SNMP manager to manage the
FA-9520, disconnect the interface.
3. Change the MODE (change FA-9520/FA9500 selection) setting. Wait for more than 5 seconds, then reboot the unit.
4. Make sure the “MU OPERATION” menu is displayed when rebooting the unit.
(The operation mode cannot be changed by rebooting the unit if the menu is diplaying one that is different from the “MU OPERATION” menu.)
5．To control the FA-9520 via remote control interfaces such as an SNMP manager, be sure to download the MIB file for the correct operation mode.
See section 9-1 “Connecting via a WEB Browser” for details on WEB Browsers.
See section 9-6-3 “Downloading a MIB File” for details on downloading the MIB
file for FA-9520 mode. See the FA-9500 mode Operation Manual for details on downloading an MIB file for FA-9500 mode.
142
7-3. CONTROL SETTING
C O N T R O L S E T T I N G
C O N T R O L : L O C A L
2 9 3 Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter Default Setting range Description
CONTROL LOCAL
LOCAL
REMOTE
LOCAL: Disables control from FA-95RU.
(Front panel REMOTE LED is unlit.)
REMOTE: Enables control from FA-95RU.
(Front panel REMOTE LED is lit.)
* This menu cannot be accessed from the FA-95RU.
7-4. FRONT OPERATION
F R O N T O P E R A T I O N
M O D E : N O R M A L
2 9 4
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
MODE
Default
NORMAL
Setting range
NORMAL
LIVE SAFE
Description
Allows you to select a front panel operation mode.
NORMAL: Changes made by control knobs F1 to F4 will be applied immediately to the unit.
LIVE SAFE: Requires confirmation before control knob changes are applied. *
* Whenever a change is made by control knobs F1 to F4, the single-arrow buttons (up and down) and the LED around the control knob of the changed parameter blink confirming the change. Pressing the single down arrow button confirms the change and the control knob
LED lights. Pressing the single up arrow button cancels the change and everything reverts to
the previous state. Refer to section 4. “Front Panel Operation” for details.
* The FRONT OPERATION menu in the FA-95RU allows you to select a front panel operation mode for the FA-95RU.
7-5. FRONT PANEL SET
F R O N T P A N E L S E T
V F D B R I G H T : 5 0
V F D A U T O O F F : 5 m i n
L E D B R I G H T : L E V E L 4
B U Z Z E R : E N A B L E
2 9 5
Parameter
VFD BRIGHT
VFD AUTO OFF
LED BRIGHT
Default
50
DISABLE
LEVEL4
Setting range
10 - 50
DISABLE
5min
10min
30 min
LEVEL1 - 8
BUZZER ENABLE
DISABLE
ENABLE
* This menu cannot be accessed from the FA-95RU.
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Description
Sets brightness of the menu display.
10 - 50: dark to bright
Sets the idle time before turning off the menu display.
DISABLE: Does not turn off the menu display.
Sets the brightness of all LED indicators on the front panel.
LEVEL1 – 8: dark to bright
DISABLE: Disable buzzer
ENABLE: Enable buzzer
143
7-6. GPI SETTING
G P I S E T T I N G
G P I 1 - 7 S E L : G P I 1
I N / O U T S E L : I N P U T
A S S I G N : N O N E
2 9 6
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
GPI1-7 SEL
IN/OUT SEL
*1
Default
GPI1
INPUT
Setting range
GPI1-7
INPUT
OUTPUT
Description
Selects a GPI pin of the
REMOTE port.
Selects whether to use the
GPI pin that is selected under GPI1-7 SEL for input or tally output.
ASSIGN NONE
In case IN/OUT SEL is set to INPUT
*2
NONE
DEFAULT EVENT1 - 100
BY-PASS
(SDI1)
(SDI2)
(VBS)
FS1/FS2
FREEZE
FULL CB
75% CB
SMPTE CB
RAMP
SDI1
SDI2
OP A
*4
OP B
*5
COMPOSITE
KEYER
LOAD 1-7
*7
EXT AUDIO
DEFAULT EVENT1~100
LOUD1
LOUD2
A START
*8
*9
B START
A CLEAR
B CLEAR
*8
*9
BY-PASS (OP A)
*4
BY-PASS (OP B)
*5
Assigns a function to the
GPI pin that is selected under GPI1-7 SEL according to the selection under IN/OUT SEL.
In case IN/OUT SEL is set to OUTPUT
NONE
REF IN
FAN ALARM
DC POWER1
*6
DC POWER2
*6
FS1/FS2
LOUD 1
LOUD 2
FREEZE
VIDEO IN
SDI1
SDI2
OP A
OP B
*4
*5
COMPOSITE
KEYER
A CTRL
*8
B CTRL
*9
LOGO ID 1 - 7 1 - 256
Selects a logo ID for the selected FS1 LOAD 1 - 7, or
FS2 LOAD 1 – 7.
*1 Whenever the IN/OUT SEL setting is changed, ASSIGN is reset to NONE. Reset ASSIGN.
*2 The input functions consist of pulse mode and level mode functions. See the following “◆INPUT
FUNCTION
” for details.
*3 Details of the output functions are shown in the
“◆OUTPUT FUNCTION” on the next page.
Power 1 and 2 are selectable if the FA-95PS option is installed.
144
*4 Effective if the FA-95AIO option is installed in option slot A.
*5 Effective if the FA-95AIO option is installed in option slot B.
*6 Shown if the FA-95PS option is installed.
*7 FS1 LOGOs 1 - 7, and FS2 LOGOs 1
– 7 will be displayed, if selected, as “LOGO ID: 1”. Logo ID can be assigned to any number 1 through 256. In the following cases, the logo will not be inserted to the FS output signals, although data will be loaded to the FA-9520.
- No logo is registered under the selected Logo ID.
- The registered logo format and converter output video format do not match.
- The keyer of the relevant FS is turned off.
*8 Shown if the FA-95ALA option is installed in option slot A.
*9 Shown if the FA-95ALA option is installed in option slot B.
INPUT FUNCTION
Function
NONE
BY-PASS (SDI1)
BY-PASS (SDI2)
BY-PASS (VBS)
*1
*1
*1
FS1/FS2 75% CB
FS1/FS2 FREEZE
FS1/FS2 FULL CB
*2
FS1/FS2 SMPTE CB
FS1/FS2 RAMP
FS1/FS2 AUDIO
EXT AUDIO
Mode
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Level
Description
No function
Sets BY-PASS ON/OFF for SDI IN 1 to SDI OUT 1.
Shorted to GND: BY-PASS ON
OPEN: BY-PASS OFF
Sets BY-PASS ON/OFF for SDI IN 2 to SDI OUT 3.
Shorted to GND: BY-PASS ON
OPEN: BY-PASS OFF
Sets BY-PASS ON/OFF for COMPOSITE IN to
COMPOSITE OUT.
Shorted to GND: BY-PASS ON
OPEN: BY-PASS OFF
Sets FREEZE ON/OFF for each FS.
Shorted to GND: FREEZE ON
OPEN: FREEZE OFF
Selects FULL CB (color bar) for the test signal for each FS.
Shorted to GND: FULL CB ON
OPEN: FULL CB OFF
Selects 75% CB for the test signal for each FS.
Shorted to GND: 75% CB ON
OPEN: 75% CB OFF
Selects SMPTE CB for the test signal for each FS.
Shorted to GND: SMPTE CB ON
OPEN: SMPTE CB OFF
Selects RAMP for the test signal for each FS.
Shorted to GND: RAMP ON
OPEN: RAMP OFF
Sets AUDIO test signal ON for each FS.
Shorted to GND: AUDIO test signal ON
OPEN: AUDIO test signal OFF
Sets AES and ANALOG AUDIO test signals ON
Shorted to GND: AUDIO test signal ON
OPEN: AUDIO test signal OFF
FS1/FS2 SDI1, 2
FS1/FS2 COMPOSITE
*3
FS1/FS2 OP A
FS1/FS2 OP B
*4
DEFAULT
*5
EVENT 1 – 100 *5
Pulse
Pulse
Selects an input video signal for each FS. Switches over to the selected input signal when shorted to GND.
FS1/FS2 KEYER
FS1/FS2 LOAD 1-7
LOUD1, 2A START
LOUD1, 2B START
LOUD1, 2A CLEAR
LOUD1, 2B CLEAR
*6
*7
*6
*7
Level
Pulse
Level
Pulse
Loads the DEFAULT, and events 1 through 100.
When shorted to GND, the assigned settings (among default and events) will be loaded.
Sets the keyer ON/OFF for each FS.
Shorted to GND: Keyer ON
OPEN: Keyer OFF
Loads the logo assigned to a LOGO ID to the selected FS.
FS1/2 LOAD 1 - LOAD 7 are assigned to LOGO IDs.
Starts or Stops respective LOUDNESS measurements.
Shorted to GND: Starts LOUDNESS measurement
OPEN: Stops LOUDNESS measurement
Clears respective LOUDNESS measurements.
Shorted to GND: Clears LOUDNESS measurement.
145
BY-PASS(OP A)
*1*3
BY-PASS(OP B)
*1*4
Level
Sets BY-PASS ON/OFF for FA-95AIO I/O in slots A&B.
Shorted to GND: BY-PASS ON
OPEN: BY-PASS OFF
*1 The BY-PASS that is displayed as disabled in the BY-PASS SETTING menu (sec. 5-9-11) will not turn
on by setting the above to ON. In such case, the menu will be displayed as “＊BYPASS(SDI1)”. To
enable the BY-PASS, change associated settings in FS INPUT SELECT ( sec. 5-6-1) and OUTPUT
*2 Although FREEZE is set to ON, the freeze function is disabled if SYNCHRO in section 5-9-1
SET ” is set to LINE, or AVDL. In such case, the menu will be displayed as “＊FREEZE”. To enable
FREEZE for INPUT FUNCTION, be sure to set SYNCHRO to FRAME.
*3 Shown only if FA-95AIO option is installed in option slot A
*4 Shown only if FA-95AIO option is installed in option slot B
*5 Event loading will load all settings.
*6 Shown only if FA-95ALA option is installed in option slot A
*7 Shown only if FA-95ALA option is installed in option slot B.
NOTE
See section 14 “REMOTE” for details on pulse and level durations.
OUTPUT FUNCTION
Function
NONE No function
FS1/FS2 FREEZE
FS1/FS2 VIDEO IN
AUDIO IN
REF IN
Description
FS1/FS2 FREEZE ON:
FS1/FS2 FREEZE OFF:
Signal present in FS1/FS2:
No signal present in FS1/FS2:
Signal present:
No signal present:
Signal present:
No signal present:
FAN ALARM
DC POWER 1
DC POWER 2
*1
FS1/FS2 SDI1
*2
*2
Low
High (Open Collector)
Low
High (Open Collector)
Low
High (Open Collector)
Low
High (Open Collector)
FAN failed:
FAN normal:
Power 1 failure:
Power 1 normal:
Low
High (Open Collector)
Low
High (Open Collector)
Power 2 failure:
Power 2 normal:
Low
High (Open Collector)
FS1/FS2 SDI1 input signal is selected: Low
FS1/FS2 SDI1 input signal is not selected: High (Open Collector)
FS1/FS2 SDI2
FS1/FS2 COMPOSITE
FS1/FS2 OP A
FS1/FS2 OP B
*3
*4
FS1/FS2 KEYER
FS1/FS2 SDI2 input signal is selected: Low
FS1/FS2 SDI2 input signal is not selected: High (Open Collector)
FS1/FS2 COMPOSITE input signal is selected: Low
FS1/FS2 COMPOSITE input signal is not selected:
High (Open Collector)
FS1/FS2 OP A input signal is selected:
S1/FS2 OP A input signal is not selected:
Low
High (Open Collector)
S1/FS2 OP B input signal is selected: Low
S1/FS2 OP B input signal is not selected: High (Open Collector)
FS1/FS2 KEYER is enabled:
FS1/FS2 KEYER is disabled:
Low
High (Open Collector)
LOUD1, 2A CTRL
*5
LOUD1, 2B CTRL
*6
Each LOUDNESS CONTROL is set to ON
(LOUDNESS measurement is active):
Each LOUDNESS CONTROL is set to OFF
(LOUDNESS measurement is inactive):
*1 FAN ALARM goes to low (active), if either one of two fans fails.
*2 Effective if the optional FA-95PS is installed.
*3 Effective if the optional FA-95AIO is installed in option slot A.
*4 Effective if the optional FA-95AIO is installed in option slot B.
*5 Effective if the optional FA-95ALA is installed in option slot A.
*6 Effective if the optional FA-95ALA is installed in option slot B.
Low
High (Open Collector)
146
7-7. NETWORK INFO
N E T W O R K I N F O
N A M E : F A - 9 5 2 0
I P : 1 9 2 . 1 6 8 . 0 . 1 0
S U B : 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 2 5 5 . 0
G W : 0 . 0 . 0 . 0
2 9 7
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
NAME
IP
Default
FA-9520
Description
Displays the unit name.
192.168.0.10 Displays the LAN PORT1 IP address.
SUB
GW
255.255.255.0 Displays the LAN PORT1 subnet mask.
0.0.0.0 Displays the LAN PORT1 gateway.
The NETWORK INFO settings can be changed on a web browser window on a computer.
See section 9-8-2 “NETWORK SETTING” for details.
7-8. UNIT Ver.
U N I T V e r .
F P G A 1 : 0 1 . 0 0
F P G A 2 : 0 1 . 0 0
F P G A 3 : 0 1 . 0 0
S O F T : 2 . 0 0 / 8 . 0 0
2 9 8
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter Description
FPGA1 Displays the FPGA1 version information.
FPGA2 Displays the FPGA2 version information.
FPGA3 Displays the FPGA3 version information.
SOFT
Displays the FA-9520 operation mode software version information. (First 4 digits)
Displays the FA-9500 operation mode software version information. (Last 4 digits)
147
7-9. OPTION A Ver.
O P T I O N A V e r .
N A M E : N O N E
F P G A 1 : - - . - -
F P G A 2 : - - . - -
S O F T : - - . - -
2 9 9
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
NAME
FPGA1
FPGA2
SOFT
Default
-
-
-
-
Setting range
(Steps)
-
-
-
-
Description
Displays the name of the optional device that is installed in OPTION SLOT A.
Displays “NONE” if no device is installed.
Displays the FPGA1 version information in
OPTION SLOT A.
Displays “--.—“ if the version is not supported.
Displays the FPGA2 version information in
OPTION SLOT A.
Displays “--.—“ if the version is not supported.
Displays the version information of SOFT in
OPTION SLOT A.
Displays “--.—“ if the version is not supported.
Display when FA-95DACBL is installed
O P T I O N A V e r .
N A M E : F A - 9 5 D A C B L
F P G A 1 : - - . - -
F P G A 2 : - - . - -
S O F T : - - . - -
2 9 9
7-10. OPTION B Ver.
O P T I O N B V e r .
N A M E : N O N E
F P G A 1 : - - . - -
F P G A 2 : - - . - -
S O F T : - - . - -
3 0 0
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
NAME
FPGA1
FPGA2
SOFT
Default
-
-
-
-
Setting range
(Steps)
-
-
-
-
Description
Displays the name of the optional device that is installed in OPTION SLOT B.
Displays “NONE” if no device is installed.
Displays the FPGA1 version information in
OPTION SLOT B.
Displays “--.—“ if the version is not supported.
Displays the FPGA2 version information in
OPTION SLOT B.
Displays “--.—“ if the version is not supported.
Displays the version information of SOFT in
OPTION SLOT B.
Displays “--.—“ if the version is not supported.
Display when FA-95DACBL is installed
O P T I O N B V e r .
N A M E : F A - 9 5 D A C B L
F P G A 1 : - - . - -
F P G A 2 : - - . - -
S O F T : - - . - -
3 0 0
148
7-11. OTHER OPTION
O T H E R O P T I O N 3 0 1
F A - 9 5 P S : I N S T A L L E D
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
FA-95PS
Default Setting range
- -
Description
INSTALLED: FA-95PS option is installed.
NONE: FA-95PS option is not installed.
7-12. SOFT OPTION1
S O F T O P T I O N 1 3 0 2
F A - 9 5 A V O : N O N E
F A - 9 5 S C N V : I N S T A L L E D
F A - 9 5 - 3 G : N O N E
F A - 9 5 F R C : N O N E
S O F T O P T I O N 2
F A - 9 5 L G : N O N E
F A - 9 5 C O : I N S T A L L E D
3 0 3
Parameter
FA-95LG
FA-95CO
Default Setting range
-
-
-
-
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Parameter
FA-95AVO *
FA-95SCNV
FA-95-3G
Default Setting range
-
-
-
-
-
-
Description
INSTALLED: FA-95AVO is installed.
NONE: FA-95AVO is not installed.
INSTALLED: FA-95SCNV option is installed.
NONE: FA-95SCNV option is not installed.
INSTALLED: FA-95-3G option is installed.
NONE: FA-95-3G option is not installed.
FA-95FRC - -
INSTALLED: FA-95FRC option is installed.
NONE: FA-95FRC option is not installed.
* FA-95AVO comes standard (optional in Japan).
* FA-953G comes standard (optional in Japan).
7-13. SOFT OPTION2
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
Description
INSTALLED: Logo Generator is installed.
NONE: Logo Generator is not installed.
INSTALLED: FA-95CO option is installed.
NONE: FA-95CO option is not installed.
149
8. Event Memory
The FA-9520 can store 100 event memories, as well as sets of settings, each of which are stored for each format.
Every press of the EVENT button alternates the menus: EVENT LOAD (lit green), EVENT SAVE (lit red)，and EVENT SETUP(lit orange). To go to the desired page, press the EVENT button a few times, or press the EVENT button once and the up or down single arrow button to move between
EVENT pages.
8-1. EVENT LOAD
E V E N T L O A D
N O . : V I D E O F O R M A T
L O A D S T A R T F 2 U N I T Y
F O R M A T : 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 i
3 1 1
Menu button
EVENT
Parameter
NO.
Default Setting range
DEFAULT
*1
EVENT1 -
EVENT100
Selects the number of an event you want to load.
Description
MODE LOAD ALL
LOAD ALL
LOAD FS1 ONLY
*2
LOAD FS2 ONLY
*2
Selects the event loading mode.
LOAD ALL: Loads all setting data stored in events.
LOAD FS1 ONLY: Loads only FS1 setting data stored in events.
LOAD FS2 ONLY: Loads only FS2 setting data stored in events.
LOAD START F3
UNITY
- -
Loads the event that is selected under MODE when the F3 UNITY button is pressed.
*1 DEFAULT loads the default settings.
*2 Only the FS1 or FS2 settings that are shown with
⃝ or ⊚ in the menu list in section 4-2-2
“Menu Buttons“, and can be respectively set for FS1 and FS2. Other settings will always
be loaded regardless of the selected loading mode.
150
8-2. EVENT SAVE
E V E N T S A V E 3 1 2
N O . : E V E N T 1
L O A D S T A R T F 2 U N I T Y
F O R M A T : 1 0 8 0 / 5 9 i
Menu button
EVENT
Parameter
NO.
SAVE START
F2 UNITY
Default
EVEMT1
-
8-3. EVENT SETUP
Setting range
EVENT1 - EVENT100
E V E N T S E T U P
S T A R T : L A S T S E T T I N G
3 1 3
-
Description
Selects the number of an event you want to save.
Saves the event that is selected under NO. when the F2 UNITY button is pressed.
Menu button
EVENT
Parameter
START
Default
LAST
SETTING
Setting range
LAST SETTING
DEFAULT
EVENT1 -
EVENT100
Description
Selects an event you want to load at startup.
LAST SETTING: Loads the last settings that are used before startup.
DEFAULT: Resets all settings to the default settings at startup.
EVENT1 - 100: Loads the selected event memory among event memory settings 1 through 100.
151
8-4. Parameters That Are Not Stored in Event Memories
The following parameters are not stored in event memories.
ON/OFF settings of FREEZE in the FREEZE SET menu (5-9-5).
All settings in the EVENT SETUP menu (8-3).
All settings in the Other Settings & Information (OTHER) menu (7).
All settings in the Various Signal Status Display (STATUS) menu (5-10).
All settings in the Network Settings menu (9-8).
All settings in the LOUDNESS MEASUREMENT menu (6-10-2-1).
ON/OFF settings of CONTROL in the LOUDNESS CONTROL ENABLE menu (6-10-2-2).
8-5. Note on Event Memory Operation
Do not power off the unit while saving an event. The event may not be properly stored.
Also, the FA-9520 regularly updates the setting data. Do not turn off the unit for at least 5 seconds after changing settings. It is recommended to save important data into a backup file.
“Backup Parameter” and 9-6-4 “Event Data” for details on how to save setting
data into a backup file.
152
9. Control via WEB Browser
This section describes how to control the FA-9520 from a computer via a web browser.
“Connecting a Computer” for details on connecting with a computer.
Do not open pop-up setting dialogs at the same time. Doing so may disable operation.
9-1. Connecting via a WEB Browser
Open a web browser on your computer, and enter the address as http://192.168.0.10/ (factory default setting) in the address bar.
Press the [Enter] key to connect to the FA-9520.
The login page is displayed.
Click Login.
The authentication dialog appears.
Enter your user name and password. (The default user name and password are set at the factory.)
User name: fa9520
Password: foranetwork
Click OK. The Status page is displayed.
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5), the
Status page will be displayed without displaying the Login page or authentication dialog.
Click Logout to return to the Login page.
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5), the
Logout is not shown.
153
9-2. VIDEO Settings
Click
Click the Video tab at the top of the page. The video block diagram will be displayed.
Each block in the diagram lets you to go to the corresponding windows or dialog boxes that allow you to change various settings.
Video Block Diagram
(1) (2)
(3) (4)
(5)
(6)
(13)
(14)
(7) (8) (9) (10)
(11)
(12)
* No setting options for (9), (13) through (16).
* (13) through (16) are displayed as “FA-95AIO” if the FA-95AIO is installed.
(15)
(16)
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5), the
Logout is not shown.
154
9-2-1. FS Input Select
Clicking block (1) on the Video block diagram opens the FS Input Select dialog box.
Select setting values for parameters in the respective pull-down menus.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
FS1/FS2 Input Select
Parameter
Input (FS1)
Input (FS2)
Default
SDI1
SDI2
Setting range
SDI1
SDI2
Composite
Option Slot A
*2
Option Slot B
*3
Description
Selects an input signal.
Loss Mode
Back Color
Back Color
Off
Back Color
Auto Freeze
*1
Color Bar
Output Disable
Off
Black
Blue
Red
Magenta
Green
Cyan
Yellow
Selects an operation for the time the signal input selected under Input is lost.
Select a background color.
SD Aspect 4:3
4:3
16:9
Selects the aspect ratio for SD input signals.
This setting is used for fixed aspect ratio conversions that are performed when
ASPECT in the CONV menu is set to other than AFD (4:3), AFD-ALT (4:3), AFD (16:9),
AFD-ALT (16:9), AFD, AFD-ALT.
*1 If Synchro Mode under FS Mode in section 9-4-1
“FS1/FS2 Video System” is set to Line, AVDL, or Input
Lock, the selected Auto Freeze functions the same as Back Color. In such case, the “Auto Freeze” display will be grayed out.
*2 Selectable only if FA-95AIO option is installed in option slot A.
*3 Selectable only if FA-95AIO option is installed in option slot B.
AIO Slot A Input Mode
Parameter Default
MODE YPbPr SMPTE
Setting range
YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr BETACAM
RGB
Y/C
Description
Selects the input signal format of the
FA-95AIO in option slot A. (Not shown if no FA-95AIO is installed in option slot
A.)
AIO Slot B Input Mode
Parameter Default
MODE YPbPr SMPTE
Setting range
YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr BETACAM
RGB
Y/C
Description
Selects the input signal format of the
FA-95AIO in option slot B. (Not shown if no FA-95AIO is installed in option slot
B.)
155
<Video Loss Mode>
Video Loss Mode allows you to select what to output when the input signal selected under
Input is lost.
Back Color
Displays a screen in a color selected under Back Color.
Auto Freeze
Freezes the last image before loss of signal.
Freezes progressive signals such as 720p in frame freeze mode and other signals in field freeze mode.
Color Bar
Outputs SMPTE color bars.
Output Disable
No outputs from SDI OUT1/2, 3/4, or COMPOSITE OUT1/2.
9-2-2. Auto Video Optimizer (AVO)
Clicking block (6) on the video block diagram opens the Auto Video Optimizer dialog box.
* AVO settings are effective on FS1 video signals.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
156
AVO Control
Parameter
Mode
Default
Off
Setting range
Off
Auto
*1
Hold
*1
Description
Auto: Enables automatic level adjustment.
Hold: Stops auto level adjustment. When MODE selection is changed from AUTO to HOLD, the signal levels stop and remain as they are.
Off: Disables automatic level adjustment. When
MODE selection is changed from AUTO to Off, the signal levels return to their state before auto level adjustment is applied. When set to Off, the signal levels can be manually adjusted. See
section 9-2-7 “Color Corrector” for details.
* AVO Control Mode cannot be changed from Off when LINK setting mode is enabled in the
FA-9520 or a connected FA-95RU. To set to Auto or Hold, disable LINK setting mode. See sec.
4-2-8. “Switching Between 2-Channel Frame
Synchronizers ” for details on LINK settings.
Level
(Adjustmen t level)
Standard
Darker
Dark
Standard
Bright
Brighter
User1
User2
User3
User4
User5
Selects a type of signal level adjustment.
10 options are available: Five fixed options and five custom options.
Darker < Dark < Standard < Bright < Brighter
User1 - User5 : Customizable
Clicking Set User opens the USER1 - 5 LEVE
SET dialog box. See section9-2-2-2 “User 1 - 5
Sample
Area
Full
Screen
Full
Screen,
-
Bottom
Right
User Area1
User Area2
Sets the sample area to calculate the adjustment.
10 options are available: Eight fixed areas and tow custom areas.
<Fixed areas>
Full Screen, Letter Box, Pillar Box, Center,
Top-Left, Top-Right,
Bottom Left, Bottom Right
<Custom areas>
Clicking Set Area opens the User Area1, 2 setting dialog box.
Area
Display
(Marker display)
Off
Off
On
Sets sample area display On/Off. If set to On, the sample area appears as a semi-transparent white rectangle on all output videos. It is set to Off at startup. Also, if Mode is set to Off, Area Display is automatically set to Off.
*1 The FS1/FS2 LINKed setting will be disabled if AVO setting is changed to Auto or Hold while it is enabled.
IMPORTANT
Auto Level Adjustment will provide optimal results in many cases, but not always.
Sample Area determines the area where the data is sampled and the level adjustments are applied to whole images.
Sample Area (Fixed area)
Eight available sample areas are as shown below. Data is continuously sampled within each
“User Area 1, 2” for USERA REA 1, and 2.)
Sample area
Full Screen
Sample area
Top-Left
Sample area
Letter Box
Sample area
Sample area
Pillar Box
Top-Right
157
Sample area
Bottom-Left
Sample area
Center
Sample area
Bottom-Right
AVO Setup
Parameter Default
Setting range
Description
Response
(Filtering strength)
Level 3
Level 1 -
Level 5
Sets the filtering strength for calculating the mean distances that are applied to histograms created using the sample data.
The larger the value, the more gradually filtering is performed, with a more stable image but slower response. The smaller the value, the less stable the image, but with a faster response.
When set to On, the cut transitions are detected and images are properly adjusted even if there are sharp luminance changes.
Scene Cut Det
*1
(Scene cut detection)
Off
Off,
On
Gamma Mode
(Gamma correction)
On
Off,
On
When set to On, signal levels are adjusted using the Gamma Level settings.
*1 The follwoing delay will be produced when performing scene cut detection depending on the input signal format.
Interlaced formats:
Progressive and PsF formats:
2 fields (1 frame) + some lines
2 frames + some lines
Scene cut detection images will be properly adjusted and output when enough frame delay is set. If the amount of frame delay is insufficient, Scene cut detection will not be properly processed. To perform AVO scene cut detection properly, set enough delay using the FRAME
DELAY function. The output delay varies depending on the SYNCRO MODE, input signal format, FRAME DELAY setting, and video signal H/V phase difference. FRAME DELAY settings are described on the next page.
9-2-2-1. About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay Settings
To properly perform AVO scene cut detection and adjustment, Frame Delay must be set in
the setting range according to the menu settings (9-2-3
“Frame Delay” menu) as shown in the table below.
FRAME DELAY Setting Range Chart
*2
Setting Rrange per Input Video Format
*1
SYNCHRO
525/60i
625/50i
1080/59i
1080/50i
1 to 8 FRAME
720/59p/50p
1080/59p,50p
1080/23PsF, 24PsF
FRAME 2 to 8 FRAME
LINE/AVDL Cannot be set Cannot be set
*1 Synchro Mode settings in section 9-4-1 “FS1/FS2 Video System”
*2 The current input video format can be verified in the Unit/Video Status menu (Sec.
9-7-1) for each input selected in the FS Input Select menu (Sec. 9-2-1).
IMPORTANT
Adjust the audio delay as required in the Audio Delay menu (Sec. 9-3-4) to account for
any additional video signal delay produced by changing Frame Delay settings in the
Frame Delay menu (Sec. 9-2-3).
158
9-2-2-2. User 1 - 5 LEVEL SET
Clicking Set User on the Auto Video Optimizer dialog box opens the User1 - 5 setting dialog box.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
-
The Level drop-down menu in the AVO dialog box has five options of user settings, User 1 through 5. Each User1 – 5 is composed of four level settings such as In White Level, In
Black Level, Target White Level, and Target Black Level. The default settings of user settings User 1 through 5 are the same as those for Darker, Dark, Standard, Bright, and
Brighter respectively. The desirable level settings are easily obtained by adjusting values from the default values.
USER1 – 5 Default Settings
Parameter
(Custom levels) User 1
Default
(Fixed levels)
In White Level
Darker
99.0%
In Black Level 1.0%
Target White Level 80.0%
Target Black Level 3.0%
SELECT LEVEL (Adjustment level)
User 2
Default
User 3
Default
User 4
Default
Dark
98.0%
Standard
97.0%
Bright
95.0%
2.0%
88.0%
5.0%
3.0%
93.0%
7.0%
5.0%
95.0%
12.0%
User 5
Default
Brighter
93.0%
7.0%
97.0%
17.0%
159
In White Level and In Black Level
These two parameters determine the highest and lowest levels of luminance in the input signal.
Parameter
Setting range
(step)
Description
In White Level
In Black Level
80.0 - 99.0%
(0.5%)
1.0 - 20.0%
(0.5%)
The maximum value of luminance in the sample data is defined as 100%. Based on this reference value, this determines the highest level of luminance for level control.
If the value is too large, some noise may be picked up, causing the results to become unstable. If the value is too small, it increases contrast, but it may cause the images to be overexposed.
The minimum value of luminance in the sample data is defined as 0%. Based on this reference value, this determines the lowest level of luminance for level control.
If the value is too small, some noise may be picked up causing the results to become unstable. If the value is too large, it increases contrast, but it may cause the images to be underexposed.
Target White Level and Target Black Level
These two parameters determine the highest and lowest levels of luminance for target images (outputs).
Parameter
Setting range
(step)
Description
Target White
Level
Target Black
Level
60.0 - 100.0%
(0.5%)
0 - 40.0%
(0.5%)
Determines the maximum value of luminance for outputs.
The maximum luminance value of the image after correction should approximate this value.
The larger the value, the brighter the image, which may however cause the image to be overexposed. The smaller the value, the brighter tones are kept. However, the overall obtained image may be dark.
Determines the minimum value of luminance for outputs.
The minimum luminance value of the image after correction should approximate this value.
The larger the value, the dark area in pictures will appear brighter, which may however lower the contrast and the noise will become apparent. The smaller the value, the higher the contrast, which may however cause the image to be underexposed
160
9-2-2-3. User Area 1, 2
Clicking Set Area of Sample Area on the AVO setting dialog box opens the User Area 1, 2
Setting dialog box.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
-
To set the sample area, set the start point and the size.
Parameter Default
Setting range
Description
Start H
Start V
H Size
V Size
0 Pixel
0 Line
360
360
Variable
(2Pixel)
Variable
(2Line)
Variable
(2Pixel)
Variable
(2Line)
Specifies the horizontal start point.
Specifies the vertical start point.
Specifies the horizontal size (distance) from the start point.
Specifies the vertical size (distance) from the start point.
(START V , START H)
H SIZE
Sample area
Default setting of sample area
in 1080/59.94i.
IMPORTANT
The sample area should be set within the effective lines and pixels. Otherwise, the sample area will automatically revert to their default values. Be particularly careful in the following cases.
- When the video format is changed to SDTV after the sample area has been set.
- When the sample area settings are changed by loading an event.
161
9-2-3. Frame Delay
Clicking block (3) in the Video block diagram opens the Frame Delay setting dialog box for the corresponding FS.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
Parameter
Frame Delay
Default
0
Setting range
0 - 8Frame
Description
Sets the amount of frame delay.
Selecting Odd/Even for Forced Field, Synchro Mode to Frame Sync under FS Mode in 9-4-1
FS1/FS2 Video System, while 9-2-1 FS Input Select is set to Composite, and Frame Delay to
0 frame, Frame Delay will always reset to 1 frame. Set Frame Delay beween 1 and 8 frames.
Also, Frame Delay cannot be set if Synchro Mode is set to Line Sync or AVDL under FS Mode
in section 9-4-1 “FS1/FS2 Video System”.
162
9-2-4. Proc Amp
Clicking block (3) on the video block diagram opens the Proc Amp setting dialog box for the corresponding FS.
FS1 Proc Amp Window FS2 Proc Amp Window
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
Parameter
Video Level
Default
100.0%
Chroma Level 100.0%
Setup/Black 0.0%
Hue 0.0°
Setting range (Steps)
0.0 - 200.0％ (0.1％)
Description
Adjusts the video level.
0.0 - 200.0％ (0.1％) Adjusts the chrominance level.
-20.0 - 100.0％ (0.1％) Adjusts the black level.
-179.8 - 180.0° (0.2°) Adjusts the color phase.
FS1<->FS2 Copying
The FS1->FS2 button (in the FS1 Proc Amp dialog box) next to Video Level allows you to copy the Video Level setting of FS1 to FS2.
A confirmation dialog as shown below appears.
Click OK to copy the FS1 Video Level setting to FS2.
Click Cancel to stop copying.
Chroma Level, Setup/Black, and Hue settings can also be copied to FS2 in the same manner.
To copy FS2 settings to FS1, click the FS2->FS1 button in the FS2 Proc Amp dialog box, and proceed in the same manner.
Copy All to FS1/FS2
Click Copy All to FS2 (in the FS1 Proc Amp dialog box) to copy FS1 Video Level, Chroma
Level, Setup/Black, and Hue settings to FS2. A confirmation dialog as shown below appears.
Click OK to copy all FS1 Video Level, Chroma Level, Setup/Black, and Hue settings to FS2.
Click Cancel to stop copying.
To copy all FS2 Video Level, Chroma Level, Setup/Black, and Hue settings to FS1, click Copy
All to FS1 in the FS2 Proc Amp dialog box in the same manner.
IMPORTANT
If Correction Mode is set to Sepia in the Color Corrector menu (9-2-7), the Chroma
Level and Hue settings cannot be changed.
163
9-2-5. BY-PASS Setting
Clicking block (5) on the video block diagram opens the BY-PASS setting dialog box.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Operate BY-PASS
Parameter Default Setting range
SDI1 In-SDI1 Out
SDI2 In-SDI3 Out
Composite In-
Composite Out
Off
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
Off
On
AIO Option A/B Off
Off
On
Description
Setting to On bypasses SDI1 input signals to
SDI 1 output with a relay connection.
Setting to On bypasses SDI2 input signals to
SDI 3 output with a relay connection.
Setting to On bypasses composite input signals to composite output with a relay connection.
Setting to On bypasses AIO input and output connectors in option slot A/B with a relay connection.
164
9-2-6. Converter
Clicking block (6) on the video block diagram opens the Up Down Cross Converter setting dialog box for the corresponding FS.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
Converter Process Mode
Parameter Default Setting range Description
Mode BY-PASS
BY-PASS
SD
1080i
720p
1080PsF
1080p(3G)
Selects a mode for FS1/FS2 UP/DOWN Converter to convert the input signal.
BY-PASS: Outputs the signal without converting.
SD: Converts signals to a standard definition format.
1080i: Converts signals to a 1080i format.
720p: Converts signals to a 720p format.
1080PsF: Converts signals to a 1080PsF format.
1080P(3G): Converts signals to a 3G-SDI 1080p format.
- - -
Displays the format of the input signal to and the format the signal will be converted to in FS1 or FS2.
See section 5-3-2 “CONV Conversion Table” for details on conversions.
165
Aspect Ratio
Parameter
Aspect
Ratio
Default
AFD(4:3)
Setting range
AFD(4:3)
AFD-ALT(4:3)
AFD(16:9)
AFD-ALT(16:9)
4:3 L 16:9 T
4:3 L 14:9 T
4:3 L>16:9
4:3 F 4:3
4:3 L 16:9PRTD
4:3 L 14:9
4:3 F ALT14:9
4:3 L ALT14:9 *1
4:3 L ALT 4:3 *1
16:9 L>16:9
16:9 F 16:9 *1
16:9 P 4:3
16:9 F PRTD *1
16:9 P 14:9 *1
16:9 P ALT 14:9 *1
16:9 F ALT14:9*1
16:9 F ALT4:3 *1
Selectable aspect ratio settings when Converter
Process Mode is set to SD.
AFD(4:3), AFD-ALT(4:3), AFD(16:9),
AFD-ALT(16:9) automatically select an aspect ratio according to the AFD data in the input signal. If no AFD data is found in the input signal, the aspect ratio will be determined
according to the setting made under 5-9-7 ANC
LOSS SET.
To output video signals in 4:3, select either ratio with (4:3). To output in 16:9, select either ratio with (16:9). Other options will output video signals in the specified aspect ratio. See section
20 “About AFD (Active Format Description)” for
details.
Options (4:3 L 16:9 T to 16:9 F ALT 4:3) other than the above four require the input signal aspect ratio to be specified under SD Aspect in
9-2-1 FS Input Select if the input signal is an SD
signal.
Description
AFD
AFD
AFD-ALT
16:9 L>16:9
16:9 F 16:9
16:9 P 4:3
16:9 F PRTD
16:9 P 14:9
16:9 P ALT14:9
16:9 F ALT14:9
16:9 F ALT4:3
Selectable aspect ratios when CONV1 is set to
1080i, 720p, 1080PsF, or 1080(3G).
AFD and AFD-ALT automatically select an aspect ratio according to the AFD data in the input signal. If no AFD data is found in the input signal, the aspect ratio will be determined
according to the setting made under 5-9-7 ANC
LOSS SET.
Options other than the above two output in the specific aspect ratio. See section 20 “About
AFD ” for details on conversions according to
AFD data.
The Aspect Ratio setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY-PASS.
*1 BT1119 WSS will be embedded according to the WSS AFD ERROR settings (Sec. 5-9-8)
for non-WSS aspect ratio conversions.
Motion Sense
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
Motion Sense Adaptive
Field
Adaptive
Frame(Odd 1st)
Frame(Even 1st)
Field: Generates a progressive scan image from one field of an interlaced scan image.
The created image has no motion artifacts, but vertical resolution will be reduced.
Adaptive: Detects whether there is motion or no motion in the scene, and generates an optimal progressive scan image.
Frame(Odd 1st): Generates a progressive scan image from two fields (odd/even) of an interlaced scan image.
Suitable for the progressive segment frame input of progressive scan signals.
Frame(Even 1st): Generates a progressive scan image from two fields (even/odd) of and interlaced scan image.
IMPORTANT
Setting Motion Sense to Frame (Odd 1st) or Frame (Even 1st) for input signals other than progressive segment frame inputs cause motion artifacts. In such case, change
Motion Sense setting to Field or Adaptive.
166
Antialias
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
Horizontal Normal
Weak 8-1
Normal
Strong1-8
Performs horizontal anti-aliasing for the output video image.
Weak 8 to Strong 8 (low to high)
This setting cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as
(BYPASS) in the CONV Conversion Table in section 5-3-2.
Vertical Normal
Weak 8-1
Normal
Strong1-8
Performs vertical anti-aliasing for the output video image.
Weak 8 to Strong 8 (low to high)
This setting cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as
(BYPASS) in the CONV Conversion Table in section 5-3-2.
The Antialias setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY-PASS, or if
the conversion is set to the formats indicated as (BY-PASS) in the CONV Conversion Table
Enhance
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
Enhance Level 0 Level 0-8
Sharpens the output video image.
Level 0 to 8 (low to high)
The Enhance setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY-PASS.
Also, it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as (BY-PASS) in
the CONV Conversion Table (5-3-2).
Converter, Size
Parameter Default Setting range(Steps) Description
H Size
(Horizontal Size)
V Size
(Vertical Size)
100.0％
100.0％
50.0 - 150.0%
(0.1%)
50.0 - 150.0%
(0.1%)
Adjusts the width of the video displayed on the monitor.
Adjusts the height of the video displayed on the monitor.
The Converter Size setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY-PASS.
Also, it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as (BY-PASS) in
the CONV Conversion Table (5-3-2).
Converter, Position
Parameter
H Position
(Horizontal Position)
V Position
(Vertical Position)
Default Setting range (Steps)
0 Pixel
Variable
*1
(2 Pixel)
0 Line
Variable
*1
(1 Line)
Description
Adjusts the horizontal position of the video displayed on the monitor.
Adjusts the vertical position of the video displayed on the monitor.
The Converter Position setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to
BY-PASS. Also, it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as
(BY-PASS) in the CONV Conversion Table (5-3-2).
*1 The Converter Position setting range varies depending on Converter Process Mode, and
Sync Format settings in FS Mode (9-4-1 FS1/FS2 Video System).
167
Converter, Crop
Parameter
H Left
H Right
V Top
V Bottom
Default Setting range (Steps)
0 Pixel
Variable
*1
(2 Pixel)
0 Pixel
0 Line
0 Line
Variable
*1
(2 Pixel)
Variable
*1
(1 Line)
Variable
*1
(1 Line)
Description
Crops the left side of the video.
Crops the right side of the video.
Crops the top of the video.
Crops the bottom of the video.
The Converter Crop setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY-PASS.
Also, it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as (BY-PASS) in
the CONV Conversion Table (5-3-2).
*1 The Converter Crop setting range varies depending on the Sync Format settings in FS
Mode (9-4-1 FS1/FS2 Video System).
IMPORTANT
The cropping setting range resets itself if the video input changes. If the set value exceeds the setting range due to an input change, the set value will automatically reset itself to the default value. If the set value exceeds the horizontal range, the H Left and H Right settings will reset to their default values. If the value exceeds the vertical range, the V Top and V Bottom settings will also reset accordingly.
Side Cut Color
Parameter Default Setting range Description
Red, Green, Blue 0 0 - 255
Sets background color that will be visible if the converted image is set smaller than the original
under Converter1 Size (5-3-3).
R, G, and B components can be adjusted separately.
Control knob F4 allows you to adjust R, G, and
B at the same time.
The Side Cut Color setting cannot be changed if Converter Process Mode is set to BY-PASS.
Also, it cannot be changed if the conversion is set to the formats indicated as (BY-PASS) in
the CONV Conversion Table (5-3-2).
168
9-2-7. Color Corrector
Clicking block (7) on the video block diagram opens the Color Corrector dialog box for the corresponding FS.
“COLOR CORRECTOR (C.C.)” for details.
Auto Video Optimizer (AVO) and Color Corrector use the same circuit. The color corrector
settings are not fully changeable when AVO mode (9-2-2 “Auto Video Optimizer (AVO)”) is set
to Auto. See section 5-2-5 “Color Corrector and AVO Modes” for the available menu settings.
FS1 Color Corrector dialog box FS2 Color Corrector dialog box
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
Correction Mode
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
Correction Mode Balance
Balance
Differential
Sepia
*1
Selects a correction mode from Balance
(RGB), Differential (YPbPr), or Sepia.
Balance: RGB signal correction mode
Allows you to adjust the white balance. Gray scale can be changed by adjusting R, G and
B levels.
Differential: Color difference signal mode
Allows you to adjust contrast without changing white balance. R, G and B levels can be changed without affecting gray scale.
This adjustment is effective for images with different color saturation levels.
Sepia: Sepia mode
Useful for creating black and white images.
*1 Sepia will not be displayed while changing FS1 and FS2 settings simultaneously. If
Correction Mode is set to Sepia, the White Level, Black Level, or Gamma Level R, B setting cannot be changed. Also, it cannot be changed if AVO Control is set to Auto or Hold in the
Auto Video Optimizer (AVO) menu (9-2-2). Correction Mode cannot be set to Sepia, if LINK
setting mode is enabled in the FA-9520 or connected FA-95RU. To set to Sepia, disable LINK
setting mode. See section 4-2-8. “Switching Between 2-Channel Frame Synchronizers” for
details on LINK settings.
169
White Level
Parameter
R, G, B
(RGB White Level)
Default
100.0%
Setting range
(Steps)
0.0 - 200.0％
(0.5％)
Description
Adjusts the white level of R, G, and B components separately.
Group Adjust Off
On
Off
Enables you to adjust white level R, G, and B components simultaneously, retaining separately adjusted R, G, and B proportion, by changing the value of one component.
If AVO Control is set to Auto in the Auto Video Optimizer (AVO) menu (9-2-2), the White Level
setting cannot be changed.
Black Level
Parameter
Red, Green, Blue
(RGB Black Level)
Default
100.0%
Setting range
(Steps)
0.0 - 200.0％
(0.5％)
Description
Adjusts the black level of R, G, and B components separately.
Group Adjust Off
On
Off
Enables you to adjust black level R, G, and B components simultaneously, retaining separately adjusted R, G, and B proportion, by changing the value of one component.
If AVO Control is set to Auto in the Auto Video Optimizer (AVO) menu (9-2-2), the Black Level
setting cannot be changed.
Gamma Level
Parameter
Red, Green, Blue
(RGB Gamma level)
Group Adjust
Default
100.0%
Off
Setting range
(Steps)
0 - 200％
(0.5％)
On
Off
Description
Adjusts the gamma level of R, G, and B components separately.
Enables you to adjust gamma level R, G, and B components simultaneously, retaining separately adjusted R, G, and B proportion, by changing the value of one component.
Curve
(Gamma Curve)
Center
Center
Black
White
Selects a gamma curve type.
If AVO Control is set to Auto in the Auto Video Optimizer (AVO) menu (9-2-2), the all Gamma
Level/Curve settings cannot be changed. Also, if AVO Control is set to Hold, the Curve setting cannot be changed.
Sepia
The Sepia Level and Color settings can be changed if Correction Mode is set to Sepia.
Sepia will not be displayed while changing FS1 and FS2 settings simultaneously.
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
Level 25.0%
0 - 100％
(0.1％)
Adjusts the color level in SEPIA mode.
Color -160.0°
--179.8° - 180.0°
(0.2°)
Adjusts the color in SEPIA mode.
If AVO Control is set to Auto or Hold in the Auto Video Optimizer (AVO) menu (9-2-2), the
Sepia settings cannot be changed.
IMPORTANT
Differential or Sepia mode settings under Correction Mode will automatically change to Balance mode whenever AVO is enabled.
While AVO is being used, the color corrector performs correction as if Correction Mode is in Balance mode and the gamma curve type is Black curve.
Color correction enabled by setting AVO Control to Hold is also performed in the above state.
170
FS1<->FS2 Copying
The FS1->FS2 button (in the FS1 Color Corrector dialog box) next to Correction Mode allows you to copy the Correction Mode setting of FS1 to FS2.
A confirmation dialog as shown below appears.
Click OK to copy the FS1 Correction Mode setting to FS2.
Click Cancel to stop copying.
White Level, Black Level, Gamma Level, and Sepia settings can also be copied to FS2 in the same manner. To copy FS2 settings to FS1, click the FS2->FS1 button in the FS2 Color
Corrector dialog box, and proceed in the same manner.
Copy All to FS1/FS2
Click Copy All to FS2 (in the Color Corrector dialog box) to copy all FS1 Color Corrector settings to FS2. A confirmation dialog as shown below appears.
Click OK to copy all FS1 Color Corrector settings to FS2. Click Cancel to stop copying.
To copy all FS2 Color Corrector settings to FS1, click Copy All to FS1 in the FS2 Color
Corrector dialog box in the same manner.
171
9-2-8. Video Test Signal
Clicking block (8) on the video block diagram opens the Video Test Signal setting dialog box for the corresponding FS.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Parameter
Video Test Signal
Default
Off
Setting range
Off
Full Color Bar
75％ Color Bar
SMPTE Color Bar
Ramp
Description
Outputs an internal video test signal.
172
9-2-9. YPbPr/RGB Clip
Clicking block (10) on the video block diagram opens the YPbPr/RGB setting dialog box.
See section 5-5-3 “VIDEO CLIPSetting range” for details.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
YPbPr / RGB Clip Mode
Parameter Default Setting range
Clip Mode Off
Off
YPbPr
RGB
Description
Selects a mode whether to clip signals in the YPbPr or RGB color space.
YPbPr Clip
Parameter
White Clip
(Y White Clip)
Black Clip
(Y Black Clip)
Default
109.0%
-7.5％
Setting range
(Steps)
50.0 - 109.0%
(0.5％)
-7.5 - 50.0%
(0.5％)
Chroma Clip
(PbPr Chroma Clip)
111.0％
50.0 - 111.0%
Selectable when Clip Mode is set to YPbPr.
(0.5％)
Description
Sets the Y signal upper threshold.
Sets the Y signal lower threshold.
Sets both the upper and lower thresholds of PbPr signals.
RGB Clip
Parameter
White Clip
(RGB White Clip)
Default
300.0%
Setting range
(Steps)
50 - 300%
(0.5％)
Black Clip
(RGB Black Clip)
-200.0％
Selectable when Clip Mode is set to RGB.
-200 - 50%
(0.5％)
Description
Sets the upper RGB color space threshold.
Sets the lower RGB color space threshold.
173
9-2-10. Output Assign
Clicking block (11) on the video block diagram opens the Video Output Setting dialog box.
Output Assign
Allows you to assign video signals to output from video output connectors.
Parameter Default Setting range Description
SDI1/2
SDI3/4
Composite
AIO SlotA
*1
FS1
FS2
FS1
FS1
FS1
FS2
FS1
FS2
FS1
FS2
FS1
FS2
Selects FS1 or FS2 of which signal to be output from SDI1 and 2 connectors. I/O formats of the selected FS are displayed under the radio buttons.
Selects FS1 or FS2 of which signal to be output from SDI3 and 4 connectors. I/O formats of the selected FS are displayed under the radio buttons.
Selects FS1 or FS2 of which signal to be output from Composite connectors. I/O formats of the selected FS are displayed under the radio buttons.
Outputs a black signal for HD output signals.
Selects the signal to be output, FS1 or FS2, from the FA-95AIO output connector in slot
A. I/O formats of the selected FS are displayed under the radio buttons.
Mode
*1
YPbPr
SMPTE
YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr
BETACAM
RGB
Y/C
Selects the signal format for the FA-95AIO video output in slot A.
AIO SlotB
*2
FS2
FS1
FS2
Selects the signal to be output, FS1 or FS2, from the FA-95AIO output connector in slot
B. I/O formats of the selected FS are displayed under the radio buttons.
Mode
*2
YpbPr
SMPTE
YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr
BETACAM
RGB
Y/C
Selects the signal format for the FA-95AIO video output in slot B.
*1 Shown only if the FA-95AIO is installed in option slot A.
*2 Shown only if the FA-95AIO is installed in option slot B.
174
Composite Output Format Table
CONV1 and 2 output signals Output signal from COMPOSITE connector
525/60 CONV signals in 525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
1080/24PsF
1080/23.98PsF
720/59p
CONV signals in 625/50
B.B. in 525/60
B.B. in 625/50
B.B. in 625/50
B.B. in 525/60
B.B. in 525/60
720/50p
1080/59p
1080/50p
B.B. in 625/50
B.B. in 525/60
B.B. in 625/50
YPbPr/RGB Output Format
FS1 or 2 output signal
525/60
FA-95AIO YPbPr/RGB output signal
525/60 signal in FS 1 or 2
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
1080/24PsF
1080/23.98PsF
720/59p
625/50 signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/59i signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/50i signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/24PsF signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/23.98PsF signal in FS 1 or 2
720/59p signal in FS 1 or 2
720/50p
1080/59p
1080/50p
720/50p signal in FS 1 or 2
1080/59i black video
1080/50i black video
Y/C Output format
FS 1 or 2 output signal
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
1080/24PsF
1080/23.98PsF
720/59p
720/50p
1080/59p
1080/50p
Y/C output signal
525/60 signal in FS 1 or 2
625/50 signal in FS 1 or 2
525/60 BB signal
625/50 BB signal
625/50 BB signal
525/60 BB signal
525/60 BB signal
625/50 BB signal
525/60 BB signal
625/50 BB signal
175
9-2-11. Composite Clip
Clicking block (12) on the video block diagram opens the Composite Clip dialog box.
See section 5-5-3 “VIDEO CLIP Setting Ranges” for details.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
Composite Clip Mode
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
Clip Mode Off
Off,
Composite Clip
Composite Clip enables clipping on the composite output signals.
The COMPOSITE CLIP settings are effective only on the analog composite outputs.
The settings are not effective on the SDI1/2 and SDI3/4 outputs.
To enable the Composite Clip menu, set Clip Mode to Off in the YPbPr/RGB Clip menu
Composite Clip Mode
Parameter Default
White Clip
Black Clip
150.0%
-50.0％
Setting range
(Steps)
50 - 150%
(0.5％)
-50 - 50%
(0.5％)
Description
Sets the upper threshold of analog composite color space.
Sets the lower threshold of analog composite color space.
176
9-3. AUDIO Settings
Click
Click the Audio tab at the top of the page. The audio block diagram will be displayed.
Each block in the diagram lets you to go to the corresponding windows or dialog boxes that allows you to change various settings.
Audio Block Diagram
(1)
(2)
(3)
(5) (6) (7)
(9)
(4)
(11)
(12)
(8)
(10)
(10)
(11)
(13)
(12) (13)
* (11) is effective when the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is installed.
(14)
(15)
(16)
(17)
* (12) is effective when the FA-95DE-E option is installed.
* (13) is effective when the FA-95ALA option is installed.
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5),
the Logout is not shown.
177
9-3-1. SDI Input
Clicking block (1) or (2) on the audio block diagram opens the SDI 1, 2 Input dialog box.
SDI 1 Input and SDI 2 Input dialog boxes allow you to set FS1 and FS2 embedded audio settings respectively.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
Embedded 1, 2 Input Gain
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
Master 0.0dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Sets the offset to the input gain for all channels Ch1 to Ch16 of
SDI embedded audio.
Ch1-Ch16 0.0dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
*1
Sets the input gain for the individual SDI embedded audio channel.
*1 Master and individual channel values cannot exceed the setting range as a total. The setting value will stop at the end of the range.
178
Embedded 1, 2 In Audio
Parameter
Alignment
Default
Disable
Setting range
Disable
Enable
Description
Enables or disables automatic phase adjustment for FS1/FS2 input embedded audio channel groups.
Enable: Automatic adjustment (normal setting)
Disable: No adjustment
HD-SDI ACLK Auto
Auto
Sync SDI
Audio Clock
Selects audio clock signal to use for de-embedding and processing audio data in HD-SDI input signal.
Auto: De-embeds HD-SDI embedded audio data using the audio clock phase data in the embedded audio. Synchronous and asynchronous embedded audio signals from 4 audio groups can be de-embedded separately.
*2
Audio data will be processed as synchronous data if the audio clock phase data is incorrect, or jitter is too great.
Sync SDI: All audio data in 4 audio groups are always processed as synchronous data without refering to the respective audio clock phase data.
*3
Audio Clock: Always uses audio clock phase data in HD-SDI embedded audio data to de-embed the audio data.
*4
*1 Embedded audio signal groups are automatically phase-adjusted when they are input to the FA-9520. If there is an abnormal audio signal in an audio group, whether the audio group is in use or not, audio streams may be obstructed by the auto phase adjustment. In such cases, audio stream obstruction can be avoided using this Alignment enable/disable function.
*2 Embedded audio signals in SD-SDI video inputs are always processed as synchronous signals.
*3 Sync SDI should be selected only if audio data cannot pass through as Auto or asynchronous audio data is never input.
*4 Audio Clock may be effective in the case audio data cannot properly pass through as Auto or Sync SDI.
IMPORTANT
Use this Alignment enable/disable function only if the audio output has noise or is muted. Do not change the setting for normal audio output.
Note that the audio output will be temporally muted when Alignment is changed from
Disable to Enable while audio signal phases are aligning.
179
9-3-2. AES Audio Input Settings
Clicking block (3) on the audio block diagram opens the AES Audio Input dialog box.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
AES Input Gain
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
Master 0.0dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Sets the offset to the input gain for all channels CH1 to 8 of AES inputs.
Ch1 - Ch8 0.0 dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
*1
(0.1 dB)
Sets the input gain for the individual AES channel
*1 The total value of Master and individual channel cannot exceed the setting range. The setting value will stop at the end of the range.
AES Input Hysteresis
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
Ch1/2 – Ch7/8 Off
Off
Group A
Group B
Synchronizes the AES input signals in group A or B per group.
This setting is effective when using AES audio signals to output multi-channel audio signals such as surround sound.
The channel pair with the smallest channel numbers within a group is used as the reference pair and other channel pairs are synchronized to it. If there is no audio signal in the channel pair, the next channel pair will be the reference. Audio signals with a phase difference relative to the reference within ±0.25 of a sample period can be synchronized.
180
Setting Examples:
When setting all channel pairs CH 1/2 to 7/8 to Group A
CH 1/2 will be the reference. Other channel pairs will be synchronized to the word clock of
CH1/2.
When setting channels CH1/2 to 3/4 to Group A, and channels CH5/6 to 7/8 to Group
B
CH 1/2 will be the reference pair for Group A, and CH 5/6 the reference pair for Group B.
IMPORTANT
Channel pairs in an audio group must be synchronous and must have the same sampling rate. Changing the audio assignment of the reference channel pair may cause noise on other channel pairs in the same audio group.
Also, changing the assignment may affect the phase alignment of the reference channel pair and other channel pairs. If the alignment is turned off, set Master Mute
(see section 9-3-8 “Audio Master Gain Settings”) to on and off, or turn the unit power
off and on to regain the alignment.
181
9-3-3. Analog Audio Input
Clicking block (3) on the audio block diagram opens the Analog Audio Input dialog box.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
Analog Audio Input Gain
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
Master 0.0dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Sets the offset to the input gain for all analog audio channels CH1 to
CH4.
Ch1 – Ch4 0.0 dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
*1
(0.1 dB)
Sets the input gain for the individual Analog Audio channel.
*1 The total value of Master and indivual channel cannot exceed the setting range. The setting value will stop at the end of the range.
Analog Audio Input Level
Parameter
Ch1 – Ch4
Default
+4dBm
Setting range
(Steps)
-10 dBm
0 dBm
+4 dBm
+8 dBm
Description
Sets the signal level for the individual Analog Audio channel.
Analog Audio System
Parameter Default
Termination Setting 600 Ω
Silence Time
Silence Level
2sec
-72dBFS
Setting range
(Steps)
600 Ω
Hi-Z
1 – 10 sec
(1 sec)
-72 - -48 dBFS
(6dBFS)
Description
Selects how to terminate the analog inputs 1/2 and 3/4.
600 Ω: 600Ω termination
Hi-Z: High-impedance
Sets the duration to determine whether the input analog audio is silent.
Sets the audio level to determine whether the input analog audio is silent.
182
9-3-4. Audio Delay (SDI / AES / Analog)
Clicking block (5) on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Delay dialog box.
SDI1, SDI2 Audio Delay
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
-
Audio Delay
Parameter Default Setting range Description
Master
4msec
4 - 1000msec
4 - 1000msec
*1
Sets the delay for SOURCE channels.
CH1-CH16
*1 The total value of Master and individual channel cannot exceed the setting range. The setting value will stop at the end of the range.
AES Audio Delay Analog Audio Delay
183
9-3-5. SRC Mode (SDI / AES)
Clicking block (6) on the audio block diagram opens the SRC Mode dialog box.
SDI1, SDI2 SRC Mode
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Parameter
SRC Mode
Default
SRC IN
Setting range
Auto
BY-PASS
SRC In
Description
Sets the SRC circuit to pass or by-pass audio signals per channel pair.
Auto:
Sets the SRC circuit to pass signals.
However, non-PCM audio signals will be by-passed.
BY-PASS:
Sets the SRC circuit to by-pass signals.
Set to By-pass to output asynchronous audio signals. An audio clock must be
selected under 9-3-10 “SDI Audio Output
Setting “ for the respective audio groups
to embed audio signals to SDI output video signals.
SRC In:
Sets the SRC circuit to pass both PCM or
NON-PCM signals. Useful for the irregular PCM signal with the NON-PCM audio channel status indication.
However, real NON-PCM signals cannot be output properly.
AES SRC Mode
184
9-3-6. Audio Output Polarity (SDI / AES / Analog)
Clicking block (7) on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Output Polarity dialog box.
Polarity: SDI1, SDI2
Polarity: AES, Analog
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Polarity
Parameter
CH1-16
(AES CH1-8)
(Analog CH1-4)
Default
Normal
Setting range
Normal
Invert
Description
Sets the polarity for each channel.
Invert: Reverses the polarity.
185
9-3-7. Audio Mapping
Clicking block (8) on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Mapping dialog box.
(See section 6-5. “AUDIO MAPPING (MAPPING)” for details.)
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
SDI1/2, 3/4 Out Mapping
Parameter
CH1-16
Default
SDI CH1-16
Setting range
SDI 1 CH1-16
SDI 2 CH1-16
AES CH1-8
ANALOG CH1-4
DOWN MIX1-L
DOWN MIX1-R
DOWN MIX2-L
DOWN MIX2-R
500Hz TONE
1KHz TONE
SILENCE
Dolby Decoder A CH1~8
*1 *2
Dolby Decoder A Downmix L
*1 *2
Dolby Encoder A CH1
*2
Dolby Encoder A CH2
*2
Dolby Decoder B CH1~8
*3 *4
Dolby Decoder B Downmix L
*3 *4
Dolby Encoder B CH1
*4
Dolby Encoder B CH2
*4
Loudness 1 A-
Loudness 2 A-
*5
*5
Loudness 1 B-
*6
Loudness 2 B-
*6
Left
Right
Center
LFE
Ls
Rs
*1 Selectable when the FA-95D-D option is installed in option slot A.
*2 Selectable when the FA-95DE-E option is installed in option slot A.
*3 Selectable when the FA-95D-D option is installed in option slot B.
*4 Selectable when the FA-95DE-E option is installed in option slot B.
*5 Selectable when the FA-95ALA option is installed in option slot A.
*6 Selectable when the FA-95ALA option is installed in option slot B.
Description
Selects an audio signal to embed into respective
FS1/FS2 audio channels.
AES Out Mapping
Parameter Default
CH1-8 AES CH1-8
Setting range
The same as SDI Out
1/2 3/4 Mapping
Description
Selects an audio signal to output to respective AES audio channels.
186
Analog Out Mapping
Parameter
CH1-16
Default
Analog CH1-4
Setting range
SDI 1 CH1-16
SDI 2 CH1-16
AES CH1-8
ANALOG CH1-4
DOWN MIX1-L
DOWN MIX1-R
DOWN MIX2-L
DOWN MIX2-R
500Hz TONE
1KHz TONE
SILENCE
Dolby Decoder A CH1~8
*1 *2
Dolby Decoder A Downmix L
*1 *2
Dolby Encoder A CH1
*2
Dolby Encoder A CH2
*2
Dolby Decoder B CH1~8
*3 *4
Dolby Decoder B Downmix L
*3 *4
Dolby Encoder B CH1
*4
Dolby Encoder B CH2
*4
Loudness 1 A-
Loudness 2 A-
*5
*5
Loudness 1 B-
*6
Loudness 2 B-
*6
Left
Right
Center
LFE
Ls
Rs
*1 Selectable when the FA-95D-D option is installed in option slot A.
*2 Selectable when the FA-95DE-E option is installed in option slot A.
*3 Selectable when the FA-95D-D option is installed in option slot B.
*4 Selectable when the FA-95DE-E option is installed in option slot B.
*5 Selectable when the FA-95ALA option is installed in option slot A.
*6 Selectable when the FA-95ALA option is installed in option slot B.
Description
Selects an audio signal to embed into respective
FS1/FS2 audio channels.
187
9-3-8. Audio Master Gain Settings
Clicking block (9) on the audio block diagram opens the Audio Master Gain Setting dialog box.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
Audio Master Settings
Parameter
Master Gain
Default
0.0dB
Setting range
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Description
Sets the offset to the audio gain for all audio channels CH1 through 16.
Master Mute Off
Off
On
On: Mutes all audio channels that will be internally processed.
* Master Mute is not effective on NON-PCM outputs. NON-PCM output signals pass through.
Embed 1, 2 Output Gain (See sec. 6-4-2 and 6-4-3)
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Master －
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Description
Sets the offset to audio output gain for all audio channels CH1 through
16 in respective FS.
Mute
CH1-CH16
Off
0.0dB
Off
On
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
*1
On: Mutes all embedded audio channels in respective FS.
Sets audio gain for all audio channels
CH1 through 16 in respective FS.
*1 The total value of Master and individual channel cannot exceed the setting range. The setting value will stop at the end of the range.
AES Output Gain
The setting menus are the same as those of Embed 1, 2 Output Gain. See section 6-4-4 “AES
Analog Audio Output Gain
The setting menus are the same as those of Embed 1, 2 Output Gain. See section 6-4-5
“ANALOG OUT GAIN“ for details.
188
9-3-9. Down Mix Setting
Clicking block (10) on the audio block diagram opens the Down Mix Setting dialog box.
“DOWN MIX1 SET” and 6-8. “DOWN MIX2 SET” for details.
Downmix 1, 2 Setting
Parameter Default Setting range
Mode
Surround Mix
Stereo
-3dB
Stereo
Surround
Monaural
-3dB
-6dB
-9dB
0
Sets the Ls/Rs (surround channels) level.
0 : (-∞dB) Excludes surround channels from the downmix.
Description
Selects a mode to downmix audio signals.
Center Mix -3dB
-3dB
-4.5 dB
-6dB
Sets the C (center channel) level.
-3dB: The output level after the downmix retains the original center channel level.
-4.5dB, -6dB: Used to reduce the audio level in case it becomes too loud due to the center channel audio mixing to both the right and left channels.
Master Level -3dB
-3dB
Auto
Sets the level for the downmixed audio signals as a whole.
If set to Auto, Down MIX Master Level changes according to the Downmix Mode and Surround Mix level selections.
*1
*1 If Master Level is set to Auto, Master Level changes as shown in the below table.
Surround Mix Level
-3dB -6dB -9dB 0 (-
∞dB)
Down Mix Mode
Stereo
Surround approx.-7.7dB approx.-6.9dB approx.-6.3dB approx.-4.6dB approx.-9.9dB approx.-8.7dB approx.-7.7dB approx.-4.6dB
Monaural approx.-12.9dB approx.-12.0dB approx.-11.4dB approx.-9.5dB
189
Downmix Assign
Parameter Default Setting range Description
Left
Right
Center
Left Surround
Right Surround
Left: EMB CH1
Right: EMB CH2
Center: EMB CH3
Left Surround: EMB CH5
Right Surround: EMB CH6
EMB1 CH1-16
EMB2 CH1-16
AES CH1-8
ANALOG CH1-4
Dolby DECA CH1-8
Dolby DECB CH1-8
Selects audio signals to be downmixed.
* If the same audio signal is selected for multiple CH SEL channels, or a NON-PCM signal is assigned to an audio channel, the menu will be indicated with an “*“, i.e. „*EMB1 CH1“, and
DOWNMIX-L and DOWNMIX-R will be muted.
* The downmixed audio signals are output as Down Mix-L, and R.
NOTE
To embed downmixed audio signals, Down Mix -L and R, see section 9-3-10 "SDI
Audio Output Setting ”. To output downmixed audio signal from AES connectors, see
“AES Audio Output Setting”. To output from the analog audio output
connectors, see section 9-3-12 “Analog Audio Output Setting”.
190
9-3-10. SDI Audio Output Settings
Clicking block (14) or (15) on the audio block diagram opens the SDI 1/2 or 3/4 Audio Output
Setting dialog box.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
SDI1/2, 3/4 Audio Mono Sum
Parameter Default
CH1/2-CH15/16 Disable
Setting range
Disable
Enable
Description
Enable: Outputs the stereo pair channels as a mono sum.
SDI 1/2, 3/4 Output Clock Select
Parameter
Group 1
Group 2
Group 3
Group 4
Default
Reference
Reference
Reference
Reference
Setting range
Auto
Reference
CH 1/2
CH 3/4
Auto
Reference
CH 5/6
CH 7/8
Auto
Reference
CH 9/10
CH 11/12
Auto
Reference
CH 13/14
CH 15/16
Description
Selects an audio clock per group for SDI embedded audio output.
Auto: Automatically selects audio clock input in the NON-PCM signal channel, if an input
NON-PCM signal is in the selected SDI embedded audio group. Automatically selects audio clock signal in the smallest numbered channel, if all signals in the audio group are
NON-PCM. Automatically selects audio clock signal synchronized to the output video signal, if all signals in the audio group are PCM.
*1
Reference: Audio clock synchronize with the output video signal. (Used to synchronize audio with the video signals processed in the SRC.)
CH 1/2 to 15/16: An input audio clock in channels
1/2 to 15/16.
To output asynchronous audio signals, select one input channel pair for each group.
*1
For SD-SDI outputs, Reference is automatically selected regardless of the setting.
*1 Embedded audio signals are divided into 4 groups. Each group consists of 4 audio channels; Group 1 (CH 1 to 4), Group 2 (CH 5 to 8), Group 3 (CH 9 to 12), Group 4 (CH 13 to 16). The audio signals in the same group are transmitted together using the same audio clock (48kHz). PCM audio signals will be synchronized to a genlock signal in the SRC
(sampling rate converter) so as to synchronize with the output video signal. Non-PCM audio signals (compressed audio data such as AC-3) do not go into SRC. If the non-PCM audio input signal is asynchronous with the output video signal, the non-PCM audio output signal will be asynchronous. The asynchronous non-PCM audio signals can be embedded to SDI video signals by selecting an audio clock for each audio group. To do so, all 4 channels in the respective audio groups must be synchronous. Assign 4 synchronous audio signals to channels in a group.
191
9-3-11. AES Audio Output Settings
Clicking block (16) on the audio block diagram opens the AES Audio Output Setting dialog box.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
AES Audio Mono Sum
Parameter Default
CH 1/2-CH 7/8 Disable
Setting range
Disable
Enable
Description
Enable: Outputs the stereo pair channels as a mono sum.
IMPORTANT
To use AES audio signals 1/2 through 7/8 for Source, the AES connector must be set to be used for input. See AES 1/2-3/4 IO Setting and AES5/6-7/8 IO Setting in section
9-4-2 “Audio System” for details.
9-3-12. Analog Audio Output Settings
Clicking block (17) on the audio block diagram opens the Analog Audio Output dialog box.
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
-
Analog Audio Output Level
Parameter Default Description
CH 1-CH 4 +4dBm
Setting range
-10dBm
0dBm
+4dBm
+8dBm
Sets the output signal level for analog audio output channels.
Analog Audio Mono Sum
Parameter Default
CH 1/2
CH 3/4
Disable
Setting range
Disable
Enable
Description
Enable: Outputs the stereo pair channels as a mono sum.
192
9-3-13. Dolby E/Digital Decoder
Clicking block (15) on the audio block diagram when the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is installed in option slot A/B opens the Dolby Decoder dialog box.
(The Dolby options in slots A and B can be set separately.)
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Dolby Decoder Input Select
Parameter Default
Dolby Input AUX Input
Bit Stream -
Setting range
AUX Input
Embeded 1 Ch 1/2-15/16
Embeded 2 Ch 1/2-15/16
AES 1/2-7/8
Description
Selects source audio signals to input to the Dolby decoder.
AUX Input: Input signal in optional Dolby input connector (Dolby IN).
Embeded 1 Ch 1/2-15/16:
Embedded FS1 audio signal
Embeded 2 Ch 1/2-15/16:
Embedded FS2 audio signal
AES 1/2-7/8: AES input audio signal
Dolby Digital 32bit
Dolby Digital 16bit 1CH
Dolby Digital 16bit 2CH
Dolby Digital 16bit 1/2CH
Dolby E 24bit
Dolby E 20bit
Dolby E 16bit
PCM
Loss
Error
Displays signal type and bit width of signal selected under Dolby Input.
PCM: Normal audio signal
Loss: No signal
Error: Unidentifiable
193
Parameter
Program
Config
Default
-
Setting range
Dolby E 5.1+2
Dolby E 5.1+2x1
Dolby E 4+4
Dolby E 4+2x2
Dolby E 4+2+2x1
Dolby E 4+4x1
Dolby E 4x2
Dolby E 3x2+2x1
Dolby E 2x2+4x1
Dolby E 2+6x1
Dolby E 8x1
Dolby E 5.1
Dolby E 4+2
Dolby E 4+2x1
Dolby E 3x2
Dolby E 2x2+2x1
Dolby E 2+4x1
Dolby E 6x1
Dolby E 4
Dolby E 2+2
Dolby E 2+2x1
Dolby E 4x1
Dolby E 7.1
Dolby E 7.1Screen
NON-Dolby E
Dolby Digital 1+1
Dolby Digital 1/0
Dolby Digital 2/0
Dolby Digital 3/0
Dolby Digital 2/1
Dolby Digital 3/1
Dolby Digital 2/2
Dolby Digital 3/2
Dolby Digital 3/0L
Dolby Digital 2/1L
Dolby Digital 3/1L
Dolby Digital 2/2L
Dolby Digital 3/2L
Loss
Invalid
Description
Displays Dolby E program configuration
(Coding mode) or status of signal selected under Dolby Input.
See Dolby E/Digital Decoder Output
Channel Assignment table in section 12
“Analog Audio Connection” for channel
assignments of respective configurations.
Dolby Decoder REF Input Select
Parameter Default Setting range
REF Input AUX REF IN
None
FS1 Output
FS2 Output
AUX REF In
FS1 Input
FS2 Input
Description
Selects a reference signal to be used in the
Dolby decoder. PCM signal output from the
Dolby decoder will be synchronized to the selected reference signal.
None: No reference signal used
FS1 Output: Uses the FS1 output video signal.
FS2 Output: Uses the FS2 output video signal.
AUX REF In: Uses the input signal in the optional Dolby reference input connector (REF
IN). If no signal is in the REF IN connector, the
PCM signal output will be in free-run mode.
FS1 Input: Uses the FS1 input video signal.
FS2 Input: Uses the FS2 input video signal.
Dolby Down Mix Mode
Parameter Default
Mode Surround
Setting range
Surround
Stereo
Monaural
Description
Selects a downmix mode for the
Dolby decoder.
194
Dolby Polarity
Parameter
Ch 1-8
Default
Normal
Setting range
Normal
Invert
Description
Sets polarity for the Dolby decoder output.
Dolby Decoder Gain
Parameter Default Setting range Description
Master 0.0 dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB
(0.1 dB)
Sets offset for all Dolby-decoded signals.
Ch 1-8
Down Mix L Ch
Down Mix R Ch
0.0 dB
-20.0 - +20.0 dB*1
(0.1 dB)
Sets gain for each Dolby decoder channel.
*1 Audio signals will be clipped if the sum of Master and Ch gain settings exceed the upper or lower threshold of the setting range.
195
9-3-14. Dolby AUX Output Select
Clicking block (17) on the audio block diagram when the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E option is installed in option slot A/B opens the DolbyAUX Output dialog box.
(The options in slots A and B can be set separately.)
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Parameter
Output
Default
Dolby Decoder
CH 1/2
Setting range
Dolby Decoder CH 1/2
Dolby Decoder CH 3/4
Dolby Decoder CH 5/6
Dolby Decoder CH 7/8
Dolby Down Mix L/R
Dolby Encoder CH 1/2 *1
500Hz Tone
1kHz Tone
Silence
None
Description
Selects a signal to be output from the optional Dolby output connector (Dolby OUT).
Decoder Output CH 1/2 – CH
7/8:
Dolby-decoded PCM signals
Dolby Down Mix L/R:
Downmixed signal generated from Dolby-decoded PCM signals.
Dolby Encoder CH 1/2:
Encoded Dolby E signal of selected signals of SOURCE channels.
500Hz Tone: 500Hz Test signal
(TONE)
1kHz Tone: 1KHz Test signal
(TONE)
Silence: Mute signal
None: No signal output
*1 Shown only if the FA-95DE-E option is installed.
196
9-3-15. Dolby E Encoder
Clicking block (16) on the audio block diagram when the FA-95DE-E option is installed in option slot A/B opens the Dolby E Encoder dialog box.
(The options in slots A and B can be set separately.)
After completing the settings, click Close to close the dialog box.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Dolby Encoder Input Assign
Parameter Default Setting range Description
Input
Selection
CH 1-8
Direct Input
Selection
Embedded
1 CH1-CH8
Direct Input Selection
Dolby Decoder Output
When Direct Input
Selection is selected
Embedded1, 2 CH1-CH16
AES CH1-CH8
Analog CH1-CH4
Down Mix 1, 2 L/1, 2 R
500Hz TONE
1KHz TONE
When Dolby Decoder
Output is selected
Dolby Decoder CH 1-8
Dolby Down Mix L
DolbyDown Mix R
500Hz TONE
1KHz TONE
Silence
Silence
Loudness 1 A
Loudness 2 A
Loudness 1 B
Loudness 2 B
*2
*2
*3
*3
Left
Right
Center
LFE
Ls
Rs
Selects a signal to be input to the Dolby encoder.
*1
Direct Input Selection: Source channel signals of the FA-9520
Dolby Decoder Output: Output signal from the Dolby decoder
*1
When Input Selection is set to Direct
Input Selection:
Embedded1/2 CH1-CH16: OURCE
signal selected in the 6-5 AUDIO
AES CH1-8: AES input channel
Analog CH1-4: Analog audio input channel
Down Mix 1,2L/1,2R: Down-mixed 1/2 output audio signal.
500Hz/1KHz TONE: 500Hz/1KHz test signal (TONE)
Silence: Mute signal
Loudness 1/2 A/B Left
Loudness 1/2 A/B Right
Loudness 1/2 A/B Center
Loudness 1/2 A/B LFE
Loudness 1/2 A/B Ls
Loudness 1/2 A/B Rs
Loudness-processed1/2, A/B output audio signal
When Input Selection is set to Dolby
Decoder Output:
Dolby Decoder CH 1-8: PCM signal output from the Dolby decoder
DolbyDown Mix L/R: Down mixed signal generated from Dolby-decoded
PCM signal
500Hz/1KHz TONE: 500Hz/1KHz test signal (TONE)
Silence: Mute signal
197
*1 Direct Input Selection and Dolby Decoder Output settings are retained until changed.
When the Direct Input Selection or Dolby Decoder Output is changed, Ch1-8 signal assignments will be changed to that of the Input Selection. Direct Input Selection and Dolby
Decoder Output signals cannot be input to the Dolby encoder together. Dolby Digital signal output from the Dolby decoder, Dolby Decoder Output, cannot be encoded to the Dolby E signal.
*2 Not shown if the FA-95ALA option is not installed in option slot A.
*3 Not shown if the FA-95ALA option is not installed in option slot B.
Dolby Encoder Mode Setting
Parameter Default Description
Program
Configuration
5.1+2
Setting range
5.1+2
*1
5.1+2x1
*1
4+4
*1
4+2x2
*1
4+2+2x1
*1
4+4x1
*1
4x2
*1
3x2+2x1
2x2+4x1
2+6x1
*1
*1
*1
8x1
*1
5.1
4+2
4+2x1
3x2
2x2+2x1
2+4x1
6x1
4
2+2
2+2x1
4x1
7.1
*1
7.1 Screen
*1
Selects Dolby E encoder program configuration.
Bit Depth 20bit
20bit
16bit
Selects the bit width of the Dolby E encoder output.
Frame REF FS1
FS1
FS2
Selects a video output to which the
Dolby E encoder output is synchronized. (FS 1 or FS 2)
Selects a metadata to be used for
Dolby E encoding.
Internal: Uses the Program
Configuration and Bit Depth settings.
Other metadata will be reset to default.
Meta Data
Input
Internal
Internal
Dolby Decoder Output
Dolby Decoder Output: Uses the metadata of the Dolby E signal input to the Dolby decoder.
Program Configuration and Bit
Depth will be ineffective.
*1 If Bit Depth is set to 16bit, the “＊“ will be displayed and the program functions as 5.1. To select these configurations, set Bit Depth to 20bit.
198
9-3-16. Automatic Loudness Adjustment (FA-95ALA)
Clicking block (13) on the audio block diagram when the FA-95ALA option is installed in option slot A/B opens the Automatic Loudness Adjustment dialog box.
(Settings for the FA-95ALA in both option slots are the same, but can be set separately.)
Loudness Measurement1/2
Input indicates the measured loudness level of the FA-95ALA input audio signal in LKFS.
Output indicates the loudness level of the loudness processed signal in LKFS.
Parameter Default Setting range Description
Input - -
Displays the measured loudness level of the
FA-95ALA input audio signal in LKFS.
Output
Start
Stop
Clear
Session Time
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Displays the measured loudness level of the
FA-95ALA output audio signal in LKFS.
Set Loudness Control to On, then click Start to start loudness adjustment and display the measured loudness level.
Allows you to start to adjust the audio signal loudenss according to the Loudness standard selected under Stndard.
Allows you to stop loudness measurement and adjustment.
Allows you to clear loudness measurement. If clicked while Start is enabled, loudness measurement and adjustment restart after being cleared.
Session Time display also resets to 0:00:00.
Displays the elapsed time of loudness measurement and adjustment.
After counting up to 6:59:59, the display resets to 0:00:00.
Loudness measurement and adjustment will also be cleared and restart.
199
Loudness Control Settings 1/2
Parameter
Loudness
Control
Response
Slow
Response
Fast
Target
Level
Minimum
Gain
Maximum
Gain
Default
Off
Normal
Normal
+0.0 LU
-20.0 dB
0.0 dB
Setting range
Off
On
NA
-4, -3, -2, -1
Normal
+1, +2, +3, +4
NA
-4, -3, -2, -1
NORMAL
+1, +2, +3, +4
-2.0- to +2.0 LU
(0.1 LU)
-20.0 to 0.0 dB
(1.0 dB)
0.0 to +5.0 dB
(1.0 dB)
Description
Allows you to turn On or Off the Loudness Level
Adjustment feature. Set to Off to enable only loudness measurement. The On/Off setting can only be changed while loudness measurement is being stopped.
Allows you to select the loudness level adjustment speed (SLOW) to achieve the target level for long-term loudness level adjustment, allowing gradual leveling.
The larger the value, the faster the responce allowing greater adjustment.
NA: Disables the SLOW adjustment function.
Allows you to select the loudness level adjustment speed (FAST) to achieve the target level for instantaneous loudness level adjustment, allowing sudden leveling (leveling down only).
The larger the value, the faster the response allowing greater adjustment.
NA: Disables the FAST adjustment function.
Allows you to set the target loudness level (offset).
The target level of the standard selected under
Standard is displayed to the left of the setting box.
Allows you to set the minimum gain (lower threshold) to limit the attenuation.
Allows you to set the maximum gain (upper threshold) to limit the magnification.
IMPORTANT
Change Response settings according to the audio material characteristics. For materials with a wide audio level range, set each setting to a large value. For materials that prefer minimum loudness adjustment, set each setting to a small value.
Loudness Channel Assign 1/2
Parameter Default Setting range
Mode Stereo
Monaural
Stereo
5.1 CH
Left
Right
Center
*1
*2
Description
Allows you to select the audio mode of an audio signal for its loudness level to be measured and adjusted.
EMB1
CH1
*3
EMB1 CH1～16
EMB2 CH 1~16
AES CH 1~8
Allows you to select audio signals to be measured and adjusted.
EMB1: FS1 IN input audio signals
EMB2: FS2 IN input audio signals
Analog CH 1~4
Down Mix 1 Left
AES: AES input audio signals
Analog: Input analog audio signals
Down Mix 1 Right Down Mix: Internally generated
Down Mix 2 Left
Down Mix 2 Right
Dolby Decoder Slot A/B CH 1~8
*4
Dolby Decoder Slot A/B Downmix L
Dolby Decoder Slot A/B Downmix R
*4
*4 downmixed audio signals.
Dolby Decoder Slot A/B CH 1~8:
Dolby decoder output audio signals
Dolby Decoder Slot A/B Downmix:
Dolby decoder downmixed output audio signals
EMB1
CH2
*3
EMB1
CH3
*3
The same as above
The same as above
The same as above
The same as above
LFE
*2 EMB1
Ls
Rs
*2
*2
EMB1
CH5
*3
EMB1
CH6
*3
The same as above
The same as above
The same as above
The same as above
The same as above
The same as above
200
*1 Selectable if Mode is set to Stereo or 5.1ch.
*2 Selectable if Mode is set to 5.1ch.
*3 Under Loudness Channel Assign 2 menus, values are EMB2 CH1 – 6 respectively.
*4 Shown if the FA-95D-D or FA-95DE-E is installed in option slot A/B.
* LFE channels are subjected to adjustments, but not to measurement.
Loudness Standars Setting
Parameter Default Setting range
Standard ARIB TR-B32
ARIB TR-B32
ATSC A85
EBU-R128
ITU R BS.1770
Description
Allows you to select according to what standard the loudness measurement and adjustment will be conducted.
Parameter Specification of Standards used in the FA-95ALA
Parameter ARIB TR-B32 ATSC A/85 EBU-R128 ITU-R BS.1770
Target Level -24.0 LKFS -24.0 LKFS -23.0 LUFS
Momentary Average Time 400 msec 125 msec 400 msec
-24.0 LKFS
400 msec
Short Term Average Time 3000 msec 10000 msec 3000 msec
Absolute Gating -70.0 LKFS NONE -70.0 LUFS
Relative Gating
Overlap Size
-10 LU
75%
NONE
0%
-10 LU
75%
3000 msec
-70.0 LKFS
-10 LU
75%
201
9-4. SYSTEM Settings
Click
Click the System tab at the top of the page. The System setting window will be displayed.
The system setting window consists of Video System and Audio System pages.
Those pages are accessed by clicking ►FS1 Video System ►FS2 Video System ►Audio
System at the top of the page.
9-4-1. FS1/FS2 Video System
Click ►FS1 Video System or ►FS2 Video System at the top of the Video System page to access the corresponding FS Video System page.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Click Unity to reset to the default settings.
+
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5),
the Logout is not shown.
FS1, FS2 SD Phase *1
Parameter Default
Setting range
(Steps)
Description
H Phase 0 clk
-864 - 864 clk
(1 clk)
V Phase
0 Line
*2
(Frame, Input)
1 Line
*2
(Line, AVDL)
-313 - 313 Lines
(1 Lines)
Adjusts the horizontal and vertical phases of the system referring to genlock signal. This setting is applied to SD output signals.
*1 These settings cannot be made if there is no reference signal input.
*2 The default value varies depending on the Synchro Mode setting as shown in the below table. The set value will be reset to its relevant default value whenever the Synchro Mode setting is changed.
202
SYNCHRO
FRAME
LINE
AVDL
IN SEL
─
SDI1, 2
Composite (525/60)
Composite (625/50)
Component (Y/C)
Component (others)
SDI1, 2
Composite (525/60)
Composite (625/50)
Component (Y/C)
Component (others)
Default
0
1
3
4
4
1
1
3
4
4
1
FS1, FS2 HD Phase *1
Parameter Default Setting range (Steps) Description
1080 H Phase
1080 V Phase
0 clk
0 Line
*2
(Frame, Input)
1 Line
*2
(Line, AVDL)
-1375 - 1375 clk
(1 clk)
-563 - 563 Lines
(1 Lines)
Adjusts the horizontal and vertical phases of the system referring to genlock signal. This setting is applied to 1080-format output signals.
720 H Phase
720 V Phase
0 clk
0 Line
*2
(Frame, Input)
1 Line
*2
(Line, AVDL)
-2063 - 2063 clk
(1 clk)
-375 - 375 Lines
(1 Lines)
Adjusts the horizontal and vertical phases of the system referring to genlock signal. This setting is applied to 720-format output signals.
*1 These settings cannot be made if there is no reference signal input.
*2 The default value varies depending on the Synchro Mode setting as shown in the below table. The set value will be reset to its relevant default value whenever the Synchro Mode setting is changed.
SYNCHRO
FRAME
LINE
AVDL
IN SEL
─
SDI1, 2
Composite (525/60)
Composite (625/50)
Component (Y/C)
COMPONENT (others)
SDI1, 2
Composite (525/60)
Composite (625/50)
Component (Y/C)
COMPONENT (others)
Default
0
1
3
4
4
4
1
4
1
1
3
203
FS1, FS2 Video Position
Parameter Default
H Position
V Position
0 Pixel
0 Line
Setting range (Steps) Description
525/60i ±92
625/50 ±92
1080/59i ±240
1080/50i ±240
1080/23PsF ±240
1080/24PsF ±240
720/59p ±160
720/50p ±160
1080/59p ±240
1080/50p ±240 (Pixel) Adjusts the horizontal/vertical
525/60i ±30
625/60i ±36 position of output videos.
1080/59i ±68
1080/50i ±68
1080/23PsF ±68
1080/24PsF ±68
720/59p ±90
720/50p ±90
1080/59p ±135
1080/50p ±135 (Line)
FS1, FS2 Freeze Settings
Parameter
Freeze On/Off
*1
Default Setting range
Off Off, On
Freeze Mode
*2
Frame
Frame,
Odd, Even
Description
Sets FREEZE ON/OFF
Select an operation mode for FREEZE.
Strobe Freeze 0 0 – 255
Sets the interval to refresh the images by the number of fields for the field or frame freeze.
( “0” will not refresh the image.)
*1 Changing the FS Mode or Synchro Mode setting while Freeze On/Off is set to On will turn freeze Off. Freeze On/Off cannot be set to On if Synchro mode is set to Line Sync, or
AVDL. Freeze is always set to Off at startup. These settings are not stored in the event memory.
*2 Freeeze Mode is automatically set to Frame for progressive and progressive segmented frame input signals and cannot be changed. See the below Freeze Mode Setting Chart for details.
Sync
Format settings
AUTO
525/60
Freeze Mode Setting Chart
Input signal
525/60 625/50 1080/59i 1080/50i 720/59p 720/50p 1080/23PsF 1080/24PsF 1080/59p 1080/50p
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p NF
1080/23PsF NF
1080/24PsF NF
1080/59p NF
OE
OE
NOE
NOE
NOE
NF
OE
NOE
OE
NOE
NOE
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
OE
NOE
NOE
OE
NOE
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
OE
NOE
NOE
NOE
OE
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
F
NOE
NOE
NOE
NOE
F
NF
NF
NF
NF
F
NOE
NOE
NOE
NOE
NF
F
NF
NF
NF
F
NOE
NOE
NOE
NOE
NF
NF
F
NF
NF
F
NOE
NOE
NOE
NOE
NF
NF
NF
F
NF
F
NOE
NOE
NOE
NOE
NF
NF
NF
NF
F
F
NOE
NOE
NOE
NOE
NF
NF
NF
NF
NF
1080/50p NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF NF
OE: Can be set to Frame, Odd, or Even.
F: Fixed to Frame.
NOE: Can be set to Frame, Odd, or Even, but the image does not appear properly.
NF: Fixed to Frame, and the image does not appear properly.
F
204
FS1, FS2 Synchro Mode
Parameter
Synchro Mode
*1
*2
*3
*4
*5
Default Setting range
Frame
Sync
Frame Sync
Line Sync
AVDL
*6
Description
Frame Sync: Enables horizontal and vertical alignment of video signals to a genlock signal.
Effective on both synchronous and asynchronous signals.
Line Sync: Locks the video signal of within ±1/2H to a genlock signal. Output delay is 1H. Effective only when video signal is synchronous to the genlock signal.
AVDL: Locks the video signal to a genlock signal with a 1H delay. Effective only when video signal is synchronous to the genlock signal.
Input Lock: Locks the system to an input video signal. The delay can be adjusted by System
Phase and/or Frame Delay. However, the minimum delay is 520clk common in all formats. (HD: 74
MHz, SD: 27MHz) Does not use a genlock signal.
Sync Format
*7
Auto
Detect
Auto Detect
525/60
625/50
1080/59.94i
1080/50i
720/59.94p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
1080/59.94p
1080/50p
Sets a system format for the FA-9520.
Auto Detect: Detects and sets the detected input video format to the system format.
Other values make the system work in the format.
Forced Field
*1 *3
Off
Off
Odd
Even
Selects which field to be used twice to compose a frame.
(Effective on composite signal inputs.)
frame. Set Frame Delay to between 1 and 8 frames.
*2 Frame Delay (9-2-3) cannot be set if Synchro Mode is set to Line Sync, or AVDL.
*3 Forced Field cannot be set if Synchro Mode is set to Line Sync, or AVDL.
*4 The Freeze function via GPI input is disabled if Synchro Mode is set to Line Sync, or AVDL. See section
*5 Changing the Synchro Mode setting will reset 1080 V Phase and 720 V Phase settings in HD Phase menu and the V PHASE setting in SD Phase menu to their default values according to the set Synchro
Mode.
*6 Switching input signals with a phase difference using a router or such device may cause shock noise to occur on video or audio signals if the phase difference (compared to the genlock signal) exceeds the range shown in the following table. If the difference is within range, shock noise will not occur.
Video format
SD
Phase difference from genlock signal
-1H (with line differences depending on video format) to +1/2H
HD -5H (with line differences depending on video format) to +1/2H
Table of Reference signals and Input formats that can lock
Reference signal
Input signal
525/60
1080/59i
720/59p
1080/59p
625/50
1080/50i
720/50p
1080/50p
1080/23PsF
525/60 1080/59i 720/59p 625/50 1080/50i 720/50p 1080/23PsF 1080/24PsF
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
-
-
-
-
✓
-
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
-
-
-
-
✓
-
✓
✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
-
-
-
-
✓
-
-
-
-
-
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
-
✓
-
-
-
-
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
-
✓
-
-
-
-
✓
✓
✓✓✓
✓✓✓
-
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
-
-
-
-
✓✓✓
-
-
-
-
-
✓
✓
✓
✓
-
✓✓✓
1080/24PsF
✓✓✓:
SYNCHRO can be set to FRAME, LINE, or AVDL.
△: SYNCHRO can only be set to FRAME.
-: Unable to synchronize.
205
FS1, FS2 Ancillary Setting
Parameter
ANC Mode
Default
H/V ANC
Setting range
H/V ANC
Detail
Description
Selects ancillary data processing mode for the
FS1/FS2 output signal. H ANC and V ANC menu settings will become available when H/V ANC is selected. Set to Detail to enable ANC Data Embed
settings in 9-4-3 “ANC Settings”.
H ANC *
V ANC *
Overwrite
Pass
Overwrite
In Data
Blank
Pass
Blank
Embeds audio signals into horizontal ancillary data of FS1/FS2 output videos.
Overwrite: Removes the embedded audio from the input SDI video, then embeds the processed audio data in the video signal. Whether to embed is determined by the FS1/FS2 Audio Group setting.
The input SDI data will be embedded in the video signal after audio signals are embedded.
In Data: Passes the input SDI horizontal ancillary data without processing. (Processed audio data cannot be embedded.)
Blank : Deletes all horizontal ancillary data, and embeds the processed audio data.
Embeds audio signals into vertical ancillary data of
FS1/FS2 output videos.
Pass: Embeds the vertical ancillary data without processing.
Blank: Deletes all vertical ancillary data.
* H ANC and V ANC settings are effective if input and output formats are the same. If such formats are different, both H ANC and V ANC will be set to BLANK.
FS1, FS2 Audio Group
Parameter Default Setting range
Group1
Group 2
Group 3
*1
*1
*1
Enable
Enable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
Disable
Enable
*3
*3
*3
Description
Disable: Does not insert GROUP 1-embedded audio.
Enable： Inserts GROUP 1-embedded audio.
Disable: Does not insert GROUP 2-embedded audio.
Enable： Inserts GROUP 2-embedded audio.
Disable: Does not insert GROUP 3-embedded audio.
Enable： Inserts GROUP 3-embedded audio.
Group 4
*1*2
Enable
Disable
Enable
*3
Disable: Does not insert GROUP 4-embedded audio.
Enable： Inserts GROUP 4-embedded audio.
*1 Operative if H ANC under FS1/FS2 Ancillary Setting is set to Overwrite or Blank.
*2 GROUP4 embedded audio cannot be inserted into SD-SDI output signals regardless of the
GROUP4 setting.
*3 The setting is ineffective if the input and output formats are the same, and H ANC is set to In
Data under Converter1 Ancillary Setting.
FS1, FS2 SD Line Mask
Parameter Default Setting range Description
Line6-23 Pass
Pass
Blank
Pass: Outputs the line to a composite, Y/C or SD-SDI output signal without processing.
Blank: Masks the selected composite, Y/C or SD-SDI output signal line.
IMPORTANT
Line settings specified under ANC Settings (sec. 9-4-3) take a priority over FS1, FS2
Line Mask line settings and will take effect.
206
9-4-2. Audio System
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5),
the Logout is not shown.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Fade In/Out
Parameter
Fade Mode
Default
Disable
Setting range
Disable
Enable
Description
Disable: Always outputs input audio signals without adding any effect such as Fade or Mute.
Enable: Sets an audio channel to mute with fade out if an audio error is detected and fade in when recovered.
*1
Fade Time 12ms
12ms
24ms
Sets the duration for Fade In and Out transitions.
*1 To use this function, the audio delay must be set longer than the total Fade In/Out Time and Silence
Detect Time.
Ex.) If Fade Time is set to 12 ms, the audio delay must be longer than 14 msec; i.e. 12+ 2msec
(Silence Detect Time).
IMPORTANT
Fade In/Out may not function properly for the switching between AES input signals whose sampling rates are different, or that are asynchronous.
Digital Audio
Parameter
AES
1/2-3/4
I/O Setting
AES
5/6-7/8
I/O Setting
Default
Input
Input
Setting range
Input
Output
Input
Output
Description
Input: AES1/2, and 3/4 connectors are set to be input connectors.
Output: AES1/2, and 3/4 connectors are set to be output connectors.
*1
Input: AES5/6, and 7/8 connectors are set to be input connectors.
Output: AES5/6, and 7/8 connectors are set to be output connectors.
*1
Reference
Level
Grade
-20dBFS
Professional
-18dBFS
-20dBFS
-24dBFS
Professional
Consumer
Selects the reference level for digital audio
signals. See section 11 “ANALOG/DIGITAL
Audio Input/Output Level ” for details.
Selects an audio application for digital audio channels.
Professional: Optimized for professional use
Consumer: Optimized for consumer use.
Resolution 24Bit
24Bit
20Bit
16Bit
Selects an audio word length for Digital Audio output signals.
*1 All connectors are set to be input connectors and this menu will be disabled if the optional
FA-95DACBL is installed.
207
Digital Audio Silence Setting
Parameter
Silence Detect
Time
Default
2sec
Setting range
1 – 10sec
Description
Sets the duration to determine the SDI embedded audio and AES input signals are silent.
Silence Level -72dBFS
-72dBFS
-66dBFS
-60dBFS
-54dBFS
-48dBFS
Sets the audio level to determine the SDI embedded audio and AES input signals are silent.
*1 According to this setting, the audio status Slilence is displayed in the Audio Status page
Audio Error Sense
Parameter
Correction
Default
Normal
Setting range
Disable
Normal
Sensitive
Description
FA-9520 can fade
*1
and mute audio when it detects a change in the audio status due to, e.g., signal switchover. This parameter allows you to select whether to detect changes and how sensitive detection should be to such changes.
Disable: Disables mute function when change in audio status is detected. Normally not selected.
Normal: Mutes when a change on an SDI signal, ADP (Audio Data Packet), or DBN
(Data Block Number) is detected.
Normally selected.
Sensitive: Mutes when a change on channel status, or EDP (Extended Data Packet) presence (only for SD-SDI), as well as the above items, is detected.
*1 Fade function depends on the Fade Mode setting in the Fade In/Out menu.
Correction
Normally set to Normal. Set to Disable for a specific program or duration when audio output has noise or is muted.
The FA-9520 fades out audio or resets the delay circuit when a status change (SDI signal input interruption, signal switchover (by a router, etc.) is detected. Faulty ancillary data in normal audio signals may also be detected as status changes.
Audio signals with such faulty ancillary data may lead the FA-9520 ’s automatic correction to improperly process the audio input and produce noise or mute the audio.
Note that disableing the automatic correction can prevent such improper processing, however, the following functions will also be disabled.
- After a signal switchover by router or the recovery of an interrupted SDI signal, delay settings will lose their accuracy to within 1.3 msec max. Audio signal phases among audio groups will not match.
Perform either of the following operations when setting Correction to Disable, or changing the setting from Disable to Normal.
(a) Change the Alignment setting from Disable to Enable under SDI Input Audio in 9-4-2.
(b) Disconnect and reinput the SDI input signal.
These operations reset the audio circuit and minimize the delay differences and group audio phase differences. Output audio signals will be muted while performing the operations.
208
Channel Status Mask
Parameter Default Setting range
EMB1/EMB2
CH1/2-CH15/16
AES
CH1/2-CH7/8
SRC
BY-PASS
Description
SRC BY-PASS
PCM
Mute
Selects audio error sensor mode for each stereo channel pair of SDI and AES input audio signals whose channel status
NON-PCM flag is 1.
*1
SRC BY-PASS: Treats audio signals as
NON-PCM. By-passes audio signals through
SRC
*2
, and selects audio clock input in the
NON-PCM signal channel for SDI AUDIO
CLOCK.
*3
PCM: Treats audio signals as PCM (standard audio signal). By-passes audio signals through SRC
*2
, and select REFERENCE for
SDI AUDIO CLOCK.
*3
Mute: Treats audio signals as mute signals.
*1 Channel status and Validity Bit of input audio channel status can be checked using a wave form monitor.
*2 Processes the audio signal as described if 9-3-5 SRC Mode is set to Auto.
*3 Processes the audio signal as described if 9-3-10 SDI Audio Output Settings is set to Auto.
CH STATUS:
FA-9520 determins whether the input audio signal is PCM or NON-PCM by the NON-PCM flag in the Audio Channel Status (ACS). If ACS is incorrect the audio signal may cause inproper processing. For such case, this setting may effective processing the audio signal normally.
IMPORTANT
Use this setting only if there is audio noise or the audio is muted. Otherwise, do not change the setting from the default setting.
Validity Bit Mask
Parameter
EMB1/EMB2
CH1/2-CH15/16
AES
CH1/2-CH7/8
Default
SRC
Bypass
Setting range
SRC BY-PASS
PCM
Mute
Description
Selects audio error sensor mode for each stereo channel pair of SDI and AES input audio signals whose channel status Validity
Bit flag is 1.
*1
SRC BY-PASS: Treats audio signals as
NON-PCM. By-passes audio signals through
SRC
*2
, and selects audio clock input in the
NON-PCM signal channel for SDI AUDIO
CLOCK.
*3
PCM: Treats audio signals as PCM
(standard audio signal). By-passes audio signals through SRC
*2
, and select
REFERENCE for SDI AUDIO CLOCK.
*3
Mute: Treats audio signals as mute signals.
*1 Channel status and Validity Bit of input audio channel status can be checked using a wave form monitor.
*2 Processes the audio signal as described if 9-3-5 SRC Mode is set to Auto.
*3 Processes the audio signal as described if 9-3-10 SDI Audio Output Settings is set to Auto.
Validity:
FA-9520 determins whether the input audio signal is PCM or NON-PCM by Validity Bit (V Bit) in audio signal. If Validity Bit (V Bit) is incorrect the audio signal may cause inproper processing. For such case, this setting may effective processing the audio signal normally.
IMPORTANT
Please use this setting only if there is audio noise or the audio is muted. Otherwise, do not change the setting from In Data.
209
9-4-3. ANC Settings
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5),
the Logout is not shown.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
FS1/FS2 ANC Detect Line
Allows you to select which line of the input signal to detect the superimposed ancillary data.
For RP186 VI:
Parameter Default Setting range Description
ANC RP186 VI
RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
Selects an ancillary data standard.
Format
Field 1
Field 2
525/60
14 Line (in 525/60)
11 Line (in 625/50)
277 Line (in 525/60)
324 Line (in 625/50)
525/60
625/50
12~19 Line (in 525/60)
8~22 Line (in 625/50)
275~282 Line (in 525/60)
321~335 Line (in 625/50)
Selects the input signal format.
Selects a line to detect ancillary data in Field 1.
Selects a line to detect ancillary data in Field 2.
For BT1119 WSS:
Parameter Default
ANC RP186 VI
Format
Field 1
625/50
23 Line
Setting range
RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
625/50
8- 23 Line
Description
Selects an ancillary data standard.
Selects the input signal format.
Selects a line to detect ancillary data in
Field 1.
FS1/FS2 ANC Detect Select
Allows you to select the superimposed ancillary data type.
Parameter Default Setting range Description
Caption *1 CEA608 CC
CEA608 CC
S334-1 CC
CEA608 CC: Detects closed caption data in luminance signal of 525/60 systems.
S334-1 CC: Detects closed caption data in 525/60 SDI signal ancillary data space.
AFD S2016-3 AFD
S2016-3 AFD
RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
Selects an ancillary data type to detect in
SDTV input signals.
*1 Be sure to set to CEA608 CC when processing closed caption data in 525/60 composite signals. Otherwise the caption data will not be detected.
210
FS1/FS2 ANC Data Embed
Allows you to set ancillary data insertion into FS1/FS2 output video signals.
Parameter Default Setting range Description
ANC CEA608 CC
CEA608 CC
S334-1 CC SD
CEA708 CC
HD
S2016-3 AFD
RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
Selects an ancillary data type to insert.
Format
Embed
Line
Field 1
Field 2
-
Disable
-
-
*
Disable
Enable
*
*
Selects a video format that supports the ancillary data selected under ANC. Only selectable format will be shown.
Disable: Does not insert ancillary data selected under ANC.
Enable: Inserts ancillary data selected under ANC.
Settings can be respectively set for different
ANC setting data types.
Selects a line in ancillary data space into which ancillary data is inserted. A line can be selected for different ANC and FORMAT selections separately.
If ANC is set to RP186 VI, lines can be selected for fields 1 and 2 respectively. This parameter allows you to select a line for
Field 1.
If ANC is set to RP186 VI, lines can be selected for fields 1 and 2 respectively. This parameter allows you to select a line for
Field 2.
Shown only if ANC is set to RP186 VI.
* The setting range varies according to the ancillary data type and video format.
Ancillary data type FORMAT LINE Default
ANC:CEA 608 CC 525/60
ANC:S334-1 CC SD 525/60
21(284) Line 固定 *1
12(275) to 19(282) Line *1 12 (275) Line *1
ANC:CEA708 CC HD
1080i
720p
525/60
625/50
9 to 20 Line
9 to 25 Line
9 Line
9 Line
12(275) to 19(282) Line *1 12(275) Line *1
8(321) to 22(335) Line *1 8(321) Line *1
ANC:S2016-3 AFD 1080i/PsF
720p
9 to 20 Line
9 to 25 Line
9 Line
9 Line
1080p/(3G) 9 to 41 Line
Field 1 12 to 19 Line
525/60
Field 2
ANC:RP186 VI
Field 1
625/50
ANC:BT1119 WSS 625/50
Field 2
Field 1
*1 Field2 line number displayed in parentheses.
275 to 282 Line
8 to 22 Line
321 to 335 Line
8 to 23 Line
9 Line
14 Line
277 Line
11 Line
324 Line
23 Line
211
If CEA608 or S334-1 CC closed caption data is detected in the input signal, and the FS1 and/or FS2 converter output signal format(s) is/are 1080/59i or
720/59p, the detected closed caption data will be automatically converted to
CEA708. However, if CEA708 closed caption insertion is disabled, the data will not be inserted.
If FS1 and/or FS2 converter output format(s) is/are 1080/PsF or 1080/59p, the
CEA708 closed caption data insertion will be automatically terminated.
Meanwhile, if CEA708 closed caption data is detected in the 1080/59i or
720/59p HD-SDI input signal, and the FS1 and/or FS2 converter output signal format(s) is/are 525/60, the detected closed caption data will be automatically converted to S334-1 CC and/or CEA608 CC.
However, if S334-1 CC and/or CEA608 closed caption insertions are disabled, the data will not be inserted. If the input signal is 1080/59p or 1080/PsF, detection and automatic conversion to S334-1 CC and/or CEA608 CC will not be performed.
IMPORTANT
Closed caption data output to SD-SDI ancillary data will stop when data input is lost. If closed caption data input is lost, the ancillary data output will be conducted according
to the ANC LOSS SET settings. See section 5-9-7 “ANC LOSS SET” for details.
Ancillary data combinations that cannot be simultaneously embedded to the same line.
Video format
Ancillary data type S334-1 CC S2016-3 AFD RP186 VI BT1119 WSS
525/60
S2016-3 CC
S2016-3 AFD
RP186 VI
Can be set to same line
Unable to set to same line
Can be set to same line
Unable to set to same line
Unable to set to same line
Unable to set to same line
S2016-3 AFD
Unable to set to same line
Unable to set to same line
625/50 RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
Unable to set to same line
Unable to set to same line
Can be set to same line
Can be set to same line
If the same line is set for the ancillary data combination described as “Unable to set to same line”, and both ancillary data types are set to be embedded under ANC Data Embed, an error message ”Identical ANC line location settings!” will appear. If the sign is displayed, ancillary data will not be properly embedded. The line settings must be properly set. Usually the default value will properly embed the ancillary data. Keep this in mind when changing the value to configure a system with other devices.
212
FS1/FS2 ANC Loss Mode Settings
Allows you to select an operation mode when input signal ancillary data is lost.
Parameter Default Setting range Description
ANC S2016-3 AFD
S2016-3 AFD
RP186 VI
BT1119 WSS
Selects an ancillary data type to insert into the SDI signal.
Format SD
SD
HD *1
Selects a video format compatible with the ancillary data selected under ANC.
Only compatible Video formats will be displayed
Mode Remove
If Format is set to SD
Remove *2
Hold *2
4:3 L 16:9 T *2
4:3 L14:9 T *2
4:3 L>16:9 *2
4:3 F 4:3 *2
4:3 L16:9PRTD *2
4:3 L 14:9 *2
4:3 F ALT14:9 *2
4:3 L ALT14:9
4:3 L ALT 4:3
16:9 L>16:9
16:9 F 16:9 *2
16:9 P 4:3
16:9 F PRTD
16:9 P 14:9
16:9 P ALT14:9
16:9 F ALT14:9
16:9 F ALT4:3
Mode can be set for respective ANC and Format selections.
Remove: Does not embed the ancillary data to either FS1, or 2
Hold: Retains the last ancillary data aspect ratio and outputs video signal in the aspect ratio.
Other values operate according to the selected AFD as an input AFD.
BT1119 WSS selected under ANC can only select AFD codes indicated by
*2
.
If Format is set to HD
Remove
Hold
16:9 L>16:9
16:9 F 16:9
16:9 P 4:3
16:9 F PRTD
16:9 P 14:9
16:9 P ALT14:9
16:9 F ALT14:9
16:9 F ALT4:3
Mode can be set for respective ANC and Format selections.
Remove: Does not embed the ancillary data to either FS1, or 2
Hold: Retains the last ancillary data aspect ratio and outputs video signal in the aspect ratio.
Other values operate according to the selected AFD as an input AFD.
*1 HD is selectable only when ANC is set to S2016-3.
FS1/FS2 WSS AFD Error
Allows you to select the WSS AFD ancillary operation mode when the input signal WSS AFD ancillary data is lost.
Parameter Default Setting range Description
Mode Remove
Remove
F 4:3
Remove: Does not embed BT1119 WSS to
FS1 and/or 2.
F 4:3: Embeds BT1119 WSS F 4:3 (code 8) to FS1 and/or 2.
IMPORTANT
Ancillary data insersion line settings specified under ANC Settings (sec. 9-4-3) take
priority over the line settings specified under the FS1, FS2 SD LINE MASK (sec. 9-4-1)
and will take effect.
213
9-4-4. Composite Settings
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5),
the Logout is not shown.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
SC Phase
Parameter Default
SC Phase 0°
Setting range
-179.8°- 180°
Description
Adjusts the subcarrier phase of composite and Y/C output signals referring to the B.B. genlock signal.
Not adjustable with the tri-level genlock signal.
Composite Setting
Parameter Default Setting range
Comb Filter
Adaptive
2D
Adaptive 3D
Adaptive 2D
Trap Only
Description
Selects a mode to separate the Y (luminance) and C (chrominance) of composite signals.
NR Level
Cross Color
Off
Off
Off
Level 1 - 4
Off
Level 1 - 3
Sets the noise reduction level for the composite signal inputs.
Sets the cross color (noise) reduction level.
VITS
NTSC Setup
Off
Off
Off
On
Off
On
On: Passes through VITS (V-ANC) lines 10 to
21 (NTSC), or 6 to 23 (PAL) of composite input signals. For SD-SDI output signals, inserts VITS lines into Y signals.
Select Off when using signals without 7.5 IRE setup.
Select On when using signals with 7.5 IRE setup.
PAL-M Mode
Set
Disable
Disable
Enable
Disable: Allows NTSC signals to be output.
Enable: Allows PAL-M signals to be output.
*1
*1 This setting enables PAL-M output for COMPOSITE OUT and Y/C
*1
outputs, however,
NTSC signal output will be disabled.
To synchronize the PAL-M output, input a PAL-M BB or 59.94/29.97 Hz tri-level sync signal to the GENLOCK IN connector. (NTSC BB signals cannot synchronize PAL-M output signals.)
214
9-5. GPI
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5), the
Logout is not shown.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Parameter Default
In/Out
*1
Input
Setting range(Steps)
Input
Output
Description
Selects whether to use GPI pins 1 through 7 each for input or tally output.
Assign
Assign
*2
*2
None
None
In case In/Out is set to Input
None
BY-PASS(SDI1)
BY-PASS(SDI2)
*2
*2
BY-PASS(VBS)
*2
*2 *4
FS1/FS2 Freeze
FS1/FS2 Full Color Bar
*2
FS1/FS2 75% Color Bar
*2
FS1/FS2 SMPTE Color Bar
*2
FS1/FS2 Ramp
*2
FS1/FS2 Audio
EXT Audio
FS1/FS2 Input SDI1
*2
*2
FS1/FS2 Input SDI2
FS1/FS2 Composite
*2
Default
Event1～100
*2
FS1/FS2 Keyer
FS1/FS2 Load 1～7
Loudness 1, 2 A/B Start
Loudness 1, 2 A/B Clear
BY-PASS Option A
*6
BY-PASS Option B
*7
In case In/Out is set to Output
None
*3
FS1/FS2 Freeze
*3
FS1/FS2 Video In
*3
REF In
*3
FAN Alarm
*3
DC-POWER1/2
FS1/FS2 SDI1
*3
*5
FS1/FS2 SDI2
*3
FS1/FS2 Composite
*3
FS1/FS2 Keyer
Loudness 1, 2 A/B Control
Assigns a function to GPI pins 1 through
7 according to the selection under In/Out.
Assigns a function to GPI pins 1 through
7 according to the selection under In/Out.
Logo ID
*8
1-7 1-256
Sets ID (1 through 256) to logos to be inserted for outputs 1 through 7 of FS 1 and 2.
*1 Whenever the In/Out setting is changed, Assign is reset to None. Reset Assign.
215
*2 The input functions consist of pulse mode and level mode functions. See the “◆INPUT
FUNCTION
” in section 7-6 “GPI SETTING” for details.
*3 Details of the output functions are shown in the
“◆OUTPUT FUNCTION” in section 7-6 “GPI
*4 If FS Mode > Synchro Mode in section 9-4-1 “FS1/FS2 Video System” is set to Line Sync, or
AVDL, the Freeze setting will not function, but will be displayed as *Freeze.
To enable Freeze for Input, be sure to set Synchro Mode in section 9-4-1 “FS1/FS2 Video
*5 DC Power 1 and 2 are selectable only if FA-95PS is installed.
*6 Shown only if the FA-95AIO option is installed in slot A.
*7 Shown only if the FA-95AIO option is installed in slot B.
*8 The Logo ID setting box will be displayed when In/Out is set to Input, and Assign is set to any of FS1 Load 1 – 7 or FS2 Load 1 – 7. In the following cases, the logo will not be inserted to the converter output signals, although data will be loaded to the FA-9520.
- No logo is registered under the selected Logo ID.
- The registered logo format and converter output video format do not match.
- The keyer of the relevant converter is turned off.
216
9-6. Utility Settings
Click
Click the Utility tab at the top of the page. The Utility setting window will be displayed.
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5), the
Logout is not shown.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
217
9-6-1. Event Control
Parameter
Start Up
Event Load
Default
Last Setting
Setting range
Last Setting
Default *1
Event1-Event100
Description
Selects an event you want to load at startup.
Last Setting: Starts up with the last set settings.
Default: Starts up with default settings.
Event1 to 100: Starts up with the settings saved as an event among events 1 to 100.
Event Load Default
Default *1
Event1-Event100
Selects the number of an event saved in the FA-9520 to load. Click Submit to load.
Load Mode Load All
Load All
Load FS1 Only
Load FS2 Only
Selects the mode to load the data in the event selected by the number under Event
Load.
Load ALL: Loads all data in the event.
Load FS1 Only: Loads only FS1 settings.
Load FS2 Only: Loads only FS2 settings.
Event Save Video Format
Video Format *1
Event1-Event100
Selects the number of an event you want to save. Click Submit to save the settings to the FA-9520.
*1 Default recalls the default settings.
Set Event Name
Click Set next to Unit/Event Name. A window that allows you to name the FA-9520 and events
1 through 100 as shown below opens.
①
Unit Name
Enter a name for the FA-9520 within 15 characters. The name will be displayed on the front
panel under NAME in the NETWORK INFO menu (sec. 7-4). The factory default is FA-9520.
Event Name
Select a group of 20 events to be displayed by clicking on the event group in section ①.
Enter a name in the setting box next to respective events within 15 alphanumeric characters.
After entering name(s), click Submit. The factory default values are Event 1 to 100.
The entered event names will be displayed when performing Event Load or Event Save. They will also be displayed on the front panel menu display while opening menus described in
218
9-6-2. Backup Parameter
The FA-9520 settings can be saved to a file, and the saved settings in a file can be loaded.
Saving the FA-9520 Settings to a File
Click Submit next to Save File under Backup Parameter. The File Download dialog appears.
Click OK to start saving.
IMPORTANT
Some versions of Internet Explorer may not save data having a long file name properly. In such case, save data in Internet Explorer using a short file name, then rename the file in Windows Explorer. A data file can also be saved under its default file name in any version of Internet Explorer.
Loading the Data Saved in a File
In Apply Setting Below, select the checkboxes of the items you wish to load the data. If no
checkbox is selected, no settings are loaded. See section 9-8-2. “NETWORK SETTING” for
details on the checkboxes in Network Setting. See section 9-8-3. “SNMP SETTING“ for
details on the checkboxes in SNMP Setting. Selecting the Parameter checkbox loads all parameters except for Event Memory. Selecting the Event Name checkbox loads the event
memory names. See Set Event Name in section 9-6-1
“Event Control” for details. After
selecting the items to be loaded and clicking Browse, the Choose file dialog appears.
Specify the destination directory and click Open.
219
Click Load. A confirmation message appears.
Click OK to start transferring the file to the FA-9520. To stop transferring the file, click Cancel.
IMPORTANT
BY-PASS On/Off and Freeze On/Off settings cannot be saved.
The data saved in FA-9500 mode cannot be loaded.
Do not attempt to load the data saved in FA-9500 mode.
IMPORTANT
The FA-9520 uses the CSV file format to backup the configuration data which enables commercially available spreadsheet software to edit the data. However, Unit ID or event names that consist only of numbers may be recognized as numeric values by such software and appear differently after being recalled to the FA-95RU. It is recommended that alphabetical values be included in names to enable editing using such software.
9-6-3. Downloading a MIB File
The MIB file used when the FA-9520 is monitored and operated through the external SNMP manager can be downloaded from the FA-9520. The downloaded file is in zip format and so you will need to unzip the file before its use.
Download MIB File
Click Download under Download MIB File on the Utility page. The File Download dialog appears.
Click OK. “fora-fa9520-mib.zip” will be downloaded to the destination directory.
After unzipping the file using an unzip utility, you will have the files “FORA-FA9520-mib.mib”, and “FOR A-MIB.MIB”.
NOTE
See section 18 “About SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)” for details on
the MIB file.
220
9-6-4. Event Data Backup
The Event Memory data (Events1 through 100) saved in FA-9520 mode can be saved in a file on the computer as a backup. You can also move the data to another FA-9520 (in FA-9520 mode).
Save File
Click Save.
Click OK. The event data will be saved to the destination directory with the file name
“fa9520_eventdata.952e”.
Restore
To load the backup file on the computer, click Browse. The Choose file to Upload dialog appears.
Specify the directory and the file name and click Open. The destination path will be displayed on the screen.
Click Load. The confirmation dialog appears.
Click OK to start loading the data. To cancel loading the data, click Cancel.
IMPORTANT
The data saved in FA-9500 mode cannot be loaded.
Do not attempt to load the data saved in FA-9500 mode.
221
9-7. Status Display
Click
Click the Status tab at the top of the page. The Unit/Video Status page will be displayed. To go to the Audio Status page, click Audio Status at the top left of the page. In the same way, click
Unit/Video Status to go to the Unit/Video Status page, and click Unit Information to go to the
Unit Information page. Click Changeover Status to go to the Changeover Status page. The
Changeover Status page will open only if the FA-95CO option is installed.
9-7-1. Unit/Video Status
The video and unit statuses are shown on the Unit/Video Status page.
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5),
the Logout is not shown. Click Refresh to refresh the page.
Video Input Status
Item Display
SDI In1
SDI In2
Loss
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
1080/59p
1080/50p
BY-PASS
Unknown
Loss
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
1080/59p
*1
1080/50p
*1
BY-PASS
Unknown
-----
Displays the video format of the SDI2 input signal.
Displays “Loss” if there is no input signal.
Displays “Unknown” if there is an unsupported input signal.
Displays “BY-PASS” if the function is enabled.
Displays
“-----“ indicating no SDI2 input detection if 9-2-1 FS
Input Select is set to YPbPr SMPTE, YPbPr BETACAM,
RGB, or Y/C.
Description
Displays the video format of the SDI1 input signal.
Displays
Displays
Displays
“Loss” if there is no input signal.
“Unknown” if there is an unsupported input signal.
“BY-PASS” if the function is enabled.
222
Item
Composite In
Reference
Option A
*2
Display
Loss
525/60
625/50
BY-PASS
Unknown
Loss
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
PAL-M
*1
Unknown
Loss
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
BY-PASS
Unknown
Displays the video format of the COMPOSITE input signal.
Displays “Loss” if there is no input signal.
Displays
Displays
Displays
Displays
Description
“Unknown” if there is an unsupported input signal.
“BY-PASS” if the function is enabled.
Displays the video format of the genlock input signal.
“Loss” if there is no input signal.
“Unknown” if there is an unsupported input signal.
Displays the video format of the Component input signal of the FA-95AIO installed in option slot A.
Displays
Displays
Displays
“Loss” if there is no input signal.
“Unknown” if there is an unsupported input signal.
“BY-PASS” if the function is enabled.
Option B
*3
Ditto
Displays the video format of the Component input signal of the FA-95AIO installed in option slot B.
Imput Mode
YPbPr
SMPTE
YPbPr
BETACAM
RGB
Y/C
-----
Displays the input signal format of FA-95AIO installed in option slot A and B.
*1 Shown when PAL-M Mode Set in the 9-4-1 FS1/FS2 Video System is set to Enable, or an input signal
in GENLOCK IN connector is 525/60 or PAL-M signal.
*2 Shown if FA-95AIO is installed in option slot A.
*3 Shown if FA-95AIO is installed in option slot B.
Video Output Status
Item Display
SDI Out 1/2
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
1080/59p
1080/50p
BY-PASS
Disable
Description
Displays the video format of the SDI1 output signal.
Displays
Displays
“BY-PASS” if the function is enabled.
“Disable” if there is no signal output.
SDI Out 3/4 Same as above
Composite Out
525/60
625/50
BY-PASS
Disable
PAL-M
Displays the video format of the SDI2 output signal.
Displays “BY-PASS” if the function is enabled.
Displays “Disable” if there is no signal output.
Displays the video format of the COMPOSITE output signal.
Displays “Disable” if there is no signal output.
Displays
“PAL-M” if PAL-M Mode Set is enabled in the 9-4-1
FS1/FS2 Video System menu, and the format setting for the
converted output video signal under Composite Output
Setting in the 9-2-10 Output Assign menu is 525/60.
223
Option A
*1
525/60
625/50
1080/59i
1080/50i
720/59p
720/50p
1080/23PsF
1080/24PsF
BY-PASS
Disable
Displays the video format of the FA-95AIO output signal in option slot A.
Displays “Disable” if there is no signal output.
Option B
*2
Ditto
Displays the video format of the FA-95AIO output signal in option slot B.
Output Mode
YPbPr SMPTE
YPbPr
BETACAM
RGB
Y/C
Displays the output signal format of FA-95AIO installed in option slots A and B.
See section 9-2-10 “Output Assign” for details on output
signal format settings.
*1 Shown if the FA-95AIO option is installed in option slot A.
*2 Shown if the FA-95AIO option is installed in option slot B.
Unit Status
Item
Unit Name
Fan1
Display
FA-9520
Normal
Stopped
Description
Displays the unit name. The default setting is “FA-9520”.
Displays the status of Fan1.
Normal: Operating normally.
Stopped: FAN1 has stopped.
Turn the unit power off, and contact your dealer if a replacement is needed.
Fan2
Power1
*1
Normal
Stopped
Normal
Abnormal
Displays the status of Fan2.
Normal: Operating normally.
Stopped: FAN2 has stopped.
Turn the unit power off, and contact your dealer if a replacement is needed.
Displays the status of DC Power1.
Normal: The power supply is normal.
Abnormal: DC Power1 has failed.
A power failure has occurred. Although the unit is working properly, It is recommended that the power supply unit be replaced. Contact your dealer if a replacement is necessary.
Power2
*1
Normal
Abnormal
Displays the status of DC Power2.
Normal: The power supply is normal.
Abnormal: DC Power2 has failed
A power failure has occurred. Although the unit is working properly, It is recommended that the power supply unit be replaced. Contact your dealer if a replacement is necessary.
*1 : Displays “-------” if the optional FA-95PS is not installed.
224
9-7-2. Audio Status
The audio statuses are shown on the Audio Status page.
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5),
the Logout is not shown.
Click Refresh to refresh the page.
SDI1 Input Audio
Item Display
CH1 - CH16
Loss
PCM
Silence
Non-PCM
PCM(Async)
Silence (Async)
Non-PCM(Async)
Unknown
Description
Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 -
CH16 of the SDI1 input signal.
Loss: No audio signals
PCM: Normal audio signal
Silence: Mute signal
Non-PCM: Compressed audio data such as AC3
PCM (Async): Normal audio signal (asynchronous)
Silence (Async) : Mute signal (asynchronous)
Non-PCM (Async) : Compressed audio data such as AC3 (asynchronous)
Unknown: Unidentifiable
SDI2 Input Audio
Item Display
CH1 - CH16
Loss
PCM
Silence
Non-PCM
PCM(Async)
Silence (Async)
Non-PCM(Async)
Unknown
Description
Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 -
CH16 of the SDI2 input signal.
Loss: No audio signals
PCM: Normal audio signal
Silence: Mute signal
Non-PCM: Compressed audio data such as AC3
PCM (Async): Normal audio signal (asynchronous)
Silence (Async) : Mute signal (asynchronous)
Non-PCM (Async) : Compressed audio data such as AC3 (asynchronous)
Unknown: Unidentifiable
225
SDI1/2 Output Audio
Item
CH1 - CH16
CH1 - CH4
Display
PCM
Silence
Non-PCM
Unknown
Blank
BY-PASS
Loss
In
Description
Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 through CH16 of the SDI 1/2 output.
PCM: Normal audio signal
Silence: Mute signal
Non-PCM: Compressed audio data such as AC3
Unknown: Unidentifiable
Blank: No audio signal embedding
BY-PASS: By-passed through
SDI3/4 Output Audio
Item
CH1 - CH16
Display
PCM
Silence
Non-PCM
Unknown
Blank
BY-PASS
AES Output Audio
Item Display
CH1 - CH8
PCM
Silence
Non-PCM
Unknown
Input Setting
Description
Displays the status of audio signal channels CH1 through CH16 of the SDI 3/4 output.
PCM: Normal audio signal
Silence: Mute signal
Non-PCM: Compressed audio data such as AC3
Unknown: Unidentifiable
Blank: No audio signal embedding
BY-PASS: By-passed through
AES Input Audio
Item
CH1 - CH8
Display
Loss
PCM 48kHz
PCM 44.1kHz
PCM 32kHz
PCM Other
Silence 48kHz
Silence 44.1kHz
Silence 32kHz
Silence Other
Non-PCM
Output Setting
Description
Displays the status of the audio signal input to the
DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors.
Loss: No audio signals
PCM 48kHz: Normal audio signal (approx. 48kHz)
PCM 44.1kHz: Normal audio signal (approx.
44.1kHz)
PCM 32kHz: Normal audio signal (approx. 32kHz)
PCM Other: Normal audio signal (Other AES)
Silence 48kHz: Mute signal (approx. 48kHz)
Silence 44.1kHz: Mute signal (approx. 44.1kHz)
Silence 32kHz: Mute signal (approx. 32kHz)
Silence Other: Mute signal (Other AES)
Non-PCM: Compressed audio data such as AC3
Output Setting: Connector is set to Output
Description
Displays the status of the audio signal output from the
DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors.
PCM: Normal audio signal
Silence: Mute signal
Non-PCM: Compressed audio data such as AC3
Unknown: Unidentifiable
Input Setting: Connector is set to input
Analog Input Audio
Item Display Description
Displays status of the input audio signal in the
ANALOG AUDIO connector.
Loss: No audio signals
In: Input signal is present
Analog Output Audio
Item Display
CH1 - CH4
Silence
Out
Description
Displays status of the output audio signal from the
ANALOG AUDIO connector.
Silence: Mute signal
Out: Output signal is present
226
9-7-3. Unit Information
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5),
the Logout is not shown.
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Unit Version
Item
Serial No:
FPGA1
FPGA2
FPGA3
SOFT
Description
Displays the serial number of the FA-9520.
Displays the FPGA1 version.
Displays the FPGA2 version.
Displays the FPGA3 version.
Displays the software version of the FA-9520 in FA-9520 mode. (First 4 digits)
Displays the software version of the FA-9520 in FA-9500 mode. (Last 4 digits)
Option A Information
Displays the information of the optional installed expansion card in SLOT A. If no card is installed, “None” will be shown.
Option B Information
Displays the information of the optional installed expansion card in SLOT B. If no card is installed, “None” will be shown.
Option Information
Displays the installation status and information on options other than the expansion cards installed into SLOT A and SLOT B.
227
9-7-4. ANC Status
Click Refresh to update the settings.
Ancillary Input Stats
Displays the status of CEA608, WSS, and VI ancillary data detection.
The line number in which the ancillary data is in is displayed.
AFD Input Status
Displays the status of AFD detection in the input signal.
<When detecting AFD in input S2016-3 >
Detected: Displays as S2016-3 AFD& BAR.
AFD: Displays Active Format Description code in binary format.
AR: Didplays the aspect ratio as 4:3 or 16:9.
The detected AFD type is shown
Data: Displays the detected 8-byte data in hexadecimal format.
228
<When detecting AFD in input RP186 VI>
Detected: Displays as RP186VI.
AFD: Displays Active Format Description code in binary format.
Scan: Displays the Scanning System.
The detected AFD type is shown on the third row.
Data1-3: Displays the detected Data in hexadecimal format.
<When detecting AFD in input BT.1119-2 WSS >
Detected: Displays as BT.1119-2 WSS.
AFD: Displays Active Format Description code in binary format.
The detected AFD type is shown on the third row.
Bit13-0: Displays detected Bits 13 – 0 in hexadecimal format.
Ancillary Data Packet Input Status
Displays the status of ancillary data packets in an input SDI signal.
Displays the detected DID and SDID of the ancillary data in hexadecimal format, such as
DID/SDID: 05/30, if they are different from that of supported formats.
Displays the ancillary data name, such as S334-1CDP(708), if the DID and SDID of the ancillary data match that of supported formats.
See section 19. “FA-9520 Ancillary Data Packet Name List” for details on ancillary data
names, and DID and SDID of formats.
The status of up to 8 ancillary data can be displayed.
CONV1/2 Ancillary Output Status
Displays the status of CEA608 CC, BT. 1119-2 WSS, and RP186 VI ancillary data in the output luminance signals of Converters 1 and 2, and the line number where the data is inserted.
Status: Displays Present if ancillary data is inserted. Displays Absent if no ancillary data is
displayed. In such case, the line number display appears as
“Line: ---“. (See section 9-4-1
FS1/FS2 Video System for details on ANC Mode and V ANC setting.)
229
CONV1/2 S2016-3 Output Status
Displays the status of S2016-3 in Converter 1 and 2 output signals.
Status: Displays Present if ancillary data is inserted. Displays Absent if no ancillary data is
displayed.
AFD: Displays Active Format Description code in binary format.
AR: Displays the aspect ratio as 4:3 or 16:9 and the inserted AFD type.
Data: Displays the detected 8-byte data in hexadecimal format.
CONV1/2 VI Output Status
Displays the status of RP186 VI in Converters 1 and 2 output signals.
Status: Displays Present if ancillary data is inserted. Displays Absent if no ancillary data is
displayed.
AFD: Displays Active Format Description code in bynary format.
Scan: Displays the Scanning System and the inserted AFD type.
Data1-3: Displays the detected data in hexadecimal format.
CONV1/2 WSS Output Status
Displays the status of BT1119-2 WSS in Converters 1 and 2 output signals.
Status: Displays Present if ancillary data is inserted. Displays Absent if no ancillary data is
displayed.
AFD: Displays Active Format Description code in hexadecimal format and the AFD type.
Bit 13-0: Displays the inserted Bit13 to Bit0 in hexadecimal format.
CONV1/2 Ancillary Data Packet Output Status
Displays the content, names and inserted lines of the 4 total ancillary data packets inserted into Converter 1 and 2 output signals.
See section 19. “FA-9520 Ancillary Data Packet Name List” for details on ancillary data
names, and DID and SDID of formats.
Displays “----“ if no ancillary data is inserted.
230
9-8. Network Settings
Click
If the user name and password are not set in the USER SETTING page (see section 9-8-5), the
Logout is not shown.
Click the Network tab at the top of the page. The Network page will be displayed.
In at the top left, click
NETWORK SETTING to go to the NETWORK SETTING screen. In the same way, click SNMP
SETTING, TRAP SETTING, USER SETTING, or NETWORK RESTART to go to the respective page.
9-8-1. Network Information
Displays the network settings of the LAN1 port on the rear panel.
9-8-2. NETWORK SETTING
IMPORTANT
The web page may not be properly displayed if your PC does not have sufficient capacity
(CPU, memory, etc.). In such case, set Refresh Time to a value larger than 30.
The LAN1 port network settings screen will be displayed.
Item
IP Address
Default
192.168.0.10
Description
Allows you to set the LAN1 port IP address. A period “.” is used to separate each octet.
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway
255.255.255.0
0.0.0.0
Allows you to set the LAN1 port subnet mask. A period “.” is used to separate each octet.
Allows you to set the gateway. A period “.” is used to separate each octet.
Remote Port
Number
50010
Logo Port Number
Refresh Time
50020
10
Allows you to set the TCP port number for the
FA-95RU connection. *1
Allows you to set the TCP port number for the
FA-95LG GUI connection.
*2
Allows you to set the time (seconds) for refreshing the web screen.
231
After you are sure that all settings are appropriate, click Submit. After clicking Submit, restart the FA-9520 through the NETWORK RESTART page. Otherwise, the settings will not be applied.
*1 The Remote Port Number must match that of the FA-95RU.
*2 Logo Port Number settings in the FA-9520 and the FA-95LG GUI must match.
9-8-3. SNMP SETTING
This page allows you to set the SNMP settings. After you are sure that all settings are appropriate, click Submit. After clicking Submit, restart the FA-9520 through the NETWORK
RESTART page. Otherwise, the settings will not be applied.
SNMP System
Item
Setting Range
(Alphanumeric and symbolic characters)
Description sysName sysLocation sysContact
31 char max
31 char max
31 char max
Allows you to set the device name.
Allows you to enter comments regarding the device location.
Allows you to enter comments regarding the person in charge of the device.
If authentication has failed while the Enable Authen Trap checkbox is selected, a trap will be generated.
Access Community
Item
Setting Range
(Alphanumeric and symbolic characters)
Description
Read Only1
Read Only2
Read/Write1
Read/Write2
19 char max
19 char max
19 char max
19 char max
Read only SNMP community name
Read only SNMP community name
Read/Write SNMP community name
Read/Write SNMP community name
232
Trap Setting
Item
Trap1 Address
Trap2 Address
Trap3 Address
Trap1 Community
Trap2 Community
Trap3 Community
Setting Range
(Alphanumeric and symbolic characters)
---
---
---
19 char max
19 char max
19 char max
Description
The SNMP manager ’s IP address to which a trap is sent.
The SNMP manager ’s IP address to which a trap is sent.
The SNMP manager ’s IP address to which a trap is sent.
The community name that sends a trap to Trap1
Address.
The community name that sends a trap to Trap2
Address.
The community name that sends a trap to Trap3
Address.
233
9-8-4. TRAP SETTING
Allows you to control SNMP trap transmission. Check the check box of a trap to be sent, then
click Submit. Uncheck to stop sending. See the TRAP List in section 18 “About SNMP (Simple
Network Management Protocol) ” for details.
Unit Trap
Allows you to select whether to send fan and power unit alarm traps.
Default is to send.
Item Description
FAN1
FAN2
Power1
*1
Power2
*1
Check to send an alarm trap for Fan1.
Check to send an alarm trap for Fan2.
Check to send an alarm trap for Power1.
Check to send an alarm trap for Power2.
*1 Not shown if the FA-95PS option is not installed.
Video Trap
Allows you to select whether to send traps for Input/output video signal changes.
Default is not to send.
Item Description
SDI 1 In Check to send a trap for SDI In 1.
SDI 2 In
Composite In
Check to send a trap for SDI In 2.
Check to send a trap for Composite In.
Reference
SDI 1/2 Out
SDI 3/4 Out
Check to send a trap for Reference.
Check to send a trap for SDI Out 1/2.
Check to send a trap for SDI Out 3/4.
Composite Out Check to send a trap for Composite Out.
FA-95AIO Option A In
*1
Check to send a trap for FA-95AIO Option A input video.
FA-95AIO Option A Out
*1
Check to send a trap for FA-95AIO Option A output video.
FA-95AIO Option B In
*2
Check to send a trap for FA-95AIO Option B input video.
FA-95AIO Option B Out
*2
Check to send a trap for FA-95AIO Option B output video.
*1 Shown if the FA-95AIO option is installed in option slot A.
*2 Shown if the FA-95AIO option is installed in option slot B.
Audio Trap
Allows you to select whether to send traps for Input/output audio signal changes.
No traps are sent in the default setting.
Item Description
SDI 1/2 OutCH1-16
SDI 3/4 OutCH1-16
Check to send a trap for SDI 1/2 audio output channels.
Check to send a trap for SDI 3/4 audio output channels.
AES Out CH1-8
Analog Out CH1-4
Check to send a trap for AES audio output channels.
Check to send a trap for analog audio output channels.
234
9-8-5. USER SETTING
This page allows you to set the user name and password for accessing the FA-9520.
The default settings are:
User Name: fa9520
Password: foranetwork
Item
Setting Range
(Alphanumeric and symbolic characters)
Description
User Name 15 char max Allows you to set the user name.
Password 15 char max Allows you to set the password.
Re-enter
Password
15 char max Allows you to confirm the password.
The authentication dialog box will not appear at the next login if the User Name and Password setting boxes are left empty.
Changes will be applied after rebooting or 9-8-6 “Restart” is performed.
9-8-6. Restart
Click Restart to reboot the FA-9520. The FA-9520 performs the same operation as when it is on. Note that the video and audio signals will be distorted while rebooting the FA-9520.
235
10. Downmix Block Diagram
<Surround Mix (Lt/Rt)>
Ls/Rs surround channels are summed to produce a mono surround channel and mixed to right and left channels by the 180 degree phase difference. (LFE channel is discarded.)
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
<Stereo Mix (Lo/Ro)>
For Stereo Monitors
Gain Adjust
1： CENTER MIX level setting
2： SURROUND MIX level setting
3： MASTER LVL setting
* LFE channel is not subjected to the mix.
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
<Monaural Mix (Lo+Ro/Lo+Ro)>
For Monaural Monitors
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
Gain Adjust
1： CENTER MIX level setting
2： SURROUND MIX level setting
3： MASTER LVL setting
* LFE channel is not subjected to the mix.
Gain Adjust 1： CENTER MIX level setting
2： SURROUND MIX level setting
3： MASTER LVL setting
* LFE channel is not subjected to the mix.
236
11. ANALOG/DIGITAL Audio Input/Output Level
11-1. Analog Output Level Relative to the Digital Input Level
Digital Reference Level: -18dBFS
ANALOG OUT LEVEL setting
Digital audio input level -10 dBm
-24 dBFS
-20 dBFS
-18 dBFS
0 dBFS
-16 dBm
0 dBm
-6 dBm
4 dBm
-2 dBm
8 dBm
+2 dBm
-12 dBm -2 dBm +2 dBm +6 dBm
-10 dBm 0 dBm +4 dBm +8 dBm
+8 dBm +18 dBm +22 dBm CLIP
Digital Reference Level: -20dBFS
ANALOG OUT LEVEL setting
Digital audio input level -10 dBm 0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm
-24 dBFS
-20 dBFS
-18 dBFS
0 dBFS
-14 dBm -4 dBm
-10 dBm 0 dBm
0 dBm +4 dBm
+4 dBm +8 dBm
-8 dBm +2 dBm +6 dBm +10 dBm
+10 dBm +20 dBm +24 dBm CLIP
Digital Reference Level: -24dBFS
ANALOG OUT LEVEL setting
Digital audio input level -10 dBm 0 dBm
-24 dBFS
-20 dBFS
-18 dBFS
0 dBFS
-10 dBm
-6 dBm
-4 dBm
+0 dBm
+4 dBm
+6 dBm
+14 dBm +24 dBm
4 dBm
+4 dBm
+8 dBm
+10 dBm
CLIP
8 dBm
+8 dBm
+12 dBm
+14 dBm
CLIP
See REF LEVEL in section 6-11-2. "DIGITAL AUDIO" for details on the Digital
Reference Level setting.
See section 6-3-3. "ANALOG OUT LEVEL" for details on the ANALOG OUT
LEVEL setting.
237
11-2. Digital Output Level Relative to the Analog Input Level
Digital Reference Level: -18dBFS
Analog audio input level
-20 dBm
-10 dBm
-4 dBm
0 dBm
4 dBm
8 dBm
10 dBm
-10 dBm
ANALOG IN LEVEL setting
0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm
-28 dBFS -38 dBFS -42 dBFS -46 dBFS
-18 dBFS -28 dBFS -32 dBFS -36 dBFS
-12 dBFS -22 dBFS -26 dBFS -30 dBFS
-8 dBFS -18 dBFS -22 dBFS -26 dBFS
-4 dBFS -14 dBFS -18 dBFS -22 dBFS
0 dBFS -10 dBFS -14 dBFS -18 dBFS
CLIP -8 dBFS -12 dBFS -16 dBFS
Digital Reference Level: -20dBFS
Analog audio input level
-20 dBm
-10 dBm
-4 dBm
0 dBm
4 dBm
8 dBm
10 dBm
-10 dBm
ANALOG IN LEVEL setting
0 dBm 4 dBm 8 dBm
-30 dBFS -40 dBFS -44 dBFS -48 dBFS
-20 dBFS -30 dBFS -34 dBFS -38 dBFS
-14 dBFS -24 dBFS -28 dBFS -32 dBFS
-10 dBFS -20 dBFS -24 dBFS -28 dBFS
-6 dBFS -16 dBFS -20 dBFS -24 dBFS
-2 dBFS -12 dBFS -16 dBFS -20 dBFS
0 dBFS -10 dBFS -14 dBFS -18 dBFS
Digital Reference Level: -24dBFS
Analog audio input level
-20 dBm
-10 dBm
-4 dBm
0 dBm
4 dBm
8 dBm
10 dBm
-10 dBm
ANALOG IN LEVEL setting
0 dBm 4 dBm 8dBm
-34 dBFS -44 dBFS -48 dBFS -52 dBFS
-24 dBFS -34 dBFS -38 dBFS -42 dBFS
-18 dBFS -28 dBFS -32 dBFS -36 dBFS
-14 dBFS -24 dBFS -28 dBFS -32 dBFS
-10 dBFS -20 dBFS -24 dBFS -28 dBFS
-6 dBFS -16 dBFS -20 dBFS -24 dBFS
-4 dBFS -14 dBFS -18 dBFS -22 dBFS
See REF LEVEL in section 6-11-2. "DIGITAL AUDIO" for details on the Digital
Reference Level settings.
See section 6-3-1. "ANALOG IN LEVEL" for details on the ANALOG IN LEVEL
settings.
238
12. Analog Audio Connection
For balanced input and output, connect the hot and cold wires of an analog audio signal to plus and minus pins respectively.
For unbalanced input, connect the analog audio signal line to the plus pin and route the ground line to the minus pin and COM pin.
For unbalanced output, connect the analog audio signal line to the plus pin and the ground line to the COM pin.
Analog Audio IN/OUT Connector (25-pin D-sub, female, inch screws)
Pin Assignments
Pin No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
13
14
15
16
9
10
11
12
21
22
23
24
25
17
18
19
20
Setting
CH4 OUT+
CH4 OUT COM
CH3 OUT-
CH2 OUT+
CH2 OUT COM
CH1 OUT-
CH4 IN+
CH4 IN COM
CH3 IN-
CH2 IN+
CH2 IN COM
CH1 IN-
NC
CH4 OUT-
CH3 OUT+
CH3 OUT COM
CH2 OUT-
CH1 OUT+
CH1 OUT COM
CH4 IN-
CH3 IN+
CH3 IN COM
CH2 IN-
CH1 IN+
CH1 IN COM
239
13. Dolby E Decoder/Encoder Channel Assignment Table
Dolby E Decoder Output / Encloder Input Channel Assignment
Program Configuration
5.1+2
5.1+2×1
Out/In
Ch1
1L
1L
1L
Out/In
Ch2
1R
1R
1R
Out/In
Ch3
1C
1C
1C
Out/In
Ch4
1LFE
1LFE
1S
Out/In
Ch5
1Ls
1Ls
2C
Out/In
Ch6
1Rs
1Rs
2S 4+4
4+2×2
4+2+2×1
1L
1L
1R
1R
1C
1C
1S
1S
3L
3C
3R
4C
4+4×1
4×2
3×2+2×1
2×2+4×1
1L
1L
1L
1L
1R
1R
1R
1R
1C
3L
3L
3C
1S
3R
3R
4C
4C
4L
4C
5C
5C
4R
5C
6C
Dolby E
2+6×1
8×1
5.1
4+2
4+2×1
3×2
2×2+2×1
2+4×1
1L
1C
1L
1L
1L
1L
1L
1L
1R
2C
1R
1R
1R
1R
1R
1R
4C
3C
1C
1C
1C
3L
3C
4C
5C
4C
1LEF
1S
1S
3R
4C
5C
6C
5C
7C
6C
1Ls 1Rs
None None
None None
None None
None None
None None
6×1
4
2+2
2+2×1
4×1
7.1
7.1screen
1C
1L
1L
1L
1C
1L
1L
2C
1R
1R
1R
2C
1R
1R
Out/In
Ch7
2L
2C
2L
2L
2L
2C
2L
2L
2L
Out/In
Ch8
2R
3C
2R
2R
2R
3C
2R
2R
2R
2C
7C
3C
8C
None None
2L 2R
2S
2L
2L
2C
3C
2R
2R
3C
3C
1C
4C
1S
5C 6C
None None None None
None None None None
None None None None
None None
2L
2C
2R
3C
3C
1C
1C
4C
1LFE
1LFE
None
1Ls
1Ls
None
1Rs
1Rs
None
1Bsl
1Le
None
1Bsr
1Re
Coding Mode
3/2L
3/2
2/2L
2/2
3/1L
3/1
Deolby Digital Decoder Output Channel Assignment
Out
Ch1
Out
Ch2
Out
Ch3
Out
Ch4
Out
Ch5
1L
1L
1L
1L
1L
1L
1R
1R
1R
1R
1R
1R
1C
1C
None
None
1C
1C
1LFE
None
1LFE
None
1LFE
None
1Ls
1Ls
1Ls
1Ls
1S
1S
Dolby Digital
PCM
2/1L
2/1
3/0L
3/0
2/0
1/0
1+1
1L
1L
1L
1L
1R
1R
1R
1R
1L 1R
None None
1C
1L
2C
1R
Out
Ch6
1Rs
1Rs
1Rs
1Rs
1S
1S
Out
Ch7
None
None
None
None
None
None
Out
Ch8
None
None
None
None
None
None
None 1LFE
None None
1C
1C
1S
1S
1S
1S
None
None
None
None
1LFE None None None None
None None None None None
None None None None None None
1C None None None None None
None None None None None None
None None None None None None
240
14. REMOTE
14-1. REMOTE Connector
The pin assignments of the REMOTE (GPI) connector are as shown in the table below. The connector has seven ports. Although the pin assignments below cannot be changed, the input and output are selectable and the functions for GPI1 to GPI7 can also be selected.
REMOTE (GPI) Pin Assignments (9pin D-sub, male, inch screws)
Pin No. Setting
1 DC OUT
(Up to 200mA output current is available at 5.4V.)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
GPI 1 (input/output)
GPI 2 (input/output)
GPI 3 (input/output)
GPI 4 (input/output)
GPI 5 (input/output)
GPI 6 (input/output)
GPI 7 (input/output)
9 GND (ground)
See section 7-6. "GPI SETTING" for the function assignments for GPI1-GPI7.
For GPI inputs, the function is ON when a pin is shorted to ground and OFF when open.
14-2. GPI Input Circuit
FA-9520 inside
PINs 2-8
PIN 9
241
14-3. GPI Input Control
Level Control
The pin assigned function is enabled or disabled by the pulse level.
Trigger (state of pin)
OPEN:
CLOSE:
Function is OFF
Function is ON
OPEN
CLOSE
500msec or more pulse width 500msec or more pulse width
Pulse Control
The assigned pin function is triggered by changing the pin state between OPEN and CLOSE.
Trigger (state change of pin)
OPEN to CLOSE: Function is ON
Normal Pulse Control
500msec or more 500msec or more
OPEN
CLOSE
First
1.0sec or more second
IMPORTANT
Use the specified pulse width and duration. Otherwise the GPI inputs may not function properly.
Do not simultaneously close circuits for more than 1 pulse to prevent the GPI inputs from malfunctioning.
242
14-4. GPI Output Circuit
FA-9520 inside
+5.4V
PIN 1
PINs 2-8
PIN 9
Select external or internal power.
Protective resistor
5VDC
(external power)
IMPORTANT
Note that the allowed current for each GPI output circuit is 10mA and the external power supply should be 5VDC.
243
15. How to Install the FA-95DACBL
This section describes how to install the optional FA-95DACBL. If you have purchased the
FA-95DACBL with the FA-9520, this procedure is unnecessary since the FA-95DACBL has been factory installed.
15-1. Procedure
1. Turn off the power of the FA-9520 and disconnect the power cord.
2. Remove the 3 screws from the top panel, and 4 screws each from the right and left sides of the unit. Remove the top panel. (See the below picture.)
3. Remove the 2 screws from the blank panel on OPTION SLOT B. Keep these screws in a safe place to use later to secure the FA-95DACBL. (To install the FA-95DACBL in slot A, remove the screws from the blank panel on OPTION SLOT A.)
4. Connect the white connector of the FA-95DACBL to CN34. (See the below picture.)
244
5. Install the BNC connector panel of the FA-95DACBL into the slot from inside the unit. Secure the connector panel with the screws that were removed from the blank panel. (See the below picture.)
6. If you have install the FA-95DACBL in slot A, set switch 5 in the S2 DIP switch to OFF.
If you have installed it into slot B, set switch 5 in the S2 DIP switch to ON.
7. Return and secure the top panel onto the unit with the 3 screws on top, and 4 screws each on the right and left sides of the unit.
15-2. Installation Confirmation
Confirm the status of the FA-95DACBL on the front panel menu. See sections 7-9 “OPTION A
The menu appears as shown below, if the FA-95DACBL is installed; in SLOT A
O P T I O N A V e r .
N A M E : F A - 9 5 D A C B L
F P G A 1 : - - . - -
F P G A 2 : - - . - -
S O F T : - - . - -
2 9 9
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER in SLOT B
O P T I O N B V e r .
N A M E : F A - 9 5 D A C B L
F P G A 1 : - - . - -
F P G A 2 : - - . - -
S O F T : - - . - -
3 0 0
Menu button
STATUS
OTHER
IMPORTANT
Four connectors of the FA-95DACBL digital audio expansion option can be used for outputs. If the FA-95DACBL option is installed, the DIGITAL AUDIO IO connectors can
only be used for inputs and the AES I/O SETUP menu (section 6-2-4) is not
accessible.
245
16. FA-95AIO Option
16-1. FA-95AIO Pin Assignments
Be sure to use the supplied FA-95AIO connection cable.
FA-95AIO Connector (15-pin D-sub female inch screws)
Pin Assignment (15-pin D-sub female)
Pin No. Connector Signal
1
2
Y/G IN
Pb/B IN
Y/G IN
Pb/B/C IN
3
4
5
6
Pr/R IN
Y/G OUT
Pr/R IN
GND
GND
Y/G OUT
7
8
9
10
Pb/B OUT
Pr/R OUT
Pb/B/C OUT
Pr/R OUT
GND
GND
11
12
GND
GND
13
14
GND
GND
15 GND
When BY-PASS is enabled, Y/G IN - Y/G OUT, Pb/B IN - Pb/B OUT, and Pr/R IN - Pr/R OUT are connected.
FA-95AIO connection cable PC-3307-1
Y/G IN
Pb/B IN
PC-3307-1
Pr/R IN
Y/G OUT
Pb/B OUT
Pr/R OUT
246
16-2. FA-95AIO Switch Settings
IMPORTANT
Note that internal switch settings should not be changed from factory defaults. If you have accidentally changed the setting, refer to the Dipswitch S1 settings below to return to the factory default setting.
Futher note that adjustments and maintenance should only be performed by qualified technical personnel familiar with FOR-A equipment.
WARNING
Do not access MU internal cards or make connections with unit power ON. Always power OFF the main unit prior to accessing the interior.
Do not touch other components on the card to avoid damage from static electricity.
Dipswitch S1 settings
Pin No. Default
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Do not change
Description
247
17. System Requirements
To use with the FA-9520, your computer must meet the following requirements.
OS Windows® XP operating system SP2 or later
Professional (32bit)
Windows Vista® operating system
Business (32bit)
Windows® 7 operating system
Professional
(32bit/64bit)
Browser Firefox®20.0 Firefox®20.0
CPU Pentium® 4 processor
2.8GHz or higher
Intel® Core processor
™2 Duo
2GHz or higher
Windows® Internet
Explorer 10,
Firefox®20.0
Intel® Core ™2 Duo processor
2GHz or higher
Memory
Display
Network
512MB or more 2GB or more 2GB or more
1280×1024 pixels or more resolution, 24-bit full-color
Ethernet (100BASE-TX/1000BASE-T), 1 port or more
Network cable Enhanced Category 5 or higher
Network protocol SNMPv2c, HTTP
IMPORTANT
When using Internet Explorer 8, Windows Updates after 6/13/2011 must be downloaded for proper performance. It is highly recommended to keep your computer updated with the latest Windows Updates.
PCs that do not meet the above system requirements may not proplely display web pages.
We recommend the use of a Firefox web browser.
248
18. About SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
The FA-9520 can be remotely monitored and some of its settings can be remotely changed using the SNMPv2C protocol. Some menu items can also be set via the network. MIB (Management
Information Base) is required for the monitoring and can be downloaded (see section 9-6-3
"Downloading a MIB File"). See section 9-8-3 "SNMP SETTING" for details about the SNMP
network settings.
SET/GET List (Dark grey-shaded commands are not supported.)
○: Available
Object group
－: Unavailable
Front TITLE Item name
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.1. (Unit info)
Unit Info
－
－
－
－
Product Name
Product Code
Unit Name
Serial No.
Soft
Settings
Model name
Product code
Unit name
Serial number
Software version
Object name in MIB file fa952ProductName fa952ProductCode fa952UnitName fa952SerialNumber fa952SoftVersion
Unit Ver.
FPGA1 Ver
FPGA2 Ver
FPGA3 Ver
OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.1.100. (Software option)
FPGA1version
FPGA2 version
FPGA3 version fa952FPGA1Version fa952FPGA2Version fa952FPGA3Version
Soft Option
SOFT
OPTION1/2
FA-95SCNV
FA-95AVO
FA-95-3G
FA-95CO
FA-95LG
0: notInstalled
1: installed
0: notInstalled
1: installed
0: notInstalled
1: installed
0: notInstalled
1: installed
0: notInstalled
1: installed fa952ScnvOption fa952AvoOption fa952-3GOption fa952CoOption fa952LGOption
OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.1.200.1 (Option Slot A)
OPTION Slot A OPTION A Ver
Name
0: notInstalled
1: FA-95AIO
4: FA-95DE-E
5: FA-95D-D
11: FA-95DACBL
12: Unknown
15:FA-95ALA fa952SlotTypeA fa952FPGA1VerSlotA fa952FPGA2VerSlotA fa952CPUVerSlotA
FPGA1 Ver
FPGA2 Ver
SOFT Ver
OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.1.200.2 (Option Slot B)
SlotA FPGA1 version
SlotA FPGA2 version
SlotA Software version
OPTION Slot B OPTION B Ver
Name
0: notInstalled
1: FA-95AIO
4: FA-95DE-E
5: FA-95D-D
11: FA-95DACBL
12: Unknown
15:FA-95ALA
SlotA FPGA1 version FPGA1 Ver
FPGA2 Ver
SOFT Ver
SlotA FPGA2 version
SlotA Software version
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.2.2. (Input video signal selection)
0: SDI1
FS1 Input Select
1: SDI2
2: Composite
3: OpA
4: OpB
INPUT SEL
VIDEO IN
SETTING
If no signal is present
0: Back Color
FS1Video Loss Mode 1: Auto Freeze
2: Color Bar
3: Output Disable
FS2 Input Select
0: SDI1
1: SDI
2: Composite
3: OpA
4: OpB
If no signal is present
0: Back Color
FS2Video Loss Mode 1: Auto Freeze
2: Color Bar
3: Output Disable
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.2.3 (Output video signal selection)
SDI 1/2 OUT SET Assign
SDI 3/4 OUT SET Assign
0: FS1
1: FS2
0: FS1
1: FS2
OUT SEL
COMPOSITE
SET
OpA SEL
OpB SEL
Assign
Assign
Assign
0: FS1
1: FS2
0: FS1
1: FS2
0: FS1
1: FS2
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.2.4 Video System
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.2.4.1（FS Mode)
0: FRAME
FS Mode
FS1 SYNCHRO
MODE
FS2 SYNCHRO
MODE
1: LINE
3：AVDL
0: FRAME
1: LINE
3：AVDL
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.2.4.2（System Format)
VIDEO SYSTEM
0: Auto
1: 525/60
2:625/50
3: 1080/59.94i
4:1080/50i
FS1 System Format 5: 720/59.94p
6:720/50p
7:1080/23PsF
8:1080/24PsF
19:1080/59p
20:1080/50p fa952SlotTypeB fa952FPGA1VerSlotB fa952FPGA2VerSlotB fa952CPUVerSlotB fa952FS1VideoInputSelect fa952VideoLossMode fa952FS1VideoInputSelect fa952VideoLossMode fa952OutSDI1-2Sel fa952OutSDI3-4Sel fa952OutCompositeSel fa952OutOpASel fa952OutOpBSel fa952FS1VideoSyncMode fa952FS2VideoSyncMode fa952VideoSystemFormat
OID Type
1 OCTET STRING
2 INTEGER
3 OCTET STRING
4 INTEGER
11 OCTET STRING
12 OCTET STRING
13 OCTET STRING
14 OCTET STRING
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
5 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
5 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Trap Read
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
-
2 OCTET STRING(5|13) -
3 OCTET STRING(5|13) -
4 OCTET STRING(5|13) -
-
2 OCTET STRING(5|13) -
3 OCTET STRING(5|13) -
4 OCTET STRING(5|13) -
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
249
Object group Front TITLE Item name
FS2 System Format
Settings
0: Auto
1: 525/60
2:625/50
3: 1080/59.94i
4:1080/50i
5: 720/59.94p
6:720/50p
7:1080/23PsF
8:1080/24PsF
19:1080/59p
20:1080/50p
VIDEO SYSTEM
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.2.4.3.（FREEZE)
FS1 Freeze Enable
0: Off
1:ON
FREEZE
FS1 Freeze Mode
FS2 Freeze Enable
0: FRAME
1:field-Odd
2:field-Even
0: Off
1:ON
FS2 Freeze Mode
0: FRAME
1:field-Odd
2:field-Even
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.2.4.4. (Composite settings)
COMB
0: Adaptive 3D
1: Adaptive 2D
2: Trap Only COMPOSITE
NR Level
Cross Color
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.2.6（FS1Converter)
0-4: Off Level1-4
0-3: Off Level1-3
FS1 Converter
FS1 Converter
FS1CONV
IMPROVE
FS1CONV MODE
FS1Aspect(SD)
FS1Aspect(HD)
FS1Motion Sense
FS1Enhance
FS1Antialias H
FS1Antialias V
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.2.7（FS2Converter)
0: BY-PASS
1: SD
2: 1080i
3: 720p
4: 1080PsF
5: 1080p(3G)
0: AFD(4:3)
1: AFD-ALT(4:3)
2: AFD(16:9)
3: AFD(16:9)
4: Letterbox 16:9 top
5: Letterbox 14:9 top
6: Letterbox>16:9(4:3)
7: Fullframe 4:3
8: Letterbox 16:9
9: Letterbox 14:9
10: Fullframe 4:3 Alt 14:9
11: Letterbox 16:9 Alt 14:9
12: Letterbox 16:9 Alt 4:3
13: Letterbox>16:9(16:9)
14: Fullframe 16:9
15: Pillarbox 4:3
16: Fullframe 16:9 Protected
17: Pillarbox 14:9
18: Pillarbox 4:3 Alt 14:9
19: Fullframe 16:9 Alt 14:9
20: Fullframe 16:9 alt 4:3
0: AFD
1: AFD-ALT
2: Letterbox>16:9
3: Fullframe 16:9
4: Pillarbox 4:3
5: Fullframe 16:9 Protected
6: Pillarbox 14:9
7: Pillarbox 4:3 Alt 4:9
8: Fullframe 16:9 Alt 14:9
9: Fullframe 16:9 alt 4:3
1: Field
2: Frame(Odd 1st)
3: Frame(Even 1st)
4: Adaptive
0~8
-8~0~+8
-8~0~+8
FS2 Converter
FS2 Converter
FS2CONV
IMPROVE
FS2CONV MODE
FS2 Aspect(SD)
FS1Aspect(HD)
FS2Motion Sense
Enhance
Antialias H
Antialias V
0: BY-PASS
1: SD
2: 1080i
3: 720p
4: 1080PsF
5: 1080p(3G)
0: AFD(4:3)
1: AFD-ALT(4:3)
2: AFD(16:9)
3: AFD(16:9)
4: Letterbox 16:9 top
5: Letterbox 14:9 top
6: Letterbox>16:9(4:3)
7: Fullframe 4:3
8: Letterbox 16:9
9: Letterbox 14:9
10: Fullframe 4:3 Alt 14:9
11: Letterbox 16:9 Alt 14:9
12: Letterbox 16:9 Alt 4:3
13: Letterbox>16:9(16:9)
14: Fullframe 16:9
15: Pillarbox 4:3
16: Fullframe 16:9 Protected
17: Pillarbox 14:9
18: Pillarbox 4:3 Alt 14:9
19: Fullframe 16:9 Alt 14:9
20: Fullframe 16:9 alt 4:3
0: AFD
1: AFD-ALT
2: Letterbox>16:9
3: Fullframe 16:9
4: Pillarbox 4:3
5: Fullframe 16:9 Protected
6: Pillarbox 14:9
7: Pillarbox 4:3 Alt 4:9
8: Fullframe 16:9 Alt 14:9
9: Fullframe 16:9 alt 4:3
1: Field
2: Frame(Odd 1st)
3: Frame(Even 1st)
4: Adaptive
0～8
-8～0～+8
-8～0～+8
Object name in MIB file fa952VideoSystemFormat fa952FS1FreezeEnable fa95FS1FreezeMode fa952FS2FreezeEnable fa95FS2FreezeMode fa952VbsCombFilter fa952VbsNRFilter fa952VbsCrossColorFilter fa952FS1ConvertMode fa952FS1ConverterAspectSD fa952FS1ConverterAspectHD fa952FS1ConverterMotionSense fa952FS1ConverterEnhance fa952FS1ConverterAntiAliasH fa952FS1ConverterAntiAliasV fa952FS2ConvertMode fa952FS2ConverterAspectSD fa952FS2ConverterAspectHD fa952FS2ConverterMotionSense fa952FS1ConverterEnhance fa952FS1ConverterAntiAliasH fa952FS1ConverterAntiAliasV
250
OID Type
2 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
5 INTEGER
31 INTEGER
42 INTEGER
43 INTEGER
44 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
5 INTEGER
31 INTEGER
42 INTEGER
43 INTEGER
44 INTEGER
Write Read
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
Object group Front TITLE Item name
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.2.8（AVO)
AVO AVO SETTING Operation Mode
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.2.10(FA-95LG)
ASSIGN(FS1)
Keyer(FS1)
FA-95LG VIDEO OPTION
ASSIGN(FS2)
Keyer(FS2)
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.3.1.1（fa952AudioEmb1Assign)
Audio Audio SDI Audio Emb1 Assign
Settings
0: Off
1: Auto
2: Hold
ID: 1～256
0: OFF
1: ON
ID: 1～256
0: OFF
1: ON
Object name in MIB file fa952AvoMode fa95LgFS1Assign fa95LgFS1Keyer fa95LgFS2Assign fa95LgFS2Keyer
0:emb1Ch1
1:emb1Ch2
2:emb1Ch3
3:emb1Ch4
4:emb1Ch5
5:emb1Ch6
6:emb1Ch7
7:emb1Ch8
8:emb1Ch9
9:emb1Ch10
10:emb1Ch11
11:emb1Ch12
12:emb1Ch13
13:emb1Ch14
14:emb1Ch15
15:emb1Ch16
16: emb2Ch1
17: emb2Ch2
18: emb2Ch3
19: emb2Ch4
20: emb2Ch5
21: emb2Ch6
22: emb2Ch7
23: emb2Ch8
24: emb2Ch9
25: emb2Ch10
26: emb2Ch11
27: emb2Ch12
28: emb2Ch13
29: emb2Ch14
30: emb2Ch15
31: emb2Ch16
32:aesCh1
33:aesCh2
34:aesCh3
35:aesCh4
36:aesCh5
37:aesCh6
38:aesCh7
39:aesCh8
40:analogCh1
41:analogCh2
42:analogCh3
43:analogCh4
44:downMix1-L
45:downMix1-R
46:downMix2-L
47:downMix2-R
48:tone500Hz
49:tone1kHz
50:silence
51:dolbyDecodeOpACh1
52:dolbyDecodeOpACh2
53:dolbyDecodeOpACh3
54:dolbyDecodeOpACh4
55:dolbyDecodeOpACh5
56:dolbyDecodeOpACh6
57:dolbyDecodeOpACh7
58:dolbyDecodeOpACh8
59:dolbyDownMixOpA-L
60:dolbyDownMixOpA-R
61:dolbyEncodeOpACh1
62:dolbyEncodeOpBCh2
63:dolbyDecodeOpBCh1
64:dolbyDecodeOpBCh2
65:dolbyDecodeOpBCh3
66:dolbyDecodeOpBCh4
67:dolbyDecodeOpBCh5
68:dolbyDecodeOpBCh6
69:dolbyDecodeOpBCh7
70:dolbyDecodeOpBCh8
71:dolbyDownMixOpB-L
72:dolbyDownMixOpB-R
73:dolbyEncodeOpBCh1
74:dolbyEncodeOpBCh2
75:Loudness1-OpA-L
76:Loudness1-OpA-R
77:Loudness1-OpA-C
78:Loudness1-OpA-LFE
79:Loudness1-OpA-LS
80:Loudness1-OpA-RS
81:Loudness2-OpA-L
82:Loudness2-OpA-R
83:Loudness2-OpA-C
84:Loudness2-OpA-LFE
85:Loudness2-OpA-LS
86:Loudness2-OpA-RS
87:Loudness1-OpA-L
88:Loudness1-OpA-R
89:Loudness1-OpA-C
90:Loudness1-OpA-LFE
91:Loudness1-OpA-LS
92:Loudness1-OpA-RS
93:Loudness2-OpA-L
94:Loudness2-OpA-R
95:Loudness2-OpA-C
96:Loudness2-OpA-LFE
97:Loudness2-OpA-LS
98:Loudness2-OpA-RS
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh1 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh2 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh3 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh4 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh5 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh6 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh7
251
OID Type
1 INTEGER
Write Read
○ ○
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
1 INTEGER ○ ○
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
5 INTEGER
6 INTEGER
7 INTEGER
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
Object group
Audio
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.3.1.2（fa952AudioEmb2Assign)
Audio
Front TITLE
Audio SDI
Asdio SDI
Item name
Audio Emb1 Assign
Audio Emb2 Assign
Settings
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Object name in MIB file fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh8 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh9 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh10 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh11 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh12 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh13 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh14 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh15 fa952AudioEmbedded1OutAssignCh16
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
0:emb1Ch1
1:emb1Ch2
2:emb1Ch3
3:emb1Ch4
4:emb1Ch5
5:emb1Ch6
6:emb1Ch7
7:emb1Ch8
8:emb1Ch9
9:emb1Ch10
10:emb1Ch11
11:emb1Ch12
12:emb1Ch13
13:emb1Ch14
14:emb1Ch15
15:emb1Ch16
16: emb2Ch1
17: emb2Ch2
18: emb2Ch3
19: emb2Ch4
20: emb2Ch5
21: emb2Ch6
22: emb2Ch7
23: emb2Ch8
24: emb2Ch9
25: emb2Ch10
26: emb2Ch11
27: emb2Ch12
28: emb2Ch13
29: emb2Ch14
30: emb2Ch15
31: emb2Ch16
32:aesCh1
33:aesCh2
34:aesCh3
35:aesCh4
36:aesCh5
37:aesCh6
38:aesCh7
39:aesCh8
40:analogCh1
41:analogCh2
42:analogCh3
43:analogCh4
44:downMix1-L
45:downMix1-R
46:downMix2-L
47:downMix2-R
48:tone500Hz
49:tone1kHz
50:silence
51:dolbyDecodeOpACh1
52:dolbyDecodeOpACh2
53:dolbyDecodeOpACh3
54:dolbyDecodeOpACh4
55:dolbyDecodeOpACh5
56:dolbyDecodeOpACh6
57:dolbyDecodeOpACh7
58:dolbyDecodeOpACh8
59:dolbyDownMixOpA-L
60:dolbyDownMixOpA-R
61:dolbyEncodeOpACh1
62:dolbyEncodeOpBCh2
63:dolbyDecodeOpBCh1
64:dolbyDecodeOpBCh2
65:dolbyDecodeOpBCh3
66:dolbyDecodeOpBCh4
67:dolbyDecodeOpBCh5
68:dolbyDecodeOpBCh6
69:dolbyDecodeOpBCh7
70:dolbyDecodeOpBCh8
71:dolbyDownMixOpB-L
72:dolbyDownMixOpB-R
73:dolbyEncodeOpBCh1
74:dolbyEncodeOpBCh2
75:Loudness1-OpA-L
76:Loudness1-OpA-R
77:Loudness1-OpA-C
78:Loudness1-OpA-LFE
79:Loudness1-OpA-LS
80:Loudness1-OpA-RS
81:Loudness2-OpA-L
82:Loudness2-OpA-R
83:Loudness2-OpA-C
84:Loudness2-OpA-LFE
85:Loudness2-OpA-LS
86:Loudness2-OpA-RS
87:Loudness1-OpA-L
88:Loudness1-OpA-R
89:Loudness1-OpA-C
90:Loudness1-OpA-LFE
91:Loudness1-OpA-LS
92:Loudness1-OpA-RS
93:Loudness2-OpA-L
94:Loudness2-OpA-R
95:Loudness2-OpA-C
96:Loudness2-OpA-LFE
97:Loudness2-OpA-LS
98:Loudness2-OpA-RS fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh1 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh2 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh3 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh4 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh5 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh6 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh7 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh8 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh9 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh10 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh11
OID Type
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
1 INTEGER ○ ○
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
Write Read
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
252
Object group
Audio
Front TITLE
Asdio SDI
Item name
Audio Emb2 Assign
Settings
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Object name in MIB file fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh12 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh13 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh14 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh15 fa952AudioEmbedded2OutAssignCh16
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.3.2.3（fa952AudioAesOutAssign)
Audio Audio AES Audio AES Out Assign
0:emb1Ch1
1:emb1Ch2
2:emb1Ch3
3:emb1Ch4
4:emb1Ch5
5:emb1Ch6
6:emb1Ch7
7:emb1Ch8
8:emb1Ch9
9:emb1Ch10
10:emb1Ch11
11:emb1Ch12
12:emb1Ch13
13:emb1Ch14
14:emb1Ch15
15:emb1Ch16
16: emb2Ch1
17: emb2Ch2
18: emb2Ch3
19: emb2Ch4
20: emb2Ch5
21: emb2Ch6
22: emb2Ch7
23: emb2Ch8
24: emb2Ch9
25: emb2Ch10
26: emb2Ch11
27: emb2Ch12
28: emb2Ch13
29: emb2Ch14
30: emb2Ch15
31: emb2Ch16
32:aesCh1
33:aesCh2
34:aesCh3
35:aesCh4
36:aesCh5
37:aesCh6
38:aesCh7
39:aesCh8
40:analogCh1
41:analogCh2
42:analogCh3
43:analogCh4
44:downMix1-L
45:downMix1-R
46:downMix2-L
47:downMix2-R
48:tone500Hz
49:tone1kHz
50:silence
51:dolbyDecodeOpACh1
52:dolbyDecodeOpACh2
53:dolbyDecodeOpACh3
54:dolbyDecodeOpACh4
55:dolbyDecodeOpACh5
56:dolbyDecodeOpACh6
57:dolbyDecodeOpACh7
58:dolbyDecodeOpACh8
59:dolbyDownMixOpA-L
60:dolbyDownMixOpA-R
61:dolbyEncodeOpACh1
62:dolbyEncodeOpBCh2
63:dolbyDecodeOpBCh1
64:dolbyDecodeOpBCh2
65:dolbyDecodeOpBCh3
66:dolbyDecodeOpBCh4
67:dolbyDecodeOpBCh5
68:dolbyDecodeOpBCh6
69:dolbyDecodeOpBCh7
70:dolbyDecodeOpBCh8
71:dolbyDownMixOpB-L
72:dolbyDownMixOpB-R
73:dolbyEncodeOpBCh1
74:dolbyEncodeOpBCh2
75:Loudness1-OpA-L
76:Loudness1-OpA-R
77:Loudness1-OpA-C
78:Loudness1-OpA-LFE
79:Loudness1-OpA-LS
80:Loudness1-OpA-RS
81:Loudness2-OpA-L
82:Loudness2-OpA-R
83:Loudness2-OpA-C
84:Loudness2-OpA-LFE
85:Loudness2-OpA-LS
86:Loudness2-OpA-RS
87:Loudness1-OpA-L
88:Loudness1-OpA-R
89:Loudness1-OpA-C
90:Loudness1-OpA-LFE
91:Loudness1-OpA-LS
92:Loudness1-OpA-RS
93:Loudness2-OpA-L
94:Loudness2-OpA-R
95:Loudness2-OpA-C
96:Loudness2-OpA-LFE
97:Loudness2-OpA-LS
98:Loudness2-OpA-RS fa952AudioAesOutAssignCh1
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.3.3.3（fa952AudioAnalogOutAssign)
Ditto
0:emb1Ch1
1:emb1Ch2
Audio Audio Analog Audio Analog Out Assign
2:emb1Ch3
3:emb1Ch4
4:emb1Ch5
5:emb1Ch6 fa952AudioAesOutAssignCh2 fa952AudioAesOutAssignCh3 fa952AudioAesOutAssignCh4 fa952AudioAesOutAssignCh5 fa952AudioAesOutAssignCh6 fa952AudioAesOutAssignCh7 fa952AudioAesOutAssignCh8 fa952AudioAnalogOutAssignCh1
OID Type
12
13
14
15
16
1 INTEGER ○ ○
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
1
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
Write Read
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○
○
○
○
○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○
253
Object group
Audio
Front TITLE
Audio Analog
Item name
Audio Analog Out Assign
Settings
6:emb1Ch7
7:emb1Ch8
8:emb1Ch9
9:emb1Ch10
10:emb1Ch11
11:emb1Ch12
12:emb1Ch13
13:emb1Ch14
14:emb1Ch15
15:emb1Ch16
16: emb2Ch1
17: emb2Ch2
18: emb2Ch3
19: emb2Ch4
20: emb2Ch5
21: emb2Ch6
22: emb2Ch7
23: emb2Ch8
24: emb2Ch9
25: emb2Ch10
26: emb2Ch11
27: emb2Ch12
28: emb2Ch13
29: emb2Ch14
30: emb2Ch15
31: emb2Ch16
32:aesCh1
33:aesCh2
34:aesCh3
35:aesCh4
36:aesCh5
37:aesCh6
38:aesCh7
39:aesCh8
40:analogCh1
41:analogCh2
42:analogCh3
43:analogCh4
44:downMix1-L
45:downMix1-R
46:downMix2-L
47:downMix2-R
48:tone500Hz
49:tone1kHz
50:silence
51:dolbyDecodeOpACh1
52:dolbyDecodeOpACh2
53:dolbyDecodeOpACh3
54:dolbyDecodeOpACh4
55:dolbyDecodeOpACh5
56:dolbyDecodeOpACh6
57:dolbyDecodeOpACh7
58:dolbyDecodeOpACh8
59:dolbyDownMixOpA-L
60:dolbyDownMixOpA-R
61:dolbyEncodeOpACh1
62:dolbyEncodeOpBCh2
63:dolbyDecodeOpBCh1
64:dolbyDecodeOpBCh2
65:dolbyDecodeOpBCh3
66:dolbyDecodeOpBCh4
67:dolbyDecodeOpBCh5
68:dolbyDecodeOpBCh6
69:dolbyDecodeOpBCh7
70:dolbyDecodeOpBCh8
71:dolbyDownMixOpB-L
72:dolbyDownMixOpB-R
73:dolbyEncodeOpBCh1
74:dolbyEncodeOpBCh2
75:Loudness1-OpA-L
76:Loudness1-OpA-R
77:Loudness1-OpA-C
78:Loudness1-OpA-LFE
79:Loudness1-OpA-LS
80:Loudness1-OpA-RS
81:Loudness2-OpA-L
82:Loudness2-OpA-R
83:Loudness2-OpA-C
84:Loudness2-OpA-LFE
85:Loudness2-OpA-LS
86:Loudness2-OpA-RS
87:Loudness1-OpA-L
88:Loudness1-OpA-R
89:Loudness1-OpA-C
90:Loudness1-OpA-LFE
91:Loudness1-OpA-LS
92:Loudness1-OpA-RS
93:Loudness2-OpA-L
94:Loudness2-OpA-R
95:Loudness2-OpA-C
96:Loudness2-OpA-LFE
97:Loudness2-OpA-LS
98:Loudness2-OpA-RS
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Object name in MIB file fa952AudioAnalogOutAssignCh1 fa952AudioAnalogOutAssignCh2 fa952AudioAnalogOutAssignCh3 fa952AudioAnalogOutAssignCh4
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.3.4（fa952AudioMaster)
Audio Audio Master
Audio Master Mute
Emb1 Master Mute
Emb2 Master Mute
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON fa952AudioMasterMute fa952AudioEmbedded1MasterMute fa952AudioEmbedded2MasterMute
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.3.10.1（fa952LoudnessOpA)
Audio Loudness OpA
Loudness1 OpA Control
Loudness1 OpA Mesure
0: OFF
1: ON
0: STOP
1:START fa952Loudness1-OpAControl fa952Loudness1-OpAMesure
Loudness1 OpA Mesure
Clear
1:CLEAR fa952Loudness1-OpAMesureClear
Loudness2 OpA Control
0: OFF
1: ON fa952Loudness2-OpAControl
254
OID Type Write Read
1 INTEGER ○ ○
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
11 INTEGER
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
Object group Front TITLE Item name
Loudness2 OpA Mesure
Audio Loudness OpA
Loudness2 OpA Mesure
Clear
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.3.10.2（fa952LoudnessOpB)
Settings
0: STOP
1:START
1:CLEAR
Loudness1 OpB Control
Loudness1 OpB Mesure
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
Loudness1 OpB Mesure
Clear
1: clear
Audio Loudness OpB
Loudness2 OpB Control
Loudness2 OpB Mesure
0: OFF
1: ON
0: OFF
1: ON
Loudness2 OpB Mesure
Clear
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.4.（SYSTEM)
1: clear
System
BY-PASS
BY-PASS SDI OUT1
BY-PASS SDI OUT3
BY-PASS Composite
FS1 VIDEO TEST
SIGNAL
0:disable
1:enable
0:disable
1:enable
0:disable
1:enable
0: OFF
1: Full CB
2: 75% CB
3: SMPTE CB
4: RAMP
TEST SIGNAL
FS2 VIDEO TEST
SIGNAL
FS1 AUDIO TEST
SIGNAL
FS1 AUDIO TEST
SIGNAL
EXT AUDIO TEST
SIGNAL
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.5.1.(Unit alarm)
Ditto
0: Off
1: 1KHｚ Tone
0: Off
1: 1KHｚ Tone
0: Off
1: 1KHｚ Tone
UNIT UNIT ALARM
FAN1
FAN2
Power1
Power2
0: Normal
1: Stopped
0: Normal
1: Stopped
0: Normal
1: Ab normal
0: Normal
1: Ab normal
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.5.2.(Input/Output Video signal format）
00: Loss
01: 525/60i
02: 625/50i
03: 1080/60i
04: 1080/59i
05: 1080/50i
06: 1080/30PsF
07: 1080/29.97PsF
08: 1080/25PsF
09: 1080/24PsF
10: 1080/23.98PsF
11: 1080/60p
12: 1080/59p
13: 1080/50p
14: 1080/30p
VIDEO STATUS VIDEO IN STATUS
SDI 1 IN
15: 1080/29.97p
16: 1080/25p
17: 1080/24p
18: 1080/23.98p
19: 720/60p
20: 720/59p
21: 720/50p
22: 720/30p
23: 720/29.97p
24: 720/25p
25: 720/24p
26: 720/23.98p
27: 1035/60i
28: 1035/59i
29: Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31: DISABLE
32: none
33:cannotdetection
SDI 2 IN
Composite IN
Ditto
0: LOSS
1: 525/60
2: 625/50
30:BY-PASS fa952InSDI1 fa952InSDI2 fa952InComposite
Object name in MIB file fa952Loudness2-OpAMesure fa952Loudness2-OpAMesureClear fa952Loudness1-OpBControl fa952Loudness1-OpBMesure fa952Loudness1-OpBMesureClear fa952Loudness2-OpBControl fa952Loudness2-OpBMesure fa952Loudness2-OpBMesureClear fa952SDIIn1-Out1Bypass fa952SDIIn2-Out3Bypass
Fa952CompositeIn-Out1Bypass fa952FS1VideoTestSignal fa952FS2VideoTestSignal fa952FS1AudioTestSignal fa952FS1AudioTestSignal fa952ExtAudioTestSignal fa952Fan1Status fa952Fan2Status fa952Power1Status fa952Power2Status
OID Type
12 INTEGER
13 INTEGER
Write Read
○ ○
○ ○
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
11 INTEGER
12 INTEGER
13 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
4 INTEGER ○ ○
5 INTEGER
6 INTEGER
7 INTEGER
8 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
11 INTEGER
12 INTEGER
-
-
-
-
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○ ○
○
○
○
○
1 INTEGER ○ ○
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
○ ○
○ ○
255
Object group Front TITLE Item name
VIDEO STATUS VIDEO IN STATUS
Reference IN
SDI OUT 1 / 2
SDI OUT 3/4
Composite OUT
Option A IN
Option A OUT
Ditto
0: Loss
1: 525/60
2: 625/50
30: BY-PASS
31:Disable
00: Loss
01: 525/60i
02: 625/50i
03: 1080/60i
04: 1080/59i
05: 1080/50i
06: 1080/30PsF
07: 1080/29.97PsF
08: 1080/25PsF
09: 1080/24PsF
10: 1080/23.98PsF
11: 1080/60p
12: 1080/59p
13: 1080/50p
14: 1080/30p
15: 1080/29.97p
16: 1080/25p
17: 1080/24p
18: 1080/23.98p
19: 720/60p
20: 720/59p
21: 720/50p
22: 720/30p
23: 720/29.97p
24: 720/25p
25: 720/24p
26: 720/23.98p
27: 1035/60i
28: 1035/59i
29: Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31: DISABLE
32: none
33:cannotdetection
00: Loss
01: 525/60i
02: 625/50i
03: 1080/60i
04: 1080/59i
05: 1080/50i
06: 1080/30PsF
07: 1080/29.97PsF
08: 1080/25PsF
09: 1080/24PsF
10: 1080/23.98PsF
Settings
00: Loss
01: 525/60i
02: 625/50i
03: 1080/60i
04: 1080/59i
05: 1080/50i
06: 1080/30PsF
07: 1080/29.97PsF
08: 1080/25PsF
09: 1080/24PsF
10: 1080/23.98PsF
11: 1080/60p
12: 1080/59p
13: 1080/50p
14: 1080/30p
15: 1080/29.97p
16: 1080/25p
17: 1080/24p
18: 1080/23.98p
19: 720/60p
20: 720/59p
21: 720/50p
22: 720/30p
23: 720/29.97p
24: 720/25p
25: 720/24p
26: 720/23.98p
27: 1035/60i
28: 1035/59i
29: Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31: Disable
32: none
33:cannotdetection
00: Loss
01: 525/60i
02: 625/50i
03: 1080/60i
04: 1080/59i
05: 1080/50i
06: 1080/30PsF
07: 1080/29.97PsF
08: 1080/25PsF
09: 1080/24PsF
10: 1080/23.98PsF
11: 1080/60p
12: 1080/59p
13: 1080/50p
14: 1080/30p
15: 1080/29.97p
16: 1080/25p
17: 1080/24p
18: 1080/23.98p
19: 720/60p
20: 720/59p
21: 720/50p
22: 720/30p
23: 720/29.97p
24: 720/25p
25: 720/24p
26: 720/23.98p
27: 1035/60i
28: 1035/59i
29: Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31: Disable
32: none
33:cannotdetection
256
Object name in MIB file fa952InReference fa952OutSDI1-2 fa952OutSDI3-4 fa952OutComposite fa952InOpA fa952OutpA
OID Type Write Read
11 INTEGER ○ ○
21 INTEGER ○ ○
22 INTEGER ○ ○
23 INTEGER ○ ○
101 INTEGER ○ ○
102 INTEGER ○ ○
Object group
AUDIO INPUT
Front TITLE
VIDEO STATUS VIDEO IN STATUS
Item name
Option A OUT
Option B IN
Option B OUT
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.5.3.1.(EMB1 input audio status）
EMB1 IN AUDIO
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
Settings
11: 1080/60p
12: 1080/59p
13: 1080/50p
14: 1080/30p
15: 1080/29.97p
16: 1080/25p
17: 1080/24p
18: 1080/23.98p
19: 720/60p
20: 720/59p
21: 720/50p
22: 720/30p
23: 720/29.97p
24: 720/25p
25: 720/24p
26: 720/23.98p
27: 1035/60i
28: 1035/59i
29: Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31: DISABLE
32: none
33:cannotdetection
00: Loss
01: 525/60i
02: 625/50i
03: 1080/60i
04: 1080/59i
05: 1080/50i
06: 1080/30PsF
07: 1080/29.97PsF
08: 1080/25PsF
09: 1080/24PsF
10: 1080/23.98PsF
11: 1080/60p
12: 1080/59p
13: 1080/50p
14: 1080/30p
15: 1080/29.97p
16: 1080/25p
17: 1080/24p
18: 1080/23.98p
19: 720/60p
20: 720/59p
21: 720/50p
22: 720/30p
23: 720/29.97p
24: 720/25p
25: 720/24p
26: 720/23.98p
27: 1035/60i
28: 1035/59i
29: Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31: DISABLE
32: none
33:cannotdetection
00: Loss
01: 525/60i
02: 625/50i
03: 1080/60i
04: 1080/59i
05: 1080/50i
06: 1080/30PsF
07: 1080/29.97PsF
08: 1080/25PsF
09: 1080/24PsF
10: 1080/23.98PsF
11: 1080/60p
12: 1080/59p
13: 1080/50p
14: 1080/30p
15: 1080/29.97p
16: 1080/25p
17: 1080/24p
18: 1080/23.98p
19: 720/60p
20: 720/59p
21: 720/50p
22: 720/30p
23: 720/29.97p
24: 720/25p
25: 720/24p
26: 720/23.98p
27: 1035/60i
28: 1035/59i
29: Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31: DISABLE
32: none
33:cannotdetection
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
0: Loss
1: PCM
2: Silence
3: NON-PCM
4: PCM(Async)
5: Silence(Async)
6: NON-PCM(Async)
7: Unknown
8: Bypass
9: Blank
10:Disable
Object name in MIB file fa952OutpA fa952InOpA fa952OutpA fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch1 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch2 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch3 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch4 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch5 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch6 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch7 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch8 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch9 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch10 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch11 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch12 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch13 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch14 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch15 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn1Ch16
257
OID Type Write Read
102 INTEGER
○ ○
201 INTEGER ○ ○
202 INTEGER ○ ○
1 INTEGER - ○
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
5 INTEGER
6 INTEGER
7 INTEGER
8 INTEGER
9 INTEGER
10 INTEGER
11 INTEGER
12 INTEGER
13 INTEGER
14 INTEGER
15 INTEGER
16 INTEGER
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Object group Front TITLE Item name
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.5.3.2.(EMB2 input audio status）
Settings
CH1
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
0: Loss
1: PCM
2: Silence
3: NON-PCM
4: PCM(Async)
5: Silence(Async)
6: NON-PCM(Async)
7: Unknown
8: Bypass
9: Blank
10:Disable
AUDIO INPUT EMB2 IN AUDIO
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.5.3.3.(AES input audio status)
AUDIO INPUT AES IN AUDIO
CH1
0: Loss
1: PCM 48kHz
2: PCM 44.1kHz
3: PCM 32kHz
4: PCM Other
5: Silence 48kHz
6: Silence 44.1kHz
7: Silence 32kHz
8: Silence Other
9: NON-PCM
10: Unknown
11: notInputSetting
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
CH8
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.5.3.4.(ANALOG input audio status）
Ditto
CH1
0: Loss
1: IN
AUDIO 入力系 ANALOG IN AUDIO CH2
CH3
CH4
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.5.3.21.(SDI1-2 output audio status）
0: Loss
1: PCM
2: Silence
CH1
3: NON-PCM
4: PCM(Async)
5: Silence(Async)
6: NON-PCM(Async)
7: Unknown
8:BY-PASS
9:Blank
10:Disable
AUDIO OUTPUT
SDI1-2 Embeded
Audio Out
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
CH9
CH9
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
CH14
CH15
CH16
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.5.3.23.(AES output audio status）
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
CH10
CH11
CH12
CH13
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
AUDIO OUTPUT
SDI3-4 Embeded
Audio Out
CH14
CH15
Ditto
Ditto
CH16
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.5.3.22.(SDI3-4 output audio status）
Ditto
CH1
0: Loss
1: PCM
2: Silence
3: NON-PCM
4: PCM(Async)
5: Silence(Async)
6: NON-PCM(Async)
7: Unknown
8:BY-PASS
9:Blank
10:Disable
CH2
CH3
CH4
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
CH5
CH6
CH7
CH8
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
AUDIO OUTPUT AES OUT AUDIO CH1
0: Loss
1: PCM
2: silence
3: NON-PCM
4: PCM(Async)
5: Silence(Async)
Object name in MIB file fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch1 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch2 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch3 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch4 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch5 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch6 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch7 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch8 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch9 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch10 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch11 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch12 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch13 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch14 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch15 fa952StatusSdiEmbIn2Ch16 fa952StatusAesInCh1 fa952StatusAesInCh2 fa952StatusAesInCh3 fa952StatusAesInCh4 fa952StatusAesInCh5 fa952StatusAesInCh6 fa952StatusAesInCh7 fa952StatusAesInCh8 fa952StatusAnalogInCh1 fa952StatusAnalogInCh2 fa952StatusAnalogInCh3 fa952StatusAnalogInCh4 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch1(1) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch2(2) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch3(3) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch4(4) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch5(5) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch6(6) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch7(7) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch8(8) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch9(9) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch10(10) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch11(11) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch12(12) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch13(13) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch14(14) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch15(15) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut1-2Ch16(16) fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch1 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch2 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch3 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch4 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch5 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch6 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch7 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch8 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch9 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch10 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch11 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch12 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch13 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch14 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch15 fa952StatusSdiEmbOut3-4Ch16 fa952StatusAesOutCh1
258
OID Type Write Read
1 INTEGER -
○
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
5 INTEGER
6 INTEGER
7 INTEGER
8 INTEGER
9 INTEGER
10 INTEGER
11 INTEGER
12 INTEGER
13 INTEGER
14 INTEGER
15 INTEGER
16 INTEGER
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1 INTEGER -
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
5 INTEGER
6 INTEGER
7 INTEGER
8 INTEGER
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1 INTEGER - ○
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
5 INTEGER
6 INTEGER
7 INTEGER
8 INTEGER
9 INTEGER
10 INTEGER
11 INTEGER
12 INTEGER
13 INTEGER
14 INTEGER
15 INTEGER
16 INTEGER
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1 INTEGER - ○
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
5 INTEGER
6 INTEGER
7 INTEGER
8 INTEGER
9 INTEGER
10 INTEGER
11 INTEGER
12 INTEGER
13 INTEGER
14 INTEGER
15 INTEGER
16 INTEGER
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
1 INTEGER - ○
Object group Front TITLE
AUDIO OUTPUT AES OUT AUDIO
Item name
CH1
CH2
CH3
CH4
CH5
Settings
6: NON-PCM(Async)
7: Unknown
8: notOutputSetting
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
CH6
CH7
Ditto
Ditto
CH8
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307.5.3.24.(Analog output audio status）
Ditto
0: Silence
CH1
1: Out
AUDIO OUTPUT
ANALOG Out
AUDIO
CH2 Ditto
CH3
CH4
Ditto
Ditto
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307..5.3.50(Option A loudness status)
Momentary IN
Short Term IN
Long Term IN
LOUDNESS
MEAS1A
Momentary OUT
Short Term OUT
Loudness
Option A
Long Term OUT
Session Time
Momentary IN
Short Term IN
Long Term IN
Momentary OUT
LOUDNESS
MEAS2A
Short Term OUT
Long Term OUT
Session Time
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307..5.3.51(Option B loudness status)
Loudness
Option B
LOUDNESS
MEAS1A
Momentary IN
Short Term IN
Long Term IN
Momentary OUT
Short Term OUT
Long Term OUT
Session Time
Momentary IN
LOUDNESS
MEAS2A
Short Term IN
Long Term IN
Momentary OUT
Short Term OUT
Long Term OUT
Session Time
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307..5.3.100(Option A Dolby status)
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
Elapsed time
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
Elapsed time
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
Elapsed time
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
-99.9～0
Elapsed time
Dolby
Option A
AUX IN
AUX OUT
Reference IN
0: loss
1: pcm
2: nonPCM
3: unknown
0: pcm
1: nonPCM
2: none
00: Loss
01: 525/60i
02: 625/50i
03: 1080/60i
04: 1080/59i
05: 1080/50i
06: 1080/30PsF
07: 1080/29.97PsF
08: 1080/25PsF
09: 1080/24PsF
10: 1080/23.98PsF
11: 1080/60p
12: 1080/59p
13: 1080/50p
14: 1080/30p
15: 1080/29.97p
16: 1080/25p
17: 1080/24p
18: 1080/23.98p
19: 720/60p
20: 720/59p
21: 720/50p
22: 720/30p
23: 720/29.97p
24: 720/25p
25: 720/24p
26: 720/23.98p
27: 1035/60i
28: 1035/59i
29: Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31: DISABLE
32: none
33:cannotdetection
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.307..5.3.100(Option A Dolby status)
AUX IN
AUX OUT
0: loss
1: pcm
2: nonPCM
3: unknown
0: pcm
1: nonPCM
2: none
Dolby
Option B
Reference IN
00: Loss
01: 525/60i
02: 625/50i
03: 1080/60i
04: 1080/59i
05: 1080/50i
06: 1080/30PsF
07: 1080/29.97PsF
08: 1080/25PsF
09: 1080/24PsF
10: 1080/23.98PsF
11: 1080/60p
12: 1080/59p
13: 1080/50p
14: 1080/30p
15: 1080/29.97p
16: 1080/25p
17: 1080/24p
18: 1080/23.98p
19: 720/60p fa952StatusDolbyOpAAuxIn fa952StatusDolbyOpAAuxOut fa952StatusDolbyOpARefIn fa952StatusDolbyOpBAuxIn fa952StatusDolbyOpBAuxOut fa952StatusDolbyOpBRefIn
Object name in MIB file fa952StatusAesOutCh1 fa952StatusAesOutCh2 fa952StatusAesOutCh3 fa952StatusAesOutCh4 fa952StatusAesOutCh5 fa952StatusAesOutCh6 fa952StatusAesOutCh7 fa952StatusAesOutCh8
OID Type
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER
5 INTEGER
6 INTEGER
7 INTEGER
8 INTEGER fa952StatusAnalogOutCh1 fa952StatusAnalogOutCh2 fa952StatusAnalogOutCh3 fa952StatusAnalogOutCh4
1 INTEGER
2 INTEGER
3 INTEGER
4 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness1-OpA-InMomentary 1 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness1-OpA-InShort fa952StatusLoudness1-OpA-InLong
2
3
INTEGER
INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness1-OpA-OutMomentary 4 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness1-OpA-OutShort 5 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness1-OpA-OutLong 6 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness1-OpA-SessionTime 7 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness2-OpA-InMomentary 11 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness2-OpA-InShort 12 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness2-OpA-InLong 13 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness2-OpA-OutMomentary 14 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness2-OpA-OutShort fa952StatusLoudness2-OpA-OutLong
15
16
INTEGER
INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness2-OpA-SessionTime 17 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness1-OpB-InMomentary 1 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness1-OpB-InShort 2 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness1-OpB-InLong 3 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness1-OpB-OutMomentary 4 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness1-OpB-OutShort fa952StatusLoudness1-OpB-OutLong
5
6
INTEGER
INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness1-OpB-SessionTime 7 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness2-OpB-InMomentary 11 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness2-OpB-InShort fa952StatusLoudness2-OpB-InLong
12
13
INTEGER
INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness2-OpB-OutMomentary 14 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness2-OpB-OutShort 15 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness2-OpB-OutLong 16 INTEGER fa952StatusLoudness2-OpB-SessionTime 17 INTEGER
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Write Read
- ○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
1
2
3
1
2
3
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
INTEGER
-
-
-
-
-
-
○
○
○
○
○
○
259
Object group Front TITLE Item name
Dolby
Option B
Reference IN
Settings
20: 720/59p
21: 720/50p
22: 720/30p
23: 720/29.97p
24: 720/25p
25: 720/24p
26: 720/23.98p
27: 1035/60i
28: 1035/59i
29: Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31: DISABLE
32: none
33:cannotdetection
Object name in MIB file fa952StatusDolbyOpBRefIn
OID Type Write Read
3 INTEGER - ○
260
TRAP List
Traps can be sent or not be sent by settings. See section 9-8-4
○: Available
－: Unavailable
Object Settings Object name in MIB file OID Type Write Read
Trap Trap
Valid Event (value)
OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.301.6.1.(UNIT TRAP)
0:Normal
FAN1
1:Stopped
FAN2
0: Normal
1: Stopped
Power1
Power2
-1: Not Install
0: Normal
1:Abnormal
-1: Not Install
0: Normal
1: Abnormal
OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.301.6.2.(VIDEO TRAP)
SDI 1 IN
00:Loss
01:525/60i
02:625/50i
03:1080/60i
04:1080/59i
05:1080/50i
06:1080/30PsF
07:1080/29.97PsF
08:1080/25PsF
09:1080/24PsF
10:1080/23.98PsF
11:1080/60p
12:1080/59p
13:1080/50p
14:1080/30p
15:1080/29.97p
16:1080/25p
17:1080/24p
18:1080/23.98p
19:720/60p
20:720/59p
21:720/50p
22:720/30p
23:720/29.97p
24:720/25p
25:720/24p
26:720/23.98p
27:1035/60i
28:1035/59i
29:Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31:Disable
32:none
SDI 2 IN
Composite IN
Ref Status
SDI OUT 1/2
Ditto
0：LOSS
1：525/60
2：625/50
29:Unknown
30:BY-PASS
00:Loss
01:525/60i
02:625/50i
03:1080/60i
04:1080/59i
05:1080/50i
06:1080/30PsF
07:1080/29.97PsF
08:1080/25PsF
09:1080/24PsF
10:1080/23.98PsF
11:1080/60p
12:1080/59p
13:1080/50p
14:1080/30p
15:1080/29.97p
16:1080/25p
17:1080/24p
18:1080/23.98p
19:720/60p
20:720/59p
21:720/50p
22:720/30p
23:720/29.97p
24:720/25p
25:720/24p
26:720/23.98p
27:1035/60i
28:1035/59i
29:Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31:Disable
32:none
00:Loss
01:525/60i
02:625/50i
03:1080/60i
04:1080/59i
05:1080/50i
06:1080/30PsF
07:1080/29.97PsF
08:1080/25PsF
09:1080/24PsF
10:1080/23.98PsF
11:1080/60p
12:1080/59p
13:1080/50p
14:1080/30p
15:1080/29.97p
16:1080/25p
17:1080/24p
18:1080/23.98p
19:720/60p fa952Fan1ChangedTrap fa952Fan2ChangedTrap fa952Power1ChangedTrap fa952Power2ChangedTrap fa952InSDI1ChangeTrap fa952InSDI2ChangeTrap fa952InCompositeChangeTrap fa952InRefChangeTrap fa952OutSDI1-2ChangeTrap
1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
11 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
12 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
3 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
11 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
21 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
261
Object Settings Object name in MIB file
SDI OUT 1/2
SDI OUT 3/4
Composite OUT
OpA IN SEL
20:720/59p
21:720/50p
22:720/30p
23:720/29.97p
24:720/25p
25:720/24p
26:720/23.98p
27:1035/60i
28:1035/59i
29:Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31:DISABLE
32:none
Ditto
0：LOSS
1：525/60
2：625/50
30:BY-PASS
0: FS1
1: FS2 fa952OutSDI1-2ChangeTrap fa952OutSDI3-4ChangeTrap fa952OutCompositeChangeTrap fa952InOpASel
OpB IN SEL
OpA OUT SEL
0: FS1
1: FS2
0: FS1
1: FS2 fa952InOpBSel fa952OutOpASel
OpB OUT SEL
0: FS1
1: FS2 fa952OutOpBSel
OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.301.6.3.(SDI-1-2 Audio TRAP)
SOURCE CH1
0:Loss
1:PCM
2:PCM 48kHz
3:PCM 44.1kHz
4:PCM 32kHz
5:PCM Other
6:Silence
7:Silence 48kHz
8:Silence 44.1kHz
9:Silence 32kHz
10:Silence Other
11:NON-PCM
12:PCM(Async)
13:Silence(Async)
14:NON-PCM(Async)
15:IN
16:Unknown fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh1StatusChangeTrap
SOURCE CH2
SOURCE CH3
SOURCE CH4
SOURCE CH5
SOURCE CH6
SOURCE CH7
SOURCE CH8
SOURCE CH9
SOURCE CH10
SOURCE CH11
SOURCE CH12
SOURCE CH13
SOURCE CH14
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh2StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh3StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh4StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh5StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh6StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh7StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh8StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh9StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh10StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh11StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh12StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh13StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh14StatusChangeTrap
SOURCE CH15
SOURCE CH16
Ditto
Ditto fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh15StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI1-2OPutAudioCh16StatusChangeTrap
OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.301.6.4.(SDI-3-4 Audio TRAP)
0:Loss
1:PCM
2:PCM 48kHz
3:PCM 44.1kHz
4:PCM 32kHz
5:PCM Other
6:Silence
SOURCE CH1
7:Silence 48kHz
8:Silence 44.1kHz
9:Silence 32kHz
10:Silence Other
11:NON-PCM
12:PCM(Async)
13:Silence(Async)
14:NON-PCM(Async)
15:IN fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh1StatusChangeTrap
16:Unknown
SOURCE CH2
SOURCE CH3
SOURCE CH4
SOURCE CH5
SOURCE CH6
SOURCE CH7
SOURCE CH8
SOURCE CH9
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh2StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh3StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh4StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh5StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh6StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh7StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh8StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh9StatusChangeTrap
SOURCE CH10
SOURCE CH11
SOURCE CH12
SOURCE CH13
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh10StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh11StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh12StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh13StatusChangeTrap
SOURCE CH14
SOURCE CH15
Ditto
Ditto fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh14StatusChangeTrap fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh15StatusChangeTrap
SOURCE CH16 Ditto fa952SDI3-4OPutAudioCh16StatusChangeTrap
OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.301.6.5.(AES Audio TRAP)
SOURCE CH1
0:Loss
1:PCM
2:PCM 48kHz
3:PCM 44.1kHz
4:PCM 32kHz
5:PCM Other
6:Silence
7:Silence 48kHz
8:Silence 44.1kHz
9:Silence 32kHz
10:Silence Other
11:NON-PCM
12:PCM(Async)
13:Silence(Async)
14:NON-PCM(Async)
15:IN
Fa952AES-OutAudioCh1StatusChangeTrap
16:Unknown
OID Type Write Read
Trap
Valid
Trap
Event (value)
21 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
22 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
23 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
4 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
5 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
4 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
5 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
3 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
4 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
5 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
6 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
7 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
8 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
9 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
10 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
11 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
12 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
13 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
14 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
15 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
16 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
3 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
4 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
5 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
6 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
7 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
8 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
9 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
10 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
11 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
12 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
13 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
14 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
15 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
16 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
262
Object Settings Object name in MIB file
OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.301.6.5.(AES Audio TRAP)
SOURCE CH2 Ditto Fa952AES-OutAudioCh2tatusChangeTrap
SOURCE CH3
SOURCE CH4
SOURCE CH5
SOURCE CH6
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Ditto
Fa952AES-OutAudioCh3StatusChangeTrap
Fa952AES-OutAudioCh4StatusChangeTrap
Fa952AES-OutAudioCh5StatusChangeTrap
Fa952AES-OutAudioCh6StatusChangeTrap
SOURCE CH7
SOURCE CH8
Ditto
Ditto
Fa952AES-OutAudioCh7tatusChangeTrap
Fa952AES-OutAudioCh8StatusChangeTrap
OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.301.6.5.(Analog Audio TRAP)
0:Loss
1:PCM
2:PCM 48kHz
3:PCM 44.1kHz
4:PCM 32kHz
5:PCM Other
6:Silence
SOURCE CH1
7:Silence 48kHz
8:Silence 44.1kHz
9:Silence 32kHz
10:Silence Other
11:NON-PCM
12:PCM(Async)
13:Silence(Async)
14:NON-PCM(Async)
15:IN
Fa952Analog-OutAudioCh1StatusChangeTrap
16:Unknown
SOURCE CH2
SOURCE CH3
Ditto
Ditto
SOURCE CH4 Ditto
OID:1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.301.6.7.(Dolby OpA)
AUX Input
0: Loss
1: PCM
2: NON-PCM
Reference Input
3: Unknown
00: Loss
01: 525/60i
02: 625/50i
03: 1080/60i
04: 1080/59i
05: 1080/50i
06: 1080/30PsF
07: 1080/29.97PsF
08: 1080/25PsF
09: 1080/24PsF
10: 1080/23.98PsF
11: 1080/60p
12: 1080/59p
13: 1080/50p
14: 1080/30p
15: 1080/29.97p
16: 1080/25p
17: 1080/24p
18: 1080/23.98p
19: 720/60p
20: 720/59p
21: 720/50p
22: 720/30p
23: 720/29.97p
24: 720/25p
25: 720/24p
26: 720/23.98p
27: 1035/60i
28: 1035/59i
29: Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31: Disable
32: none
Fa952Analog-OutAudioCh2StatusChangeTrap
Fa952Analog-OutAudioCh3StatusChangeTrap
Fa952Analog-OutAudioCh4StatusChangeTrap fa95DolbyOpAAuxInputChangedTrap fa95DolbyOpARefInputChangedTrap
OID: 1.3.6.1.4.1.20175.1.301.6.8(Dolby OpB)
0: Loss
AUX Input
1: PCM
2: NON-PCM
3: Unknown fa95DolbyOpBAuxInputChangedTrap
Reference Input
00: Loss
01: 525/60i
02: 625/50i
03: 1080/60i
04: 1080/59i
05: 1080/50i
06: 1080/30PsF
07: 1080/29.97PsF
08: 1080/25PsF
09: 1080/24PsF
10: 1080/23.98PsF
11: 1080/60p
12: 1080/59p
13: 1080/50p
14: 1080/30p
15: 1080/29.97p
16: 1080/25p
17: 1080/24p
18: 1080/23.98p
19: 720/60p
20: 720/59p
21: 720/50p
22: 720/30p fa95DolbyOpBRefInputChangedTrap
Reference Input
23: 720/29.97p
24: 720/25p
25: 720/24p
26: 720/23.98p
27: 1035/60i
28: 1035/59i
29: Unknown
30: BY-PASS
31: Disable
32: none fa95DolbyOpBRefInputChangedTrap
OID Type
2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
3 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
4 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
5 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
6 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
7 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
8 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
Write Read
Trap Trap
Valid Event (value)
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
○
○
○
○
○
○
○
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE - - ○
2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
3 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
4 NOTIFICATION-TYPE -
-
-
-
○
○
○
1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE - - ○
2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE - - ○
1 NOTIFICATION-TYPE - - ○
2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE - - ○
2 NOTIFICATION-TYPE - - ○
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
Change
263
19. FA-9520 Ancillary Data Packet Name List
FA-9520 Indication
DID/SDID
(hexadecimal)
S353MMPEG(V) 08/08
S353M MPEG(H) 08/0C
S305M SD-SDTI 40/01
S305M HD-SDTI 40/02
S427 Lk Enc 1
S427 Lk Enc 2
40/04
40/05
S427 Lk Meta
S352M VPID
40/06
41/01
S2016-3 AFD-Bar 41/05
S2016-4 PanScan 41/06
RP2010 SCTE 104 41/07
S2031 SCTE VBI 41/08
ITU-R BT.1685 43/01
RDD8 OP47(SDP) 43/02
RDD8 OP47(Mult) 43/03
S346M 43/13
RP214 KLV(V)
RP214 KLV(H)
44/04
44/14
RP223 UMID 44/44
S2020 Aud
S2020AudPr1/2
S2020AudPr3/4
S2020AudPr5/6
S2020AudPr7/8
45/01
45/02
45/03
45/04
45/05
S2020AudPr9/10 45/06
S2020AudPr11/12 45/07
S2020AudPr13/14 45/08
S2020 AudP15/16 45/09
RP215 Film Xfer
ARIB TRB.18
ARIB B.37
ARIB B.37 Mob
ARIB B.37 Ana
ARIB B.37 SD
ARIB B.37 HD
ARIB TR-B.22
ARIB TRB23(1)
ARIB TRB23(2)
51/01
5F/CF
1D0
・
・
2DB
5F/DC
5F/DD
5F/DE
5F/DF
5F/E0
5F/FA
5F/FB
Description
MPEG recoding data, VANC space (Picture rate information)
MPEG recoding data, HANC space (Other part of recording data set)
ARIB STD-B17 Serial Data Transport Interface for Television
ITU-R BT.1557, SMPTE 348M for HD-SDTI
SMPTE 427 Link Encryption Message 1
SMPTE 427 Link Encryption Message 2
SMPTE 427 Link Encryption Metadata
BTA S-004C Video Payload Identification for Digital Interfaces
SMPTE 2016-3 AFD and Bar Data
SMPTE 2016-3 Pan-Scan Data
SMPTE 2010 ANSI/SCTE 104 messages
SMPTE 2010 DVB/SCTE VBI data
ITU-R BT.1685 Inter-station control data packets
SMPTE RDD 8 Subtitling Distribution packet(SDP)
SMPTE RDD 8 Transport of ANC packet in an ANC Multipacket
Time Division Multiplexing Video Signals and Generic Data over HD-SDI
SMPTE RP 214 KLV Metadata transport in VANC space
SMPTE RP 214 KLV Metadata transport in HANC space
SMPTE RP 223 Packing UMID and Program Identification Label
Data into SMPTE 291M Ancillary Data Packets
SMPTE 2020-1 Compressed Audio Metadata
SMPTE 2020-1 Compressed Audio Metadata
SMPTE 2020-1 Compressed Audio Metadata
SMPTE 2020-1 Compressed Audio Metadata
SMPTE 2020-1 Compressed Audio Metadata
SMPTE 2020-1 Compressed Audio Metadata
SMPTE 2020-1 Compressed Audio Metadata
SMPTE 2020-1 Compressed Audio Metadata
SMPTE 2020-1 Compressed Audio Metadata
RP215 Film Codes in VANC space
Color information packets standarized in ARIB TR-B18
“Color Frame
Information for Component Interface of 525/60 Television System ”
Closed caption data packets (for expansion) standarized in ARIB STD-B37
“Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary
Data Packets
”
Caption format used in digital television broadcasting for mobile receivers standarized in ARIB STD-B37
“Structure and Operation of Closed Caption
Data Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets ”
Analog signal closed caption data packets standarized in ARIB STD-B37
“Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary
Data Packets
”
SD signal closed caption data packets standarized in ARIB STD-B37
“Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary
Data Packets
”
HD signal closed caption data packets standarized in ARIB STD-B37
“Structure and Operation of Closed Caption Data Conveyed by Ancillary
Data Packets ”
HD ancillary data packet for transmission standarized in ARIB TR-B22
“Operational Guidelines for Transport of the Ancillary Data for HDTV
Contribution
”
Dummy packet standarized in ARIB TR-B23
” Operational Guidelines for
Ancillary Data in InterStationary Information Exchange”
User data 2 in user data packets standarized in ARIB TR-B23 “ Operational
Guidelines for Ancillary Data in Inter-Stationary Information Exchang e”
264
FA-9520 Indication
ARIB TRB23(1)
DID/SDID
(hexadecimal)
5F/FC
ARIBB.35ProgEx
ARIB B.39
ARIB B.15
SMPTE 12-2 60/60
S334-1CDP(708) 61/01
S334-1 CEA608 61/02
S334-1 Teletxt
S334 SDE
61/03
61/04
334/207
S334-1 Future
S334/RP208
RP196/LTC
62/01
62/02
62/03
64/64
64/7F
1F4
RP196/VITC
RP165EDH
5F/FD
5F/FE
5F/FF
Description
User data 1 in user data packets standarized in ARIB TR-B23 “ Operational
Guidelines for Ancillary Data in Inter-
Stationary Information Exchange”
Trigger signal packets for data broadcasting standarized in ARIB STD-B35
“SD Data Program Exchange Specification for Digital Broadcasting”
Control signal packets for inter-studio transmission standarized in ARIB
STD-B39 “Structure of Inter-Stationary Control Data Conveyed by Ancillary
Data Packets
”
Resource ID packets standarized in ARIB STD-B15 “Resource
Identification Conveyed by Ancillary Data Packets for 52/60 and 1125/60
Television Systems ”
ARIB STD-B41 for time code
ITU-R BT.1619, SMPTE 334-1 closed captioning (EIA-708-B)
ITU-R BT.1619, SMPTE 334-1 EIA-608 data
World System Teletext Description Packet
Subtitling Data Essence (SDE)
ITU-R BT.1619, SMPTE RP207 DTV program description
ITU-R BT.1619, SMPTE 334-1 DTV data broadcasting
ITU-R BT.1619, SMPTE RP208 VBI data
Time code
Time code
SMPTE error detection indication
265
20. About AFD (Active Format Description)
The FA-9520 can provide aspect ratio conversion according to S2016-3, RP186 VI (Video Index), or
BT1119-2 WSS (Wide Screen Signalling) AFD code data in the ancillary data of input video signals.
The below figure depicts example aspect ratio conversions using AFD code data.
SD-SDI 4:3
SD-SDI 4:3 HD-SDI 16:9
Full frame
Up
Pillar box
Down
Postage stamp
SD-SDI 4:3
16:9 Letter box
Up
HD-SDI 16:9
Full frame
Full frame
AFD (Active Format
Description) having the original aspect ratio information of the input video enables aspect ratio conversion with an optimal image display area.
The bounding box indicates the AFD-coded screen size.
Postage stamp
Gray regions are picture areas that may be cropped by the receiving device, with no signaficant picture loss for the viewer.
The white region contains important image data.
Black regions indicate picture areas containing no useful image data that is to be cropped by the receiver as necessary.
266
20-1. AFD Codes
AFD 4:3 code
WSS name FA-9520-specified name
(VI, S2016) illustration in a 4:3 coded frame
BOX 16:9 TOP
BOX 14:9 TOP
4:3 L 16:9 T
4:3 L 14:9 T
BOX 16:9 CTR
F 4:3
BOX 16:9 CTR
BOX 14:9 CTR
4:3 L> 16:9
4:3 F 4:3
4:3L16:9PRTD
4:3 L 14:9
F 14:9 CTR PRTD
None
None
4:3 F ALT14:9
4:3 L ALT 14:9
4:3 L ALT 4:3
Description
Image with a 16:9 aspect ratio as a letterbox on top of a 4:3 coded frame.
Image with a 14:9 aspect ratio as a letterbox on top of a 4:3 coded frame.
Image with an aspect ratio greater than 16:9 as a vertically centered letterbox in a 4:3 coded frame.
Image is full frame, with an aspect ratio the same as that of the 4:3 coded frame.
Image with a 16:9 aspect ratio as a vertically centered letterbox in a 4:3 coded frame.
Image with a 14:9 aspect ratio as a vertically centered letterbox in a 4:3 coded frame.
Image with a 4:3 aspect ratio and with an alternative 14:9 center in a 4:3 coded frame.
Image with a 16:9 aspect ratio and alternative 14:9 center as a vertically centered letterbox in a 4:3 coded frame.
Image with a 16:9 aspect ratio and alternative 4:3 center as a vertically centered letterbox in a 4:3 coded frame.
267
AFD 16:9 code
None
None
None
None
None
WSS name FA-9520-specified name
(VI, S2016)
Illustration in a 16:9 coded frame
None
F 16:9 AMRPH
None
16:9 L>16:9
16:9 F 16:9
16:9 P 4:3
16:9 F PRTD
16:9 P 14:9
16:9PALT14:9
16:9FALT14:9
16:9 F ALT4:3
Description
Image with an aspect ratio greater than 16:9 as a vertically centered letterbox in a 16:9 coded frame.
Image is full frame, with an aspect ratio the same as that of the 16:9 coded frame.
Image with a 4:3 aspect ratio as a horizontally centered pillarbox image in a 16:9 coded frame.
Image is full frame, with a 16:9 aspect ratio and all image areas protected.
Image with a 14:9 aspect ratio as a horizontally centered pillarbox image in a 16:9 coded frame.
Image with a 4:3 aspect ratio and alternative 14:9 centered pillarbox image in a 16:9 coded frame.
Image with a 16:9 aspect ratio and alternative 14:9 center in a
16:9 coded frame.
Image with a 16:9 aspect ratio and alternative 4:3 center in a
16:9 coded frame.
268
20-2. Aspect Ratio Conversion with AFD
4:3 to 16:9 conversion
Input AFD
(WSS)
BOX 16:9 TOP
BOX 14:9 TOP
BOX 16:9 CTR
None
None
F 4:3
BOX 16:9 CTR
BOX 14:9 CTR
F 14:9 CTR
PRTD
Input AFD
(VI, S2016)
4:3 L 16:9 T
4:3 L 14:9 T
4:3 L> 16:9
4:3 F 4:3
4:3L16:9PRTD
4:3 L 14:9
4:3 F ALT14:9
4:3 L ALT 14:9
4:3 L ALT 4:3
Illustration in a 4:3 coded frame
SD: AFD (16:9) conv.
HD: AFD conversion
SD: AFD-ALT(16:9) conv.
HD: AFD-ALT conversion
269
4:3 to 4:3 conversion
Input AFD
(WSS)
BOX 16:9 TOP
BOX 14:9 TOP
BOX 16:9 CTR
None
None
F 4:3
BOX 16:9 CTR
BOX 14:9 CTR
F 14:9 CTR
PRTD
Input AFD
(VI, S2016)
4:3 L 16:9 T
4:3 L 14:9 T
4:3 L> 16:9
4:3 F 4:3
4:3L16:9PRTD
4:3 L 14:9
4:3 F ALT14:9
4:3 L ALT 14:9
4:3 L ALT 4:3
Illustration in a 4:3 coded frame
AFD (4:3) conversion
AFD-ALT (4:3) conversion
270
None
None
None
None
None
16:9 to 4:3 conversion
Input AFD
(WSS)
None
Input AFD
(VI, S2016)
16:9 L>16:9
F 16:9 AMRPH
None
16:9 F 16:9
16:9 P 4:3
16:9 F PRTD
16:9 P 14:9
16:9PALT14:9
16:9FALT14:9
16:9 F ALT4:3
Illustration in a 16:9 coded frame
AFD (4:3) conversion
AFD-ALT (4:3) conversion
271
None
None
None
None
None
16:9 to 16:9 conversion
Input AFD
(WSS)
None
Input AFD
(VI, S2016)
16:9 L>16:9
F 16:9 AMRPH
None
16:9 F 16:9
16:9 P 4:3
16:9 F PRTD
16:9 P 14:9
16:9PALT14:9
16:9FALT14:9
16:9 F ALT4:3
Illustration in a 16:9 coded frame
SD: AFD (16:9) conv.
HD: AFD conversion
SD: AFD-ALT(16:9) conv.
HD: AFD-ALT conversion
272
20-3. AFD Supported Video Formats
FA-9520 supports aspect ratio conversions according to SMPTE S2016-3, SMPTE
RP186-2008VI (Video Index), and ITU-R BT1119.2 WSS(Wide-Screen Signalling) standards.
AFD formats and their supported video formats are as shown in the table below.
Video Formats and AFD Support
Input video format S2016-3
RP186-2008
VI
BT1119.2
WSS
525/60
625/50
1080/59.94i
1080/50i
1080/23.98PsF
1080/24PsF
720/59.94p
720/50p
1080/59.94p
1080/50p
20-4. AFD Based Auto Aspect Conversion Settings
AFD system settings
To convert aspect ratios according to AFD codes, set basic operational settings in the VIDEO
SYSTEM menus as follows.
Set ANC MODE to DETAIL in ANC SET (Sec. 5-9-6).
Specify the line to detect RP186VI or BT1119 WSS in ANC DETECT LINE (Sec. 5-6-3).
The line must be correctly set for RP186VI and BT1119 WSS detection. S2016-3 data is automatically obtained from input signals. AFD data in S2016-3 is automatically obtained from the input HD-SDI signals,.
Select an AFD type to detect for SD-SDI input signals under AFD in ANC DETECT SEL
Select the AFD data to insert, and which output to insert the data in ANC DATA EMBED
(Sec. 5-7-4). These settings are necessary when inserting AFD data into video signals to
be output from CONV1 and/or 2.
To enable devices that receive signals from FA-9520 to detect ancillary data, select the ancillary data type, output video format/s for CONV1 and/or 2 output/s, and line number
into which the data is to be inserted in the ANC EMBED LINE menu (Sec. 5-7-5). The
default setting should be set to the line number usually used.
Select the operation mode when AFD input is lost in ANC LOSS SET (Sec. 5-9-7).
AFD verification
Auto aspect ratio conversion according to AFD data cannot be performed if there is no AFD
data present in the input signal. Whether the AFD data is detected can be verified in AFD IN
STATUS (Sec. 5-10-20), ANC1 IN STATUS (Sec. 5-10-21), and ANC1 IN STATUS 1-2 (Sec.
5-10-22). P186VI and BT1119 WSS states that appear as ABSENT indicate the absence of
AFD data that allows for auto conversion. For auto conversions using S2016-3, the data packet must be detected in the ANC IN STATUS1-2 menu. If no AFD data is detected, reset
AFD system settings. Also, check if any AFD data is being inserted using a waveform monitor.
273
FS1 and FS2 operation mode settings
Set the AFD auto-conversion mode for CONV 1 in CONV MODE (Sec. 5-3-1).
AFD output verification
AFD data status in FA1 and FA2 output video signals can be verified as follows:
The ANC OUT menu (Sec. 5-10-23) allows you to verify whether and in which line the VI
and WSS data has been inserted into output video signals.
VI and WSS output data details can be seen in VI OUT (5-10-25), and WSS OUT
S2016-3 output data details can be seen in S2016 OUT (Sec. 5-10-24).
Into which line S2016-3 is inserted can be seen inANC OUT1 (Sec. 5-10-27).
20-5. How to Insert AFD Data to Output Video Signals
FA-9520 can insert AFD data into input video signals that have no AFD data inserted.
AFD system settings
To insert AFD data into output video signals, set basic operational settings in the VIDEO
SYSTEM menus as follows.
Set ANC MODE to DETAIL in ANC SET (Sec. 5-9-6).
Select the AFD data to insert, and which output to insert the data in ANC DATA EMBED
(Sec. 5-7-4). These settings are necessary when inserting AFD data into video signals to
be output from FS1 and/or 2.
To enable devices that receive signals from FA-9520 to detect ancillary data, select the ancillary data type, output video format/s for FS1 and/or 2 output/s, and line number into
which the data is to be inserted in ANC EMBED LINE (Sec. 5-7-5). The default setting
should be set to the line number usually used.
FS1 and FS2 operation mode settings
Set the converter operation mode in CONV MODE (Sec. 5-3-1).
Set the specific aspect ratio under ASPECT in CONV MODE (Sec. 5-3-1). Select an
aspect ratio from among 4:3 L 16:9 T to 16:9F ALT4:3 for SD-SDI output video signals from FS1/FS2. Select from among 16:9 L>16:9 to 16:9F ALT4:3 for HD-SDI output video signals from FS1/FS2.
AFD output verification
AFD data status in FS1 and FS2 output video signals can be verified as follows:
The ANC OUT menu (Sec. 5-10-23) allows you to verify whether and in which line the VI
and WSS data has been inserted into CONV1 output video signals.
VI and WSS output data details can be seen in VI OUT (5-10-25), and WSS OUT
S2016-3 output data details can be seen in S2016 OUT (Sec. 5-10-24).
Into which line S2016-3 is inserted can be seen in ANC OUT1 (Sec. 5-10-27).
274
20-6. AFD Code Abbreviations
SMPTE S2016-3 AFD aspect ratio table
In a 4:3 coded frame In a 16:9 coded frame
UNDEFINED
RESERVED
4:3 L 16:9 T
4:3 L14:9 T
4:3 L>16:9
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
4:3 F 4:3
4:3 F 4:3
Undefined
Reserved
Letterbox 16:9 image, at top of the coded frame
Letterbox 14:9 image, at top of the coded frame
Letterbox image with an aspect ratio greater than
16:9, vertically centered in the coded frame
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
Full frame 4:3 image, the same as the coded frame
Full frame 4:3 image, the same as the coded frame
4:3 L16:9PRTD Letterbox 16:9 image, vertically centered in the coded frame with all image areas protected
4:3 L 14:9 Letterbox 14:9 image, vertically centered in the coded frame
RESERVED Reserved
4:3 F ALT14:9 Full frame 4:3 image, with alternative 14:9 center
4:3 L ALT14:9
4:3 L ALT 4:3
Letterbox 16:9 image, with alternative 14:9 center
Letterbox 16:9 image, with alternative 4:3 center
UNDEFINED Undefined
RESERVED Reserved
16:9 F 16:9
16:9 P 14:9
Full frame 16:9 image, the same as the coded frame
Pillarbox 14:9 image, horizontally centered in the coded frame
16:9 L>16:9
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
Letterbox image with an aspect ratio greater than
16:9, vertically centered in the coded frame
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
16:9 F 16:9
16:9 P 4:3
Full frame 16:9 image, the same as the coded frame
Pillarbox 4:3 image, horizontally centered in the coded frame
16:9 F PRTD Full frame 16:9 image, with all image areas protected
16:9 P 14:9 Pillarbox 14:9 image, horizontally centered in the coded frame
RESERVED Reserved
16:9P ALT14:9 Pillarbox 4:3 image, with alternative 14:9 center
16:9F ALT14:9 Full frame 16:9 image, with alternative 14:9 center
16:9 F ALT4:3 Full frame 16:9 image, with alternative 4:3 center
AFD
Code
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
275
SMPTE RP186-2008 VI AFD aspect ratio table
Description
RESERVED
RESERVED
BOX 16:9 TOP
BOX 14:9 TOP
Reserved
Reserved
Box 16:9 (top)
Box 14:9 (top)
BOX>16:9 CTR
RESERVED
RESERVED
RESERVED
AS THE CD FRM
4:3 CTR
16:9 CTR
14:9 CTR
Box > 16:9 (center)
Reserved
Reserved
Reserved
AFD Code
0000
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
0111
Active format is the same as coded frame 1000
4:3 (center) 1001
16:9 (center)
14:9 (center)
1010
1011
RESERVED
4:3 WITH 14:9 PRTD
Reserved
4:3 (with shoot and protect 14:9 center)
16:9 WITH 14:9 PRTD 16:9 (with shoot and protect 14:9 center)
16:9 WITH 4:3 PRTD 16:9 (with shoot and protect 4:3 center)
1100
1101
1110
1111
ITU-R BT.1119-2 WSS aspect ratio table
Description
F 4:3 full format 4:3
BOX 14:9 CTR
BOX 14:9 TOP
BOX 16:9 CTR
BOX 16:9 TOP box 14:9 center box 14:9 top box 16:9 center
BOX>16:9 CTR
F 14:9 CTR PRTD
F 16:9 AMRPH
AFD Code
1000
0001
0010
1011 box 16:9 top box
16:9 center
0100
1101 full format 14:9 center shoot and protect 14:9 1110 full format 16:9 anamorphic 0111
276
21. About Closed Captioning
The FA-9520 supports 3 closed caption standards; CEA608 CC, S334-1 CC SD, and CEA708 CC
HD.
Outline of each standard
CEA608 CC
Closed captioning for 525/60 video signals. Closed caption data is carried in line 21 in luminance level signals. Originally used for analog composite signals. The FA-9520 can detect CEA608CC data in analog composite and SD-SDI signals. Detection in analog Y/C, and YPbPr signals is not supported.
In the same manner, insertion into analog composite and SD-SDI signals is supported. Insertion into analog Y/C and YPbPr signals is not supported.
S334-1 CC SD
Data packet closed caption standard for SD-SDI, as defined by DID and SDID, in ancillary data.
The FA-9520 can detect and inset the data into 525/60 video signals.
CEA708 CC HD
Data packet closed caption standard for HD-SDI, as defined by DID and SDID, in ancillary data.
The FA-9520 can detect and inset the data into 1080/59i and 720/59p video signals.
Refer to SMPTE standard documents for details.
21-1. Closed Captioning Setting Procedure
Select an input signal type under IN SEL in the FS INPUT SELECT menu (see Sec.
If 525/60 SD-SDI signal is selected under IN SEL, specify the closed caption data type to
detect in ANC DETECT SEL (Sec. 5-6-4). If the selected input signal is 1080/59i or
720/59p, closed caption data will be automatically detected in CEA708 CC HD data.
The status of CEA608 CC closed caption data detection in input signals can be verified in
the ANC1 IN STATUS menu (see Sec. 5-10-21). The status of S334-1 CC SD or CEA708
CC HD can be verified in the ANC1 IN STATUS 1-2 menu (see Sec. 5-10-22).
To insert closed caption data into output video signals, enter the following settings, which can be separately set for converters 1 and 2.
Set ANC MODE to DETAIL in ANC SET (Sec. 5-9-6).
Select the converter output signal to which the data is to be inserted under EMBED in ANC
Whether closed caption data has been inserted can be verified in ANC OUT (Sec.
5-10-23) a for CEA608 CC, ANC OUT1 (Sec. 5-10-27) for S334-1 CC SD and CEA708
CC HD.
Closed caption data auto conversion
If CEA608 or S334-1 CC closed caption data is detected in SD-SDI input video signals, and the FS1 and/or FS2 output format is 1080/59i and/or 720/59p, the detected closed caption data will be converted to CEA708 CC HD. If EMBED is set to ENABLE for CEA708
CC HD in the ANC DATA EMBED menu (sec. 5-7-4), the converted closed caption data
will be automatically inserted into the output video signal. Meanwhile, if CEA708 CC HD closed caption data is detected in the 1080/59i or 720/59p input signal, and the FS1 and/or
FS2 output format is 525/60, the detected caption data will be converted to CEA608 and
S334-1 CC. The converted closed caption data will be inserted into output video signals
selected under EMBED in ANC DATA EMBED (Sec. 5-7-4).
277
22. Verification After Option Card Removal/Replacement
An alarm message described in section 22-1 Alert may appear when turning the FA-9520 on
after removing or changing the location of the FA-95D-D, FA-95DE-E, FA-95AIO, or FA-95ALA option. Press the F1 UNITY button to return to the normal startup screen.
The alarm message indicates settings, set while the FA-95D-D, FA-95DE-E, FA-95AIO, or
FA-95ALA option is being installed into option slots A and B, have not be retained due to the removal or change of the option or options. In such case, the settings that are only available with
those options will be reset to default. See section 22-2 “Verification After Dolby Option
correct the necessary settings, if you have removed the FA-95AIO. See section 22-4 “Verification
After FA-95ALA Removal/Replacement ” and correct the necessary settings, if you have
removed the FA-95ALA.
The alarm message appears only once when starting the FA-9520 after removing or changing the location of the FA-95D-D, FA-95DE-E, FA-95AIO, or FA-95ALA option.
22-1. Alert
S L O T O P T C H A N G E D 9 0 4
- - - - - W A R N I N G ! - - - - -
O P T I O N C A R D M I S S I N G !
C H E C K S E T T I N G S
P U S H F 1 T O C O N T I N U E
22-2. Verification After Dolby Option Removal/Replacement
Reset the following menu items if the FA-95D-D option card is removed or moved.
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 16 in the EMB1 OUT REMAP menu (Sec. 6-5-1)
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 8 in the EMB2 OUT REMAP menu (Sec. 6-5-2)
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 4 in the AES OUT REMAP menu (Sec. 6-5-3)
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 4 in the ANALOG OUT REMAP menu (Sec. 6-5-4)
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 4 in the LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT menu
Reset the following menu items if the FA-95DE-E option is removed.
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 16 in the EMB1 OUT REMAP menu (Sec. 6-5-1)
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 8 in the EMB2 OUT REMAP menu (Sec. 6-5-2)
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 8 in the AES OUT REMAP menu (Sec. 6-5-3)
OUTPUT settings in the Dolby AUX OUT menu (Sec. 6-10-1-1)
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 8 in the LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT menu
22-3. Verification After FA-95AIO Removal/Replacement
Reset the following menu items if the FA-95AIO option card is removed or moved.
IN SEL settings in the FS INPUT SELECT menu (Sec. 5-6-1)
INPUT/BY-PASS settings in the GPI SETTING menu (Sec. 7-6)
278
22-4. Verification After FA-95ALA Removal/Replacement
Reset the following menu items if the FA-95ALA option card is removed or moved.
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 16 in the EMB1 OUT REMAP menu (Sec. 6-5-1)
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 8 in the EMB2 OUT REMAP menu (Sec. 6-5-2)
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 8 in the AES OUT REMAP menu (Sec. 6-5-3)
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 4 in the ANALOG OUT REMAP menu (Sec. 6-5-4)
ASSIGN settings for CH 1
– CH 4 in the Dolby ENCODER INPUT menu (Sec. 6-10-1-6)
23. Expansion Slots A / B Alert
O P T B U S C H E C K
S L O T A : F A I L E D
S L O T B : S T A T U S O K
2 2 0
The above alert that appears after turning on the FA-9520 indicates an alarm or alarms for an option card or cards installed in the expansion slot A and/or B.
This indication appears only after powering on the FA-9520.
Indicates failure of the option card installed in the slot indicated as “FAILED”.
If this indiation appears, turn the power of the unit off immediately, and contact your service agency or distributor.
279
24. Specifications and Dimensions
24-1. Unit Specifications
Input Video Formats 1080/59.94p (Level-A), 1080/50p (Level-A), 1080/59.94i, 1080/50i,
1080/24PsF, 1080/23.98PsF, 720/59.94p, 720/50p,
525/60 (NTSC), 625/50 (PAL)
Output Video Formats 1080/59.94p (Level-A), 1080/50p (Level-A), 1080/59.94i, 1080/50i,
1080/24PsF, 1080/23.98PsF, 720/59.94p, 720/50p
525/60 (NTSC), 625/50 (PAL), PAL-M
Video Input 3G-SDI: 3 Gbps, HD-SDI: 1.5 Gbps or SDSDI: 270 Mbps, 75Ω, BNC x 2
Analog Composite: 1.0 Vpp, 75Ω, BNC x 1
Video Input
(FA-95AIO option)
Video Output
SDTV
YPbPr: 75 Ω, BNC (Y, Pb and Pr 1ea.)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p
Pb, Pr: 0.525 Vp-p (SMPTE level)
0.757 Vp-p (BETACAM level)
SMPTE and BETACAM menu selectable
Analog RGB: 1.0 Vp-p 75 Ω, BNC (R, G, and B 1 ea.)
Y/C: 1.0Vp-p 75 Ω, BNC (Y and C 1 ea.)
HDTV
YPbPr: 75 Ω, BNC (Y, Pb and Pr 1ea.)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p
Pb, Pr: 0.525 Vp-p
Analog RGB: 1.0 Vp-p 75 Ω, BNC (R, G, and B 1 ea.)
3G-SDI: 3 Gbps or HD-SDI: 1.5 Gbps or SD-SDI: 270Mbps,
75 Ω, BNC x 4 (2 x 2 outputs)
Analog Composite: 1.0Vp-p, 7 5Ω, BNC x 2
Video Output
(FA-95AIO option)
Video I/O Process
Video Processing
Quantization
SDTV
YPbPr: 75 Ω, BNC (Y, Pb and Pr 1ea.)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p
Pb, Pr: 0.525 Vp-p (SMPTE level)
0.757 Vp-p (BETACAM level)
SMPTE and BETACAM menu selectable
Analog RGB: 1.0 Vp-p 75 Ω, BNC (R, G, and B 1 ea.)
Y/C: 1.0Vp-p 75 Ω, BNC (Y and C 1 ea.)
HDTV
YPbPr: 75 Ω, BNC (Y, Pb and Pr 1ea.)
Y: 1.0 Vp-p
Pb, Pr: 0.525 Vp-p
Analog RGB: 1.0 Vp-p 75 Ω, BNC (R, G, and B 1 ea.)
3 inputs (standard) or 4 inputs (maximum input) > 1 processing < 2 x 2 outputs
4:2:2 Digital Component
3G/HD/SD-SDI: 10-bit
Analog Composite: 12-bit
Frequency Response
NTSC
PAL
DG/DP
S/N Ratio
Genlock Input
100 kHz to 4.2 MHz: -0.5 dB to +0.5 dB,
4.2 MHz to 5.0 MHz: -1.0 dB to +1.0 dB, roll off above 5.0 MHz (NTSC, composite)
100 kHz to 4.2 MHz: -0.5 dB to +0.5 dB,
4.2 MHz to 5.5 MHz: -1.0 dB to +1.0 dB, roll off above 5.5 MHz (PAL, composite)
1% / 1º (composite)
60 dB (without quantization noise, composite)
BB: NTSC: 0.429 Vp-p / PAL: 0.45 Vp-p; or Tri-level Sync: 0.6 Vp-p,
75Ω BNC x 1, loop-through (Terminate with 75Ω terminator, if unused.)
280
Synchronizer mode Frame Sync mode,
Line Sync mode,
AVDL mode,
System Phase Control
Frame Sync mode H phase: -1/2 H to +1/2 H
V phase: -1/2 frame to +1/2 frame
Maximum delay: 1 frame + 1H, Minimum delay: 1H
Line Sync mode H phase: -1/2 H to +1/2 H
V phase: -1/2 frame to +1/2 frame
Maximum delay: 1H +1/2 H, Minimum delay: 1/2 H
AVDL mode
Video Delay
Video Processing
Functions
H phase: -1/2 H to +1/2 H
V phase: -1/2 frame to +1/2 frame
Maximum delay: 5 H +1/2 H, Minimum delay: 1/2 H (HD)
Maximum delay: 1 H +1/2 H, Minimum delay: 1/2 H (SD)
Maximum 8 frames (Frame Sync or Input Sync)
Up/Down/Cross converter
Aspect ratio converter
Proc Amp
Color Corrector
Automatic video optimizer (AVO)
Second converter (Down/Cross/Aspect ratio)
Proc Amp
Video Clip
Color Correction
Video level: 0.0% to 200.0%
Chroma level: 0.0% to 200.0%
Black level: -20.0% to 100.0%
HUE: -179.8° to +180°
YP
B
P
R mode
RGB mode
Composite mode
Balance mode
Differential mode
Sepia mode
Audio Input
Embedded Audio 3G/HD: 16 channels (Group 1 to 4), 48 kHz, 16-bit to 24-bit, synchronous/asynchronous
SD: 16 channels (Group 1 to 4), 48 kHz, 16-bit to 24-bit, synchronous only
AES/EBU Unbalanced, 1.0 Vpp, 75Ω, BNC x 4 for AES/EBU input/output,
Maximum 4 pairs of stereo channels, 32/44.1/48 kHz, 16-bit to 24-bit
Analog Audio Balanced or unbalanced, 4 inputs (2 stereo channels),
25-pin D-sub (female) x 1 for analog audio input/output,
600Ω or High impedance, 48 kHz, 24-bit
Audio Output
Embedded Audio 3G/HD: 16 channels (Group 1 to 4), 48 kHz, 16/20/24-bit, synchronous/asynchronous
SD: 12 channels (Group 1 to 3), 48 kHz, 16/20/24-bit, synchronous only
AES/EBU Unbalanced, 1.0 Vpp, 75Ω, BNC x 4 for AES/EBU input/output,
Maximum 4 pairs of stereo channels, 48 kHz, 16-bit to 24-bit
Analog Audio Balanced or unbalanced, 4 outputs (2 stereo channels),
25-pin D-sub (female) x 1 for analog audio input/output, l ess than 100Ω, 48 kHz, 24-bit
Audio Delay
Audio Processing
Functions
(Set per channel)
2 ms - 1,000 ms (adjustable in 1 ms steps)
Sampling rate converter (SRC)
Gain control
Down mix
Channel re-mapping
Channel mute
Interfaces
Ethernet 10 Base-T / 100 Base-TX / 1000 Base-T, RJ-45 x 2
281
Remote (GPI) 9-pin D-sub (male) (7 terminals) x 1,
IN: TTL negative logic level signal or Make contact
OUT: Rated current 10mA (each terminal),
Absolute maximum current 40mA
FA-95D-D/FA-95DE-E Option
Audio Input
Audio Output
Reference Input
AES/EBU Unbalanced, 1.0 Vpp, 75Ω, BNC x 1, 48 kHz, 16-bit to 24-bit
AES/EBU Unbalanced, 1.0 Vpp, 75Ω, BNC x 1, 48 kHz, 16/20/24-bit
BB: NTSC: 0.429 Vp-p / PAL: 0.45 Vp-p; or Tri-level Sync: 0.6 Vp-p, 75Ω,
BNC x 1 (Internally 75Ω terminated)
FA-95AIO (Analog Component I/O) Option
Input Video
Formats
1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 1080/24PsF, 1080/23.98PsF, 720/59.94p,
720/50p
525/60 (NTSC), 625/50 (PAL)
Output Video
Formats
1080/59.94i, 1080/50i, 1080/24PsF, 1080/23.98PsF, 720/59.94p,
720/50p
525/60 (NTSC), 625/50 (PAL), PAL-M
FA-95ALA (Automatic Loudness Adjustment) Option
Supported standard ARIB TR-B32, ATSC A/85, EBU-R128, ITU-R BS.1770
Temperature 0ºC to 40ºC
Humidity
Power
30% to 90% (no condensation)
100 VAC - 240 VAC ±10%, 50/60 Hz
Power Consumption FA-9520: 60 VA (59 W) (at 100 - 120 VAC)
62 VA (56 W )(at 220 - 240 VAC) with FA-95PS: 60 VA (59 W) (at 100 - 120 VAC)
70 VA (59 W )(at 220 - 240 VAC)
Add the amount of power consumption of options installed:
FA-95D-D/DE-E: 4 VA (4 W) (at 100 - 120 VAC)
5 VA (5 W )(at 220 - 240 VAC)
FA-95D-D/DE-E: 6 VA (6 W) (at 100 - 120 VAC)
FA-95AIO:
FA-95ALA:
7 VA (7 W )(at 220 - 240 VAC)
8 VA (9 W) (at 100 - 120 VAC)
9 VA (9 W )(at 220 - 240 VAC)
8 VA (9 W) (at 100 - 120 VAC)
9 VA (9 W )(at 220 - 240 VAC)
Dimensions 430 (W) x 350 (D) x 44 (H) mm
Weight
Consumables
Accessories
Options
3.0 kg (without options)
FA-95D-D/DE-E: 0.3 kg
FA-95AIO: 0.3 kg (with a connection cable PC-3307-1)
FA-95ALA: 0.2 kg
FA-95PS: 0.3 kg (without AC cord)
(Recommended replacement timespans)
Power unit (within 5 years)
Cooling fan: P-1437 (FAN 1 and FAN 2) (within 6 years)
Operation manual, AC cord, rack mount brackets
◇FA-95PS: Redundant power supply unit
◇FA-95DACBL: Digital audio expansion connector cable
◇FA-95CO: Changeover function (FA-9500 mode function)
◇FA-95D-D: Dolby E/Dolby Digital decoder
◇FA-95DE-E: Dolby E encoder
◇FA-95AIO: Analog component I/O card
◇FA-95ALA: Automatic Loudness Adjustment
◇FA-95RU: Remote control unit
282
24-2. External Dimensions
N2 FA
N2
TE MO RE
N1
T OU UD AL DIG
CK GEN
T2 OU
E OS MP CO
T1 OU
UD OG AL A N
B
T4 OU T3 O U
S D
T2 O U T1 OU
A
N1 FA
(All dimensions in mm)
ON
POWER
OFF
PS1/LOCK
PS2/LOCK
EVENT
VIDEO IN FAN ALARM
AUDIO IN DC POWER
GENLOCK
REMOTE
F1
F2
F3
F4
DISPLAY
H D / S D F R A M E S Y N C H R O N I Z E R
FA- 9520
F1
UNITY
F2
UNITY
F3
UNITY
F4
UNITY
430
462
480
PROCESS
SDI AUDIO
C C
AES AUDIO
CONV 1
ANALOG
A V O
MAPPING
VIDEO OP
AUDIO OP
CLIP
DELAY
VID EO S YS
AU DIO S YS
IN SEL
DOW N MIX
STATUS
OTHER
CONV 2
MASTER
OUTSEL
MOD E
VIDEO
AUDIO
283
Index
２
2-Channel Frame Synchronizer Use
Ａ
22
About AFD
About Closed Captioning
266
277
About Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay
Settings(Web) 158
AC Cord Retaining Clip
Accessing Menus
AES Audio Input Hysteresis
AES Audio Input Settings (Web)
6
29
180
180
AES Audio Output Settings (Web)
AES AUDIO Settings (AES AUDIO)
AES HYSTERESIS
AES I/O SETUP
AES IN AUDIO
AES IN GAIN
AES OUT AUDIO
AES OUT GAIN
192
104
104
105
89
104
91
109
AES OUT MONO
AES OUT REMAP
AES POLARITY
AES SRC MODE
105
113
123
122
AFD 266
AFD Based Auto Aspect Conversion Settings
AFD Code Abbreviations
273
275
AFD Codes
AFD IN STATUS
AFD Supported Video Formats
AIO A ASSIGN
AIO A IN MODE
AIO B ASSIGN
AIO B IN MODE
AIO BY-PASS SET
267
94
273
63
61
64
61
78
Alert
Analog Audio Connection
Analog Audio Input (Web)
Analog Audio Output Settings (Web)
278
239
182
192
ANALOG AUDIO Settings (ANALOG) 106
ANALOG IN AUDIO 89
ANALOG IN DELAY
ANALOG IN GAIN
116
106
ANALOG IN LEVEL
ANALOG IN SYSTEM
106
107
284
ANALOG OUT AUDIO
ANALOG OUT GAIN
ANALOG OUT LEVEL
92
110
106
ANALOG OUT MONO
ANALOG OUT REMAP
107
114
Analog Output Level Relative to the Digital
Input Level 237
ANALOG POLARITY
ANC DATA EMBED
ANC DETECT LINE
ANC DETECT SEL
ANC EMBED LINE
ANC LOSS SET
ANC OUT
ANC OUT1
123
65
60
60
66
75
95
97
ANC SET
ANC Status (Web)
ANC1 IN STATUS
ANC1 IN STATUS 1-2
Ancillary Data Packet Name List
Ancillary Data Types
Anti-Aliasing
Arrow Buttons
Aspect Raito
Aspect Ratio Conversion with AFD
AUDIO DELAY
Audio Delay (Web)
AUDIO DELAY Settings
AUDIO ERR SENSE
AUDIO GROUP
AUDIO IN DETECT1
166
269
115
183
115
138
76
85
74
228
94
95
264
65
167
32
AUDIO IN DETECT2
AUDIO MAPPING (MAPPING)
Audio Mapping (Web)
Audio Master Gain Settings (Web)
AUDIO MODE SET (MODE)
AUDIO OPTION (AUDIO OP)
Audio Output Polarity (WEB)
AUDIO OUTPUT1
AUDIO OUTPUT3
AUDIO Settings
AUDIO Settings (Web)
Audio Status (Web)
86
98
177
225
Audio System (Web) 207
AUDIO SYSTEM Settings (AUDIO SYS) 137
Auto Channel Pairing for non-PCM Audio
Inputs 111
85
111
186
188
121
125
185
86
Auto Video Optimizer (AVO) 47
Auto Video Optimizer (AVO) (Web) 156
Automatic Loudness Adjustment (FA-95ALA)
132
Automatic Loudness Adjustment (WEB) 199
AVO SETTING
AVO Setup
AVO SETUP
47
158
48
Ｂ
Backup Parameter (Web)
Basic Operations
BLACK LEVEL
BY-PASS SETTING
BY-PASS Setting (Web)
Ｃ
CH STATUS
Changing Setting Values
Changing the Operation Mode
CLIP (VIDEO CLIP)
Closed Captioning
COLOR CORRECT (C.C.)
COLOR CORRECTION
COLOR CORRECTOR (C.C.)
Color Corrector (Web)
Color Corrector and AVO Modes
COMPOSITE CLIP
Composite Clip (Web)
Composite Output Format Table
COMPOSITE SET1
COMPOSITE SET2
Composite Settings (Web)
Connecting a Computer 26
Connecting to the REMOTE (GPI) Connector
Connecting via a WEB Browser
27
153
Connections
Consecutive Viewing of Settings
CONTROL SETTING
Control via WEB Browser
22
32
143
153
CONV (UP/DOWN/CROSS CONVERTER) 41
CONV Conversion Table 43
CONV CROPPING
CONV IMPROVE
44
45
CONV MODE
CONV SIDE RGB
CONV SIZE/POS
Converter (Web)
42
46
43
165
169
40
56
176
62, 175
80
80
214
139
34
142
55
277
39
159
37
219
28
38
77
164
285
Copy Settings Menus
CORRECTION
Correction Mode
Ｄ
141
139, 208
169
DIGITAL AUDIO 138
Digital Output Level Relative to the Analog
Input Level 238
DIGITAL SILENCE
Dipswitch Settings
Dolby A POLARITY
Dolby AUX OUT
140
21
124
125
Dolby AUX Output Select (WEB)
Dolby B POLARITY
Dolby DEC IN
Dolby DECODER GAIN
Dolby DECODER REFERENCE
Dolby DOWNMIX
Dolby E Decoder/Encoder Channel
Assignment Table
196
124
126
128
127
127
Dolby E Encoder (WEB)
Dolby E/Digital Decoder (WEB)
Dolby ENCODER INPUT
Dolby ENCODER SETTING
Dolby OPA AUX
Dolby OPB AUX
Down Mix Setting (Web)
DOWN MIX1 ASSIGN
240
197
193
129
130
92
93
DOWN MIX1 SET
DOWN MIX2 ASSIGN
DOWN MIX2 SET
Downloading a MIB File (Web)
Downmix Block Diagram
189
118
117
120
119
220
236
Ｅ
EMB 1 IN AUDIO
EMB 2 IN AUDIO
EMB1 IN DELAY
EMB1 IN GAIN
EMB1 IN SET
EMB1 OUT CLOCK
EMB1 OUT GAIN
EMB1 OUT MONO
EMB1 OUT REMAP
EMB1 POLARITY
EMB1 SRC MODE
EMB2 AUDIO CLOCK
EMB2 IN DELAY
EMB2 IN GAIN
111
122
121
103
115
101
87
88
115
98
99
100
108
98
EMB2 IN SET
EMB2 OUT GAIN
EMB2 OUT MONO
102
109
101
EMB2 OUT REMAP
EMB2 POLARITY
112
122
EMB2 SRC MODE 121
Embed AES Input Signals on SDI Signals 24
Embed Analog Audio Signals on SDI Signals
25
Enhance
Event Control
167
218
Event Data Backup (Web)
EVENT LOAD
Event Memory
EVENT SAVE
221
150
150
151
EVENT SETUP
Expansion Slots A / B Alert
External Dimensions
151
279
283
Ｆ
FA-9520 Operation Mode Change
FA-95AIO
FA-95AIO Option
FA-95AIO Switch Settings
FA-95DACBL
FA-95DACBL installation
FA-95D-D/DE-E
FADE IN / OUT
Frame Delay (Web)
FRAME DELAY Setting Range Chart
Freeze Mode Setting Chart
FREEZE Mode Table
FREEZE SET
FRONT OPERATION
Front Panel
Front Panel Operations
FRONT PANEL SET
FS INPUT SELECT
FS Input Select (Web)
FS MODE SET
FS1/FS2 COPY
Ｇ
162
49
204
74
73
143
16
28
143
58
155
70
141
142
20
246
247
19
244
20
137
GAMMA LEVEL
GPI (Web)
GPI Input Circuit
GPI Input Control
GPI INPUT FUNCTION
GPI Output Circuit
38
215
241
242
145
243
286
GPI OUTPUT FUNCTION
GPI SETTING
Ｈ
HD PHASE SET
HD/SD-SDI Simul Output
How to Install the FA-95DACBL
Ｉ
146
144
71
23
244
IN WHITE and IN BLACK 50
Insert AFD Data to Output Video Signals 274
Internal Settings 21
Ｋ
KEYER SET
Ｌ
69
Level Adjustment
Loading the Data Saved in a File
Logo Generator
Logo Position Setting Range
54
219
68
69
LOGO SELECT
LOSS Operation
68
59
LOUDNESS CHANNEL ASSIGNMENT 135
LOUDNESS CONTROL ENABLE 133
LOUDNESS CONTROL SETTINGS
LOUDNESS MEASUREMENT
LOUDNESS STANDARD
134
132
136
Ｍ
Manual Level Adjustment
MASTER OUT GAIN
Menu Buttons
METADATA INPUT
Motion Sense
MU OPERATION
Ｎ
NETWORK INFO
Network Information (Web)
NETWORK SETTING (Web)
Network Settings (Web)
Note on Event Memory Operation
Ｏ
OPTION A Ver.
OPTION B Ver.
OTHER OPTION
148
148
149
Other Settings & Information (OTHER) 141
OUTPUT ASSIGN 62
54
108
30
131
166
142
147
231
231
231
152
Output Assign (Web)
OUTPUT GAIN CONTROL
Ｐ
174
108
Page Jump Feature
Parameters That Are Not Stored in Event
33
Memories
Powering ON
Proc Amp (Web)
152
28
163
Ｒ
Rear Panel 18
Reference signals and Input formats 71, 205
REMOTE Connector
Resetting to Default
241
35
Restart (Web)
RGB CLIP
235
57
Ｓ
S2016 OUT
Scene Cut Detection
Scene Cut Detection and Frame Delay
95
Sample Area 48
Saving the FA-9500 Settings to a File 219
49
Settings
SD LINE MASK
SD PHASE SET
SDI 1/2 OUT AUDIO
49
79
72
90
SDI 3/4 OUT AUDIO
SDI Audio Output Settings (Web)
SDI AUDIO Settings (SDI AUDIO)
SDI Input (Web)
SET/GET List
SNMP
SNMP SETTING (Web)
SOFT OPTION1
91
191
98
178
249
249
232
149
SOFT OPTION2
Specifications
SRC Mode (Web)
Status Display (Web)
Switching Between 2-Channel Frame
Synchronizers
System Requirements
SYSTEM Settings (Web)
149
280
184
222
35
248
202
Ｔ
TARGET WHITE and TARGET BLACK 51
TEST SIGNAL
TRAP List
TRAP SETTING (Web)
77
261
234
287
Ｕ
UNIT ALARM
Unit Information (Web)
UNIT Ver.
Unit/Video Status (Web)
Unpluging the AC cord
User 1 - 5 LEVEL SET (Web)
User Area 1, 2 (Web)
USER SETTING (Web)
USER1 – 5 Default Settings
USER1 - 5 LEVEL SET
USER1, 2 AREA SET
Utility Settings (Web)
Ｖ
VALIDITY
Removal/Replacement
Verification After FA-95AIO
139
Various Signal Status Display (STATUS) 81
Verification After Dolby Option
278
278 Removal/Replacement
Verification After FA-95ALA
Removal/Replacement
VI OUT
VIDEO CLIP Setting ranges
VIDEO IN STATUS
VIDEO INPUT SELECT (IN SEL)
VIDEO INPUT SET
Video Loss Mode
VIDEO Menus
VIDEO OPTION (VIDEO OP)
VIDEO OPTION INPUT
279
96
56
82
58
59
156
37
VIDEO OPTION OUTPUT
VIDEO OUT SELECT (OUT SEL)
VIDEO OUT STATUS
VIDEO POSITION
VIDEO PROC AMP (PROCESS)
VIDEO Settings (Web)
VIDEO SYSTEM (VIDEO SYS)
Video System (Web)
Video Test Signal (Web)
68
83
84
62
84
73
37
154
70
202
172
Ｗ
81
227
147
222
6
159
161
235
50
50
53
217
WHITE LEVEL
WSS AFD ERROR
WSS OUT
Ｙ
Y/C Output format
37
76
96
63, 64, 175
YPbPr CLIP
YPbPr/RGB CLIP
56
55
YPbPr/RGB Clip (Web)
YPbPr/RGB Output Format
173
63, 64, 175
288
Warning
This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference when the equipment is operated in a commercial environment. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instruction manual, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. Operation of this equipment in a residential area is likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the user will be required to correct the interference at his own expense.
05/31/2013 Printed in Japan
FOR-A COMPANY LIMITED
Head Office 3-8-1 Ebisu, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo 150-0013, Japan
Overseas Division Phone: +81(0)3-3446-3936, Fax: +81(0)3-3446-1470
Japan Branch Offices Osaka/Okinawa/Fukuoka/Hiroshima/Nagoya/Sendai/Sapporo
R&D/Production Sakura Center/Sapporo Center
FOR-A America Corporate Office
11155 Knott Ave., Suite G&H, Cypress, CA 90630, USA
Phone: +1-714-894-3311 Fax: +1-714-894-5399
FOR-A America East Coast Office
2 Executive Drive, Suite 670, Fort Lee Executive Park, Fort Lee, NJ 07024, USA
Phone: +1-201-944-1120 Fax : +1-201-944-1132
FOR-A America Distribution & Service Center
2400 N.E. Waldo Road, Gainesville, FL 32609, USA
Phone: +1-352-371-1505 Fax: +1-352-378-5320
FOR-A Corporation of Canada
346A Queen Street West, Toronto, Ontario M5V 2A2, Canada
Phone: +1-416-977-0343 Fax: +1-416-977-0657
FOR-A Latin America & the Caribbean
5200 Blue Lagoon Drive, Suite 760, Miami, FL 33126, USA
Phone: +1-305-931-1700 Fax: +1-305-264-7890
FOR-A UK Limited
UNIT C71, Barwell Business Park, Leatherhead Road, Chessington Surrey, KT9 2NY, UK
Phone: +44(0)20-8391-7979 Fax: +44(0)20-8391-7978
FOR-A Italia S.r.l.
Via Volturno 37, 20047 Brugherio MB, Italy
Phone: +39-039-881-086/103 Fax: +39-039-878-140
FOR-A Corporation of Korea
1007, 57-5,Yangsan-ro,Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul 150-103, Korea
Phone: +82(0)2-2637-0761 Fax: +82(0)2-2637-0760
FOR-A China Limited
708B Huateng Bldg., No. 302, 3 District, Jinsong, Chaoyang, Beijing 100021, China
Phone: +86(0)10-8721-6023 Fax: +86(0)10-8721-6033
FOR-A Middle East-Africa Office
Jebel Ali Free Zone, LOB-16, Office 619, P. O. Box: 261914 Dubai, UAE
Phone: +971 4 887 6712 Fax: +971 4 887 6713
*The contents of this manual are subject to change without notice.
advertisement
Key Features
- Two independent frame synchronizers
- Supports a variety of video formats
- Built-in audio processing
- Remote control capability
- Redundant power supply
- Web browser interface
- Automatic Loudness Adjustment
- Dolby E/Digital decoder and encoder
- Analog component I/O expansion
Frequently Answers and Questions
What are the different modes of operation for the FA-9520?
How can I change the operation mode of the FA-9520?
What are the supported software versions for the FA-9520?
Related manuals
advertisement